Pioneer Avic 5100 Nex Operation Manual

AVIC 8100 NEX - Operation Manual AVIC-8100NEX_OM_EN Free User Guide for Pioneer GPS, Manual - page1

2015-07-27

: Pioneer Pioneer-Avic-5100-Nex-Operation-Manual-778412 pioneer-avic-5100-nex-operation-manual-778412 pioneer pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 264 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Operation Manual

MULTIMEDIA NAVIGATION RECEIVER

AVIC-8100NEX

AVIC-7100NEX

AVIC-6100NEX

AVIC-5100NEX

Notice to all users:

This software requires that the product is properly

connected to your vehicle’s parking brake and

depending on your vehicle, additional installation may

be required. For more information, please contact your

Authorized Pioneer Electronics retailer or call us at

(800) 421-1404.

Be sure to read Important Information for the User

first!

Important Information for the User includes the

important information that you must understand before

using this product.

English

Thank you for buying this Pioneer product.

Please read through these instructions so you will know how to operate your model

properly. After you have finished reading the instructions, keep this document in a

safe place for future reference.

Important

The screens shown in the examples may differ

from actual screens, which may be changed

without notice for performance and function

improvements.

Introduction

Manual overview 11

–How to use this manual 11

–Conventions used in this manual 11

–Terms used in this manual 11

Notes on internal memory 12

–Before removing the vehicle

battery 12

–Data subject to erasure 12

–Resetting the microprocessor 12

Basic operation

Checking part names and functions 13

Remote control 14

Use and care of the remote control 15

–Installing the battery 15

–Using the remote control 15

Protecting your product against theft 16

–Removing the detachable

faceplate 16

–Attaching the detachable faceplate 16

Notes on using the LCD panel 16

Adjusting the LCD panel angle 17

Inserting/ejecting/connecting media 17

–Inserting and ejecting a disc 17

–Inserting and ejecting an SD memory

card 18

–Connecting and disconnecting an

iPod 19

–Plugging and unplugging a USB

storage device 19

Startup and termination 19

On first-time startup 19

Regular startup 20

–A message about the map

database 20

Turning off the display 20

–When the Application screen is

available 20

–When the Application screen is not

available 20

How to use the screens 22

–Switching screens using the touch

panel keys 22

–Switching screens using the hardware

buttons 23

Supported AV source 24

Displaying the AV operation screen 24

–Selecting a front source on the AV

source selection screen 25

–Selecting a front source on the source

list 25

–Selecting a rear source 25

Turning off the AV source 25

Changing the display order of source

icons 25

Changing the display order of source

keys 26

Using the touch panel 26

–Using the common touch panel

keys 26

–Operating list screens 27

–Operating the time bar 27

–Operating the on-screen keyboard 27

On first-time startup of the navigation

system 28

How to use the Navigation menu screen

Operating the Navigation menu screen 29

How to use the map

How to read the Map screen 31

AV information bar 31

Operating the Map screen 32

–Changing the scale of the map 32

Contents

–Smart Zoom 32

–Switching between 2D, 3D, and 2D

North up views 32

–Scrolling the map to the position you

want to see 33

–Control keys on the scrolled map 33

Understanding the route guidance 34

–Frequently shown route events 34

Browsing the data field 35

–When the system cannot receive a GPS

signal 35

Searching for a destination

Searching for a location by address 37

Searching for Points of Interest (POI) 38

–Searching for POIs using preset

categories 38

–Searching for POIs by categories or

directly from the name of the

facilities 39

–Searching for providers nearby that

offer emergency or roadside assistance

services 40

Selecting a destination from stored

locations 41

Selecting a destination from stored

routes 41

Selecting a location you searched for

recently 42

–History 42

–Smart History 42

Searching for a location using “Combined

Search”43

Searching for a location by the

coordinates 44

Searching for a location by scrolling the

map 44

Using the “Map Location”screen 45

Checking and modifying the current

route

Modifying the route 46

–Building a route using “Route

Planner”46

–Adding waypoints 47

–Checking route alternatives 47

–Checking detour routes 48

–Checking route information and

preferences 48

–Canceling the current route

guidance 49

–Watching the simulation of the

route 50

Registering and editing locations and

routes

Storing a location in “Saved Location”51

–Storing your home and your workplace

location 51

–Storing your favorite locations 51

–Editing stored locations 51

Storing a route in “Saved Routes”52

Editing the stored route 53

–Renaming stored routes 53

–Deleting stored routes 53

Saving a location as an alert point 53

Editing the stored alert points 54

Receiving real-time traffic information

(TMC)

Viewing the traffic list 55

Checking the traffic incidents on the

map 55

When traffic incidents occur on your

route 56

Turning the traffic information on or off 56

Checking useful information about your

trip

Checking useful information 57

Recording your travel history 58

–Activating trip logger temporarily 58

–Browsing the trip log 58

–Setting the trip logger 59

En 3

Contents

–Editing a trip log 59

Using the Trip Computer mode 59

Calculating the fuel consumption 60

–Setting the initial odometer value 60

–Entering the fuel consumption

information 60

–Setting the car maintenance

schedule 61

Customizing preferences of the

navigation

Customizing the navigation settings 62

–Restoring the default settings 63

Information on each option of “Settings”63

–“Route Preferences”settings 63

–“Sound”settings 65

–“Warnings”settings 66

–“Navigation Map”settings 66

–“Regional”settings 68

–“Display”settings 69

–“Traffic”settings 69

–“Weather”settings 69

–“Fuel”settings 69

–“Trip Monitor”settings 69

–“Online Services”settings 69

–“Usage Reports”settings 70

Setting the alert point warnings 70

Expanding the use of the navigation

functions 71

–Be sure to read before you use

AVICSYNC function 71

–What is the AVICSYNC App? 72

Compatibility and connectivity 72

–AVICSYNC compatibility 72

–Preparations before using the

AVICSYNC function 73

Getting the map update 73

Registering and connecting a Bluetooth

device

Preparing communication devices 74

Registering your Bluetooth devices 74

–Searching for nearby Bluetooth

devices 74

–Pairing from your Bluetooth

devices 75

–Connecting to a Bluetooth device

automatically 76

–Deleting a registered device 76

Connecting a registered Bluetooth device

manually 77

Switching visibility 77

Entering the PIN code for Bluetooth wireless

connection 77

Displaying the Bluetooth address 78

Clearing the Bluetooth memory 78

Updating Bluetooth software 78

Displaying the Bluetooth software

version 79

Using hands-free phoning

Displaying the phone menu 80

–Touch panel keys 80

–Reading the screen 80

Making a phone call 81

–Direct dialing 81

–Calling a number in the phone

book 81

–Dialing from the history 82

–Using the preset dial lists 83

Receiving a phone call 83

–Answering an incoming call 84

Minimizing the dial confirmation screen 84

Changing the phone settings 85

–Answering a call automatically 85

–Switching the ring tone 85

–Inverting names in the phone book 85

–Setting the private mode 85

–Adjusting the other party’s listening

volume 86

Using the voice recognition function 86

Notes for hands-free phoning 86

Contents

iPod / iPhone or smartphone setup

operation

The basic flow of iPod / iPhone or

smartphone setup 88

Setting the device connection method 88

iPod compatibility 88

Android™device compatibility 89

AppRadio Mode Compatibility 89

MirrorLink device compatibility 89

Information on the connections and

functions for each device 90

Using the radio

Using the touch panel keys 93

Reading the screen 93

Starting procedure 94

Selecting a band 94

Manual tuning 94

Seek tuning 94

Selecting a preset channel from the preset

channel list 95

Storing broadcast frequencies 95

Storing the strongest broadcast

frequencies 95

Tuning into strong frequencies 95

Storing song information to an iPod (iTunes

Tagging) 96

Operating with the hardware buttons 96

HD Radio™reception

HD Radio stations 97

Using the touch panel keys 97

Reading the screen 98

Starting procedure 99

Selecting a band 99

Manual tuning 99

Seek tuning 99

Selecting a preset channel from the preset

channel list 100

Storing broadcast frequencies 100

Storing the strongest broadcast

frequencies 100

Tuning into strong frequencies 100

Switching the seek mode 101

Switching the reception mode 102

Storing song information to an iPod (iTunes

Tagging) 102

Operating with the hardware buttons 102

Playing a disc

Using the touch panel keys (for audio) 103

Using the touch panel keys (for video) 103

Reading the screen (for audio) 105

Reading the screen (for video) 105

Starting procedure 106

Selecting files from the file name list 106

Playing tracks in random order 106

Setting a repeat play range 106

Switching the media file type 107

Searching for the part you want to play 107

Operating the DVD menu 107

Switching the subtitle language 108

Switching the audio language 108

Frame-by-frame playback 108

Slow motion playback 108

Returning to a specified scene 108

Resuming playback (Bookmark) 109

Operating the DVD menu using touch panel

keys 109

Switching the multi-angle DVD display 109

Selecting the audio output 109

Operating with the hardware buttons 110

Playing compressed audio files

Using the touch panel keys 111

Reading the screen 112

Starting procedure (for Disc) 113

Starting procedure (for USB/SD) 113

Switching the browse mode 113

Selecting files from the file name list 114

Selecting a file from the list related to the

song currently playing (link search) 114

Playing files in random order 114

Setting a repeat play range 115

En 5

Contents

Switching the media file type 115

Operating with the hardware buttons 115

Playing compressed video files

Using the touch panel keys 116

Reading the screen 117

Starting procedure (for Disc) 117

Starting procedure (for USB/SD) 117

Selecting files from the file name list 117

Setting a repeat play range 118

Frame-by-frame playback 118

Slow motion playback 118

Switching the media file type 118

Operating with the hardware buttons 118

Playing compressed still image files

Using the touch panel keys 119

Reading the screen 119

Starting procedure 119

Selecting files from the file name list 120

Playing files in random order 120

Setting a repeat play range 120

Switching the media file type 120

Setting the slideshow interval 120

Operating with the hardware buttons 121

Using an iPod

Using the touch panel keys (for audio) 122

Using the touch panel keys (for video) 122

Using the touch panel keys (for iTunes

Radio) 123

Reading the screen (for audio) 123

Reading the screen (for video) 124

Reading the screen (for iTunes Radio) 124

Starting procedure 125

Setting the shuffle play 125

Setting a repeat play range 125

Selecting song or video sources from the

playlist screen 126

Using iTunes Radio 127

–Playing back songs similar to the

current song 127

–Setting the current song not to be

played back again 127

–Adding the current song to the wish

list 127

Using this product’s iPod function from your

iPod 128

Changing the speed of audiobook

playback 128

Displaying lists related to the song currently

playing (link search) 129

Operating with the hardware buttons 129

Playing back music from a music app other

than iPod music, as the iPod source 129

–Using the touch panel keys 129

–Reading the screen 130

Playing music output from the Android

Auto-compatible device

Using the touch panel keys 131

Reading the screen 131

Starting procedure 132

Using your iPhone or smartphone

applications

Using AppRadio Mode 133

–Using the touch panel keys (App

control side bar) 133

–Starting procedure 134

–Using the keyboard 135

–Adjusting the image size (For

smartphone users) 136

–Displaying the image of your

application (iPhone with 30-pin

connector) 137

–Displaying the image of your

application (iPhone with Lightning

connector) 137

–Displaying the image of your

application (smartphone) 138

Using Android Auto 138

–Starting procedure 139

–Setting the driving position 139

Contents

–Adjusting the volume 140

Using MirrorLink mode 140

–Using the touch panel keys (App

control side bar) 140

–Starting procedure 140

Using the audio mix function 141

Streaming Pandora®

Pandora operations 142

Using the touch panel keys 142

Reading the screen 143

Starting procedure 143

–For iPhone with a 30-pin connector

users 144

–For iPhone with a Lightning connector

users 144

–For smartphone users 144

Selecting a Pandora station from the

list 145

Creating a station 145

Operating with the hardware buttons 145

Using Aha Radio

Using the touch panel keys 146

Reading the screen 147

Starting procedure 147

–For iPhone with a 30-pin connector

users 147

–For iPhone with a Lightning connector

users 147

–For smartphone users 148

Operating with the hardware buttons 148

Using iDatalink

Activating iDatalink Maestro 149

–Updating the iDatalink Maestro

module 149

Starting procedure 149

Hands-free phone 151

–Setting Bluetooth 151

–Phone Book screen 152

–History list screen 152

–Dial screen 152

–Dial confirmation screen 152

Using a Bluetooth audio player

Using the touch panel keys 153

Reading the screen 154

Starting procedure 154

Selecting files from the file name list 155

Playing files in random order 155

Setting a repeat play range 155

Operating with the hardware buttons 155

Using the SiriusXM®satellite radio

SiriusXM satellite radio operations 156

–Subscribing to the SiriusXM Satellite

Radio service 156

Using the touch panel keys 156

Reading the screen 157

Starting procedure 158

Manual tuning 159

Selecting a preset channel from the preset

channel list 159

Storing broadcast channels 159

Selecting a SiriusXM channel directly 159

Selecting a channel from a list of all

channels 160

Selecting a channel from the category

list 160

Switching the displayed list 160

Using the Replay™function 161

Setting SiriusXM TuneStart™161

Using TuneScan™162

Using category scan 162

Using TuneMix™162

Checking the update Traffic and Weather

information 163

–Registering the city 163

Setting parental lock 164

–Setting the passcode 164

–Locking the channel 164

En 7

Contents

Using the content alerts function (such as

Song Alerts, Artist Alerts and Game

Alerts) 165

–Memorizing the current contents 165

Setting the program you want to be alerted

for 165

Selecting teams for Game Alert 166

Setting the Featured Favorites function 167

Setting the update notification for Featured

Favorites 168

Using the SportsFlash™function 168

Selecting teams for SportsFlash 169

Restoring the SiriusXM settings to the

default 170

Storing song information to an iPod (iTunes

Tagging) 170

Operating with the hardware buttons 171

Using an HDMI source

Using the touch panel keys 172

Reading the screen 172

Starting procedure 172

Using an AUX source

Using the touch panel keys 173

Reading the screen 173

Starting procedure 173

Setting the video signal 174

Switching the operation screen 174

Using AV input

Using the touch panel keys 175

Reading the screen 175

Starting procedure 175

Setting the video signal 176

Using MIXTRAX

Touch panel keys 177

Selecting an item to play songs 177

Selecting songs not to be played 177

Specifying the playback portion 178

Setting the flash pattern 178

System settings

Navigation info window 179

Setting automatic switching to the navigation

screen 179

Activating the Bluetooth audio source 179

Setting the ever scroll 180

Setting AV input 180

Setting the rear view camera 180

–Setting rear view camera

activation 181

–Setting the polarity of the rear view

camera 181

–Setting the reversed image display for

the rear view image 182

Setting the camera for Camera View

mode 182

Displaying the parking assist

guidelines 183

Setting guidelines on the rear view

image 183

Setting the second camera input 184

–Setting the second camera

activation 185

–Setting the reversed image setting for

the second camera input image 185

Turning off the demo screen 185

Selecting the system language 186

Setting the keyboard language with the

application for iPhone 186

Setting the beep sound 186

Adjusting the response positions of the

touch panel (touch panel calibration) 187

Setting the dimmer function 187

Setting whether to activate the dimmer

function 188

Setting the duration of time for the dimmer

function to be active 188

Adjusting the picture 189

Displaying the firmware version 190

Updating firmware 190

Contents

Checking sensor learning status and driving

status 191

Clearing the status 192

Checking the connections of leads 192

Audio adjustments

Using fader/balance adjustment 194

Using balance adjustment 194

Switching sound muting/attenuation 195

Adjusting source levels 195

Adjusting the filter 198

–Adjusting the front and rear speaker

output 198

–Using the subwoofer output 198

Selecting the listening position 199

Adjusting the speaker output levels

finely 199

Adjusting the time alignment 200

Using the automatic sound levelizer 202

Using the equalizer 202

–Recalling equalizer curves 202

–Customizing the equalizer curves 203

–Using the auto-adjusted equalizer 203

Adjusting the equalizer curve automatically

(Auto EQ) 203

–Before operating the Auto EQ

function 204

–Performing Auto EQ 204

Theme menu

Selecting the background display 207

–Changing to the background display

image stored on the external storage

device (USB, SD) 207

Setting the illumination color 208

–Selecting the color from the preset

colors 208

–Creating a user-defined color 209

Selecting the theme color 209

Selecting the clock image 209

Changing the preinstalled splash

screen 210

–Changing to the splash screen stored

on the external storage device (USB,

SD) 210

Replicating the settings 211

–Exporting “Theme”settings 211

–Importing “Theme”settings 212

Setting up the video player

Setting the top-priority languages 213

–Setting the subtitle language 213

–Setting the audio language 213

–Setting the menu language 214

Setting the angle icon display 214

Setting the aspect ratio 215

Setting parental lock 215

–Setting the code number and

level 215

Displaying your DivX VOD registration

code 216

Displaying your DivX VOD deregistration

code 217

Automatic playback of DVDs 217

Setting the video signal for the rear view

camera 218

Language code chart for DVDs 219

Favorite menu

Creating a shortcut 220

Selecting a shortcut 220

Removing a shortcut 220

Common operations

Setting the time and date 221

Storing song information to an iPod (iTunes

Tagging) 221

Setting the “Sound Retriever”function 222

Changing the wide screen mode 223

Other functions

Selecting the video for the rear display 224

Setting the anti-theft function 224

–Setting the password 224

–Entering the password 225

En 9

Contents

–Deleting the password 225

–Forgotten password 226

Restoring this product to the default

settings 226

–Restoring the default settings 226

Appendix

Troubleshooting 227

Error messages 229

Positioning technology 236

–Positioning by GPS 236

–Positioning by dead reckoning 236

–How do GPS and dead reckoning work

together? 236

Handling large errors 237

–When positioning by GPS is

impossible 237

–Conditions likely to cause noticeable

positioning errors 238

Route setting information 240

–Route search specifications 240

Handling and care of discs 240

–Built-in drive and care 241

–Ambient conditions for playing a

disc 241

Playable discs 241

–DVD-Video and CD 241

–AVCHD recorded discs 242

–Playing DualDisc 242

–Dolby Digital 242

Detailed information for playable media 242

–Compatibility 242

–Media compatibility chart 245

Bluetooth 249

SiriusXM®satellite radio 249

HD Radio™Technology 249

SDHC 249

WMA/WMV 249

DivX 249

AAC 250

Google, Google Play, Android™, and Android

Auto 250

MirrorLink 250

MIXTRAX 250

Detailed information regarding connected

iPod devices 250

–iPod and iPhone 250

–Lightning 251

–App Store 251

–iOS 251

–iTunes 251

–iTunes Radio 251

Using app-based connected content 251

–Pandora®252

–Aha Radio 252

HDMI 252

MHL 252

IVONA Text-to-Speech 252

Notice regarding video viewing 252

Notice regarding DVD-Video viewing 252

Notice regarding MP3 file usage 253

Notice regarding open source licenses 253

Map coverage 253

Using the LCD screen correctly 253

–Handling the LCD screen 253

–Liquid crystal display (LCD)

screen 253

–Maintaining the LCD screen 253

–LED (light-emitting diode)

backlight 254

Display information 255

–Phone menu 255

–System menu 255

–Theme menu 256

–Audio menu 257

–Video Setup menu 257

–Bluetooth menu 258

Specifications 259

Contents

Manual overview

Before using this product, be sure to read Im-

portant Information for the User (a separate

manual) which contains warnings, cautions,

and other important information that you

should note.

The screen examples shown in this manual

are those for AVIC-8100NEX. The screens may

vary according to the models.

How to use this manual

Finding the operation procedure for

what you want to do

When you have decided what you want to do,

you can find the page you need from the Con-

tents.

Finding the operation procedure from

a menu name

If you want to check the meaning of an item

displayed on screen, you will find the neces-

sary page from the Display information at the

end of this manual.

Conventions used in this manual

Before moving on, take a few minutes to read

the following information about the conven-

tions used in this manual. Familiarity with

these conventions will help you greatly as you

learn how to use your new equipment.

!Buttons on this product are described in

ALL CAPITALS,BOLD lettering:

e.g.)

HOME button, MODE button.

!Menu items, screen titles, and functional

components are described in bold with

double quotation marks “”:

e.g.)

“System”screen or “Audio”screen

!Touch panel keys that are available on the

screen are described in bold in brackets [ ]:

e.g.)

[Disc], [AV Source Settings].

!Extra information, alternatives and other

notes are presented in the following for-

mat:

e.g.)

pIf the home location has not been stored

yet, set the location first.

!Functions of other keys on the same screen

are indicated with #at the beginning of the

description:

e.g.)

#If you touch [OK], the entry is deleted.

!References are indicated like this:

e.g.)

=For details of the operations, refer to

How to use the screens on page 22.

!Model icons shown in this manual indicate

that the description is intended for the

models indicated by the icons.

If the following icons are shown, the de-

scription is applied only to the models

shown.

e.g.)

8100NEX 7100NEX

Terms used in this manual

“Front display”and “Rear display”

In this manual, the screen that is attached to

the body of this product will be referred to as

the “Front display”. Any additional screen that

is commercially available and can be con-

nected to this product will be referred to as the

“Rear display”.

“Video image”

“Video image”in this manual indicates mov-

ing images of DVD-Videos, Video-CDs, ROM-

Videos, DivX®, iPod, and any equipment that is

connected to this product, such as general-

purpose AV equipment.

En 11

Chapter

Introduction

“External storage device (USB, SD)”

The SD memory card, SDHC memory card

and USB memory device are collectively re-

ferred to as the “external storage device (USB,

SD)”. If it indicates the USB memory only, it is

referred to as the “USB storage device”.

“SD memory card”

The SD memory card and SDHC memory card

are collectively referred to as the “SD memory

card”.

“iPod”

In this manual, iPod and iPhone will be re-

ferred to as “iPod”.

Notes on internal memory

Before removing the vehicle

battery

If the battery is disconnected or discharged,

the memory will be erased and must be repro-

grammed.

pSome of the settings and recorded con-

tents will not be reset.

Data subject to erasure

The information is erased by disconnecting

the yellow lead from the battery (or removing

the battery itself).

pSome of the settings and recorded con-

tents will not be reset.

Resetting the microprocessor

CAUTION

Pressing the RESET button resets settings and re-

corded contents to the factory settings.

pDo not perform this operation when a device

is connected to this product.

pSome of the settings and recorded contents

will not be reset.

The microprocessor must be reset under the

following conditions:

!Prior to using this product for the first time

after installation.

!If this product fails to operate properly.

!If there appears to be problems with the op-

eration of the system.

!If your vehicle position is shown on the

map with a significant positioning error.

1 Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2 Press the RESET button with a pen tip

or other pointed implement.

Settings and recorded contents are reset to

the factory settings.

8100NEX 7100NEX

6100NEX 5100NEX

1RESET button

Chapter

01 Introduction

Checking part names and

functions

This chapter gives information about the names

of the parts and the main features using the but-

tons.

8100NEX 7100NEX

1 3 4 56 7 8 92

6100NEX 5100NEX

1LCD screen

2Remote control sensor

pThe remote control CD-R33 (sold sepa-

rately) is available.

For details concerning operations, see

the remote control manual.

3VOL (+/–) button

Press to adjust the AV (Audio and Video)

source volume.

4MAP button

!Press to display the Map screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to

How to use the screens on page 22.

!Press and hold to display the rear view

camera image.

pThis function is available only when

“Back Camera Input”or “2nd Cam-

era Input”is set to “On”.

5HOME button

!Press to display the Top menu screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to

How to use the screens on page 22.

!Press and hold to activate the voice re-

cognition function.

=For details, refer to Using the voice re-

cognition function on page 86.

6MODE button

!Press to switch between the Application

screen and the AV operation screen.

pIf the display cannot switch from the

AV operation screen to the Applica-

tion screen when the MODE button is

pressed, the display will turn off.

=For details of the operations, refer to

How to use the screens on page 22.

!Press and hold to turn the display off

when the Application screen is available.

=For details, refer to Turning off the dis-

play on page 20.

7TRK button

Press to perform manual seek tuning, fast

forward, reverse and track search controls.

8hbutton

9RESET button

=For details of the operations, refer to Re-

setting the microprocessor on page 12.

En 13

Chapter

Basic operation

aAuto EQ microphone input jack

Use to connect a microphone for acoustical

measurement (sold separately).

bDisc-loading slot

Insert a disc to play.

=For details, refer to Inserting and ejecting

a disc on page 17.

cSD card slot

=For details, refer to Inserting and ejecting

an SD memory card on page 18.

dDetachable faceplate

ebutton

Press to remove the detachable faceplate

from this product.

=For details, refer to Removing the detach-

able faceplate on page 16.

Remote control

8100NEX 6100NEX

1VOLUME (+/–)

2REAR SRC

!Press to cycle through all the available

rear sources.

!Press and hold to turn the rear source

off.

3SRC/OFF

!Press to cycle through all the available

front sources.

!Press and hold to turn the front source

off.

4Source mode select switch

Use to switch the source mode between the

front source and the rear source.

5Thumb pad

Use to select a menu on the DVD menu.

6RETURN

Returns to the specified point and starts

playback from there.

Press to pause or resume playback.

For audio

Press and hold to perform fast reverse.

For video

!Press to perform fast reverse.

!Press to change the fast reverse speed.

For audio

Press and hold to perform fast forward.

For video

!Press to perform fast forward.

!Press to change the fast forward speed.

Press to return to the previous track (chap-

ter).

Press to go to the next track (chapter).

Press to stop playback.

If you resume playback, playback will start

from the point where you stopped. Touch

the key again to stop playback completely.

8FOLDER/P.CH

!Press to select the next or previous disc

or folder.

Chapter

02 Basic operation

!Press to recall radio station frequencies

assigned to preset channel keys.

9MUTE

Press to mute. Press again to unmute.

aMENU

Press to display the DVD menu during DVD

playback.

TOP MENU

Press to return to the top menu during DVD

playback.

bAUDIO

Press to change the audio language during

DVD playback.

SUBTITLE

Press to change the subtitle language dur-

ing DVD playback.

ANGLE

Press to change the viewing angle during

DVD playback.

cBAND/ESC

!Press to select the tuner band when

tuner is selected as a source.

!Press to cancel the control mode of func-

tions.

!Press to switch between media file types

when playing the following types of data:

—Disc

—External storage device (USB, SD)

Use and care of the remote

control

Installing the battery

Slide the tray on the back of the remote con-

trol out and insert the battery with the plus (+)

and minus (–) poles aligned properly.

!When using for the first time, pull out the

film protruding from the tray.

WARNING

!Keep the battery out of the reach of children.

Should the battery be swallowed, consult a

doctor immediately.

!Batteries (battery pack or batteries installed)

must not be exposed to excessive heat such

as sunshine, fire or the like.

CAUTION

!Remove the battery if the remote control is not

used for a month or longer.

!There is a danger of explosion if the battery is

incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the

same or equivalent type.

!Do not handle the battery with metallic tools.

!Do not store the battery with metallic objects.

!If the battery leaks, wipe the remote control

completely clean and install a new battery.

!When disposing of used batteries, comply

with governmental regulations or environmen-

tal public institutions’rules that apply in your

country/area.

Using the remote control

Point the remote control in the direction of the

front panel to operate.

!The remote control may not function prop-

erly in direct sunlight.

Important

!Do not store the remote control in high tem-

peratures or direct sunlight.

!Do not let the remote control fall onto the

floor, where it may become jammed under the

brake or gas pedal.

En 15

Chapter

Basic operation

Protecting your product

against theft

6100NEX 5100NEX

The detachable faceplate can be detached

from this product to discourage theft, as de-

scribed below.

CAUTION

!Do not expose the detachable faceplate to ex-

cessive shock or disassemble it.

!Never grip the buttons tightly or use force

when removing or attaching the detachable

faceplate.

!Keep the detachable faceplate out of reach of

small children to prevent them from placing it

in their mouths.

!After removing the detachable faceplate, keep

it in a safe place so it is not scratched or da-

maged.

!Do not expose the detachable faceplate to di-

rect sunlight and high temperatures.

!When removing or attaching the detachable

faceplate, do so after turning off the ignition

switch (ACC OFF).

Removing the detachable

faceplate

pThis product cannot be operated while the

detachable faceplate is removed from this

product.

1 Press the button.

When you release your finger, the bottom of

the detachable faceplate separates slightly

from this product.

2 Gently grip the bottom of the detach-

able faceplate and slowly pull it outward.

1Detachable faceplate

Attaching the detachable faceplate

1 Slide the detachable faceplate all the

way into this product.

Make sure the detachable faceplate is se-

curely connected to the mounting hooks of

this product.

2 Push the lower part of the detachable

faceplate until you hear a click.

If you fail to successfully attach the detach-

able faceplate to this product, try again but be

careful not to force it as the panel could be

damaged.

Notes on using the LCD panel

8100NEX 7100NEX

WARNING

!Keep hands and fingers clear of this product

when opening, closing, or adjusting the LCD

panel. Be especially cautious of children’s

hands and fingers.

!Do not use with the LCD panel left open. If the

LCD panel is left open, it may result in injury

in the event of an accident.

Chapter

02 Basic operation

CAUTION

!Do not open or close the LCD panel by force.

This may cause a malfunction.

!Do not operate this product until the LCD

panel has completely opened or closed. If this

product is operated while the LCD panel is

opening or closing, the LCD panel may stop at

that angle for safety.

!Do not place a glass or can on the open LCD

panel. Doing so may break this product.

Adjusting the LCD panel angle

8100NEX 7100NEX

1 Press the hbutton.

The following screen appears.

2 Touch the following keys to adjust the

angle of the LCD panel.

Laying the panel down.

Returning the panel to the upright

position.

3 Touch the following key.

Returns to the previous screen.

pThe adjusted angle of the LCD panel will be

memorized and the LCD panel will automa-

tically return to that angle the next time the

LCD panel is opened or closed.

Inserting/ejecting/

connecting media

CAUTION

!Do not insert anything other than a disc into

the disc-loading slot.

!Do not insert anything other than SD memory

cards into the SD card slot.

!Ejecting an SD memory card during data

transfer can damage the SD memory card. Be

sure to eject the SD memory card by the pro-

cedure described in this manual.

!Do not press the hbutton when an SD mem-

ory card is not fully inserted. Doing so may da-

mage the card.

!Do not press the hbutton before an SD mem-

ory card has been completely removed. Doing

so may damage the card.

Inserting and ejecting a disc

Inserting a disc

8100NEX 7100NEX

1 Press the hbutton.

The following screen appears.

2 Touch the following key.

Opens the LCD panel.

3 Insert a disc into the disc-loading slot.

The disc is loaded, and the LCD panel closes.

Ejecting a disc

8100NEX 7100NEX

1 Press the hbutton.

The following screen appears.

En 17

Chapter

Basic operation

2 Touch the following key.

The LCD panel opens, and the disc

is ejected.

3 Remove the disc, and press the hbut-

ton.

The LCD panel closes.

Inserting a disc

6100NEX 5100NEX

%Insert a disc into the disc-loading slot.

Ejecting a disc

6100NEX 5100NEX

%Press the hbutton.

The disc is ejected.

Inserting and ejecting an SD

memory card

pThis system is not compatible with the

Multi Media Card (MMC).

pCompatibility with all SD memory cards is

not guaranteed.

pThis product may not achieve optimum per-

formance with some SD memory cards.

Inserting an SD memory card

8100NEX 7100NEX

1 Press the hbutton.

The following screen appears.

2 Touch the following key.

Opens the LCD panel.

3 Insert an SD memory card into the SD

card slot.

Insert it with the label surface face-up and

press the card until it clicks and completely

locks.

4 Press the hbutton.

The LCD panel closes.

Ejecting an SD memory card

8100NEX 7100NEX

1 Press the hbutton.

The following screen appears.

2 Touch the following key.

Opens the LCD panel.

3 Press the middle of the SD memory

card gently until it clicks.

The SD memory card is ejected.

4 Pull the SD memory card out straight.

5 Press the hbutton.

The LCD panel closes.

Chapter

02 Basic operation

Connecting and disconnecting

an iPod

Connecting your iPod

=For details of the connections, refer to the

Installation Manual.

Disconnecting your iPod

%Pull out the cables after confirming

that no data is being accessed.

Plugging and unplugging a USB

storage device

pThis product may not achieve optimum per-

formance with some USB storage devices.

pConnection via a USB hub is not possible.

pA USB cable is required for connection.

Plugging in a USB storage device

%Plug a USB storage device into the USB

cable.

1USB cable

2USB storage device

Unplugging a USB storage device

%Pull out the USB storage device after

checking that no data is being accessed.

Startup and termination

1 Start the engine to boot up the system.

After a short pause, the splash screen comes

on for a few seconds.

2 Turn off the vehicle engine to termi-

nate the system.

This product is also turned off.

On first-time startup

When you use this product for the first time,

select the language that you want to use.

1 Start the engine to boot up the system.

After a short pause, the splash screen comes

on for a few seconds.

The “Select Program Language”screen ap-

pears.

2 Touch the language that you want to

use on screen.

3 Touch the following key.

Displays the “Smartphone Setup”

screen.

4 Touch the item you want to set.

=For details, refer to Information on the con-

nections and functions for each device on

page 90.

5 Touch the following key.

Displays the Top menu screen.

#If you touch , the display returns to the pre-

vious screen.

En 19

Chapter

Basic operation

Regular startup

%Start the engine to boot up the system.

After a short pause, the splash screen comes

on for a few seconds.

pThe screen shown will differ depending on

the previous conditions.

pEnter the password for the anti-theft func-

tion if the password entry screen appears.

pThe terms appear if the screen displayed

last was the navigation screen.

Read the terms carefully, checking the de-

tails, and then touch [OK] if you agree to

the conditions.

After you touch [OK], the screen that was

displayed just before turning off the ignition

switch (ACC OFF) is displayed.

A message about the map

database

After you start using this product, a message

related to map data may be displayed.

pThis message is displayed the first time you

turn on this product each month.

Turning off the display

You can turn off the display at night or when

the screen is too bright.

When the Application screen is

available

%Press and hold the MODE button.

The display turns off.

pIf you touch the screen when the display is

off, it reverts to the original screen.

When the Application screen is

not available

%Press the MODE button.

The display turns off.

pIf you touch the screen when the display is

off, it reverts to the original screen.

Chapter

02 Basic operation

En 21

Chapter

Basic operation

How to use the screens

Switching screens using the touch panel keys

Chapter

02 Basic operation

Switching screens using the hardware buttons

1Top menu screen

This is the starting menu to access the de-

sired screens and operate the various func-

tions.

pIf you press the HOME button, the Top

menu screen is displayed.

p“APPS”is displayed when AppRadio

Mode or MirrorLink mode is on.

p“Android Auto”is displayed when

Android Auto is on (for AVIC-8100NEX

and AVIC-7100NEX).

2Time and date setting screen

You can set the time and date settings.

3Setting menu screen

You can customize the system and audio

settings, etc.

4Phone menu screen

You can access the screen that is related to

hands-free phoning.

5AV source selection screen

You can select the AV source.

6Favorite source icons

You can display the icons of frequently used

sources by dragging the icons to the display

area.

=For details of the operation, refer to

Changing the display order of source

icons on page 25.

7AV operation screen

You can operate each source.

8Navigation menu screen

You can specify way points and a destina-

tion.

9Map screen

!You can use this screen to check the cur-

rent vehicle position information and

route to the destination.

!You can customize navigation settings.

pIf you press the MAP button, the Map

screen is displayed.

aApplication operation screen

You can control the iPhone or smartphone

applications directly on this product.

pIf applications are not available, the Ap-

plication operation screen will not be dis-

played.

En 23

Chapter

Basic operation

bApplication menu screen

This product can switch to the application

menu, on which you can display and oper-

ate the application for an iPhone or a smart-

phone on the screen.

pIf application menus are not available,

the Application menu screen will not be

displayed.

Supported AV source

You can play or use the following sources with

this product.

!Radio (FM, AM) (*1)

!HD Radio (HD Radio™tuner) (*2)

!CD

!ROM (compressed audio or video files)

!DVD-Video

!Video-CD

The following sources can be played back or

used by connecting an auxiliary device.

!USB

!SD (*3)

!iPod

!My Vehicle

!Pandora®

!Aha Radio

!Bluetooth audio

!SiriusXM®Satellite Radio

!AV input (AV)

!AUX

!HDMI (*2)

p(*1) Available for AVIC-5100NEX.

p(*2) Available for AVIC-8100NEX, AVIC-

7100NEX and AVIC-6100NEX.

p(*3) Available for AVIC-8100NEX and AVIC-

7100NEX.

Displaying the AV

operation screen

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the AV operation key.

1AV operation key

The AV operation screen appears.

132

1Displays the source list.

=For details, refer to Selecting a front

source on the source list on page 25.

2Displays the Time and date setting

screen.

=For details, refer to Setting the time and

date on page 221.

3Displays the Setting menu screen.

4Recalls equalizer curves.

=For details, refer to Using the equalizer

on page 202.

5Displays the Phone menu screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the phone

menu on page 80.

6Shows the navigation information.

The distance to the next guidance point, the

name of the street on which the next gui-

dance point is located, the name of the

street that the vehicle is currently traveling

on, the estimated time of arrival, and warn-

ing icons, etc. are displayed.

pThis is not displayed for some sources.

pThis is not displayed when “Navigation

info window”is set to “Off”.

Chapter

02 Basic operation

=For details, refer to Navigation info win-

dow on page 179.

Selecting a front source on the

AV source selection screen

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following key.

Displays the AV source selection

screen.

3 Touch the source icon you want to se-

lect.

The AV operation screen of the selected

source appears.

Selecting a front source on the

source list

pThis function is not available during a call

via this product.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the AV operation key.

1AV operation key

The AV operation screen appears.

3 Touch the following key.

Displays the source list.

4 Touch the source key you want to se-

lect.

The AV operation screen of the selected

source appears.

p“Camera View”is available only when

“Back Camera Input”or “2nd Camera

Input”is set to “On”.

Selecting a rear source

You can select a source output to the rear dis-

play.

=For details of the operations, refer to Select-

ing the video for the rear display on page

224.

Turning off the AV source

Turn off the AV source to stop playing or re-

ceiving the AV source.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following key.

Displays the AV source selection

screen.

3 Touch [OFF].

The AV source is turned off.

Changing the display order

of source icons

You can change the display order of source

icons on the AV source selection screen.

pThis setting is available only when you stop

your vehicle in a safe place and apply the

parking brake.

pThis function is not available during a call

via this product.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

En 25

Chapter

Basic operation

2 Touch the following key.

Displays the AV source selection

screen.

3 Touch and hold a source icon, and drag

the icon to the desired position.

pIf the source icon is moved, the order of the

source list is also changed.

Changing the display order

of source keys

You can change the display order of source

keys on the source list.

pThis setting is available only when you stop

your vehicle in a safe place and apply the

parking brake.

pThis function is not available during a call

via this product.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the AV operation key.

1AV operation key

The AV operation screen appears.

3 Touch the following key.

Displays the source list.

4 Touch the following key.

The source keys can be moved.

5 Drag the source key to the desired posi-

tion.

6 Touch the following key.

Returns to the previous screen.

pIf the source key is moved, the source icons

displayed on the Top menu screen and the

AV source screen are also moved.

Using the touch panel

You can operate this product by touching the

marks and items (touch panel keys) displayed

on the screen directly with your fingers.

pTo protect the LCD screen from damage, be

sure to touch the touch panel keys only

with your finger and do so gently.

Using the common touch panel

keys

1 2

1Returns to the previous screen.

2Closes the screen.

Chapter

02 Basic operation

Operating list screens

1Touching an item on the list selects the item

or narrows down the options.

2Appears when all characters are not displayed

on the display area.

If you touch the key, the rest of the characters

are scrolled for display.

3Appears when items cannot be displayed on a

single page only.

Drag the slider bar to view any hidden items.

Also, you can drag the list to view any hidden

items.

Operating the time bar

1You can change the playback point by drag-

ging the key.

pPlayback time corresponding to the po-

sition of the key is displayed while drag-

ging the key.

pThis function is not available when

using iPod function with an iPhone 6

Plus, iPhone 6, iPhone 5s, iPhone 5c,

iPhone 5, or iPod touch (5th genera-

tion).

pThis function is not available for some

media or sources.

Operating the on-screen keyboard

1Displays the characters that are entered. If

there is no text in the box, an informative

guide with text appears.

2Moves the cursor to the right or left for a num-

ber of characters equivalent to the number of

touches.

3Enters the characters in the text box.

4Deletes the input text to the left of the cursor

one letter at a time. Continuing to touch the

key deletes all of the text.

5Confirms the entry and proceeds to the next

step.

6Enters a space.

A space equivalent to the number of touches

is inserted.

7Switches between alphabet and numbers/

symbols.

8Switches between capital and lower case

letters.

En 27

Chapter

Basic operation

On first-time startup of the

navigation system

When you use the navigation function for the

first time, an initial setup process starts auto-

matically. Follow the steps below.

pYou can change the language and GPS log

setting later using [Regional] and [Usage

Reports] in the “Settings”screen. Other

settings can be restarted later using [Start

Configuration Wizard] in the “Settings”

screen.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys.

Initiates the initial startup of the

navigation system.

pThe first time that the MAP button is

pressed, the navigation system also begins

its initial startup.

After a short pause, the splash screen comes

on for a few seconds.

The “Language”screen appears.

3 Select the language that you want to

use on the screen, then touch [Select].

The “EULA”screen appears.

4 Read the terms carefully, checking the

details, and then touch [Accept] if you

agree to the conditions.

The “Usage Reports”screen appears.

5 Touch [Yes].

If you touch [Yes], the software collects usage

information and GPS logs that may be used

for improving the application and the quality

and coverage of maps.

pIf you do not wish to activate information

collection, touch [No].

The configuration wizard starts.

6 Touch [Next].

The “Voice Language”screen appears.

7 Select the language that you want to

use for voice guidance messages, then

touch [Next].

8 If needed, modify the unit settings,

then touch [Next].

The “Route Preferences”screen appears.

9 If needed, modify the default route

planning options, then touch [Next].

10 Touch [Activate], then [Next].

A message saying that the connected online

features are activated appears if you activate

these services right away.

=For details, refer to “Online Services”set-

tings on page 69.

pYou will need to install the AVICSYNC App

on your iPhone or smartphone first in order

to be able to use online services, which re-

quire a paid subscription. Service coverage

for each online service may vary depending

on the content provider providing the ser-

vice.

=For details, refer to Expanding the use of

the navigation functions on page 71.

11 Select the connected services you want

to use, then touch [Next].

The initial setup is now complete. The Map

screen appears and you can start using the

navigation system.

Chapter

02 Basic operation

Operating the Navigation

menu screen

1 Press the MAP button.

The Map screen appears.

2 Touch the following key.

Displays the navigation menu on

the Map screen.

The following screen appears.

Touch panel keys (Page 1)

21 63 4

789 a

Touch panel keys (Page 2)

cb d

You will see the following keys when you are

navigating without a planned route.

1Returns to the Map screen.

2Searches for your destination by the ad-

dress or coordinates, or searches for the se-

lected place of interest, etc.

=For details, refer to Chapter 5.

3Builds your route or edits the route cur-

rently set.

=For details, refer to Building a route

using “Route Planner”on page 46.

4Displays the “Traffic Summary”screen.

=For details, refer to Checking the traffic

incidents on the map on page 55.

pFor AVIC-5100NEX, this key becomes ac-

tive when the online traffic feature is

available.

5Displays useful information to support your

driving.

=For details, refer to Chapter 9.

6Displays notifications that contain impor-

tant information.

7Displays the location that you saved as a fa-

vorite.

=For details, refer to Selecting a destina-

tion from stored locations on page 41.

8Switches among 2D, 3D, and 2D North up

view modes.

9Displays the “User Profiles”screen where

you can create new profiles or edit the exist-

ing profiles.

If multiple drivers are using this product,

they can create their own profiles with their

own settings. If you select a new profile,

this product restarts so that the new set-

tings can take effect.

aDisplays the next page of the navigation

menu.

bDisplays the previous page of the naviga-

tion menu.

cConfigures the navigation-related settings

and enables you to access the “SyncTool”

screen.

=For details, refer to Chapter 10.

dDisplays the information of your navigation

system (the version information, or li-

censes, for example).

pon the upper right corner of the screen

is used for AVICSYNC App connection.

=Be sure read Expanding the use of the

navigation functions (page 71) before

using the AVICSYNC function.

pWhen you are navigating a planned route,

the following route-related keys are avail-

able.

En 29

Chapter

How to use the Navigation menu screen

Adds a waypoint.

Displays route alter-

natives, parts of the

route to avoid, or spe-

cific roads in your

planned route to

avoid.

Displays the route in

its full length on the

map, and displays

route parameters and

route alternatives.

Deletes your route or

removes a waypoint.

Suspends and re-

sumes the route gui-

dance.

Chapter

03 How to use the Navigation menu screen

Most of the information provided by your naviga-

tion system can be seen on the map. You need to

become familiar with how information appears

on the map.

How to read the Map screen

pThe following information marked with an

asterisk (*) appears only when a route is

set.

pDepending on the conditions and settings,

some items may not be displayed.

pAV information is displayed at the bottom

of the Map screen.

pYou can select whether you want to see the

speed limit sign on the map all the time. If

you exceed the speed limit, the sign color

will change.

=For details, refer to “Warnings”settings

on page 66.

1Shows the number and name of the street to

be used (or next guidance point).*

2Shows the next guidance point (maneuver).*

Both the type of the event (turn, traffic circle,

exiting freeway, etc.) and its distance from the

current position are displayed. A smaller icon

shows the type of the second next maneuver if

it is near the next maneuver.

=For details, refer to Frequently shown

route events on page 34.

3Shows the distance to the next guidance point

(maneuver).*

4Shows the second maneuver arrow.*

5Indicates the current location of your vehicle.

The apex of the triangular mark indicates your

orientation and the display moves automati-

cally as you drive.

6Displays the data field.

Touching this field displays the “Trip Compu-

ter”screen.

Touch and hold down this key and then select

the values that you wish to have displayed to

customize the data fields in the corner of the

Map screen.

=For details, refer to Data Fields on page

67.

7Shows the name of the street (or city) that

your vehicle is traveling on (or in).

8Indicates the current route.*

The route currently set is highlighted in color

on the map.

9Displays the Navigation menu screen.

Indicates the progress to the final destination.*

AV information bar

AV information is displayed at the bottom of

the Map screen.

12 34

1Displays the source list.

=For details, refer to Selecting a front

source on the source list on page 25.

2Shows the current status of AV source briefly.

3You can turn on or off the communication be-

tween the AVICSYNC App and the navigation

system by touching the key.

4Displays the Phone menu screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the phone

menu on page 80.

En 31

Chapter

How to use the map

Operating the Map screen

Changing the scale of the map

pThere is a limit to map scaling in 3D map

view mode. If the map scale is zoomed out

further, the map is zoomed out in 2D map.

=For details, refer to Switching between

2D, 3D, and 2D North up views on page

32.

1 Press the MAP button.

The Map screen appears.

2 Pinch or expand the map to zoom out

or in.

Touch anywhere on the map during naviga-

tion.

3 Touch the following key.

The map returns to the current po-

sition.

pIf you press the MAP button, the map re-

turns to the current position.

pFor information on the controls when the

scrolled map is displayed, refer to Control

keys on the scrolled map on page 33.

Smart Zoom

Your navigation system features “Smart Zoom”

that works in two ways:

!When the route is set:

When approaching a turn, “Smart Zoom”

will zoom in and raise the view angle to en-

able you to easily recognize your maneuver

at the next junction. If the next turn is at a

distance, it will zoom out and lower the

view angle to be flat so you can see the

road in front of you.

!When the route is not set:

“Smart Zoom”will zoom in if you drive

slowly and zoom out when you drive at

high speed.

Switching between 2D, 3D, and

2D North up views

You can switch how the map is displayed. For

2D map view mode, you can select between

“Heading up”and “North up”.

!Heading up:

The map display always shows the vehicle’s

direction as proceeding toward the top of

the screen.

!North up:

The map display always has north at the

top of the screen.

pThe map orientation is fixed at “Heading

up”when the 3D map screen is displayed.

1 Press the MAP button.

The Map screen appears.

2 Touch the following key.

Displays the navigation menu on

the Map screen.

3 Touch the following key.

Each time you touch the key the setting

changes.

Indicates 2D Heading up view

mode is currently selected.

Indicates 3D Heading up view

mode is currently selected.

Indicates 2D North up view mode

is currently selected.

4 Touch the following key.

Returns to the Map screen.

pIf you press the MAP button, you can return

to the Map screen.

Chapter

04 How to use the map

pFor information on the controls when the

scrolled map is displayed, refer to Control

keys on the scrolled map on page 33.

Scrolling the map to the

position you want to see

1 Press the MAP button.

The Map screen appears.

2 Touch and drag the map in the desired

direction to scroll.

If you place the cursor on the desired location,

a brief overview about the location will appear

at the top of the screen, showing the street

name and other information for the location.

3 Touch the following key.

The map returns to the current po-

sition.

pIf you press the MAP button, the map re-

turns to the current position.

Control keys on the scrolled map

1 Press the MAP button.

The Map screen appears.

2 Touch anywhere on the map.

The cursor and control keys appear.

3 Touch the following key.

Zooms in.

Zooms out.

Changes the map view mode (the

map mode currently selected is

shown).

Tilts up.

Tilts down.

Rotates left.

Rotates right.

Cancels map rotation.

pYou can change the vertical view angle of

the map in 3D mode only.

=For details, refer to Switching between

2D, 3D, and 2D North up views on page

32.

4 Touch the following key.

The map returns to the current po-

sition.

pIf you press the MAP button, the map re-

turns to the current position.

En 33

Chapter

How to use the map

Understanding the route

guidance

Once the route guidance begins, the system

provides various guides by voice, text indica-

tions and signs.

Frequently shown route events

Icon Meaning

Turn left.

Turn right.

Turn back.

Bear right.

Turn sharp left.

Keep left.

Continue straight though the inter-

section.

Go left on the traffic circle, 3rd exit

(next maneuver).

Enter traffic circle (maneuver after

the next maneuver).

Enter freeway.

Exit freeway.

Icon Meaning

Board ferry.

Leave ferry.

Approaching a waypoint.

Approaching the destination.

When navigating on multilane roads, you will

need to make sure to take the proper lane for

the recommended route.

If there is lane information available in the

map data, the navigation system will display

the lanes and corresponding directions of tra-

vel at the bottom of the map using small ar-

rows. Highlighted arrows represent the lane

and direction that you need to take for the re-

commended route.

Lane information

Signs are displayed at the top of the map. Sign

colors and design styles are similar to those of

the actual signs in place above or along the in-

dicated roads. These signs display select desti-

nations and the road number of the road that

the relevant lane leads to.

Chapter

04 How to use the map

If you are approaching a complex intersection

and the necessary information exists, the map

is replaced with a 3D view of the junction.

Signposts

Junction view

pIf the data for these items is not contained

in the map data, the information is not

available even if there are signs on the ac-

tual road.

When you set “Offer Freeway Services”to

“on”, the icon appears while you are driving

on freeways. Touch the icon to open the details

of the next few exits or service stations. In ad-

dition, touch an item to show its location on

the map. You can set it as a waypoint easily.

pIf you want to display other types of POIs

for the exits, you can change the icons in

“Services Displayed”.

=For details, refer to “Navigation Map”set-

tings on page 66.

Browsing the data field

The data fields are different when you are navi-

gating a route and when you have no specified

destination. For example, the data field pro-

vides the following information.

!When the route is set:

Distance to final destination, time needed

to reach the final destination and estimated

arrival time are shown.

!When the route is not set:

Direction or altitude is shown.

pTouching and holding the field allows you

to display the setting screen for the field.

pThe estimated time of arrival is an ideal

value calculated based on the speed limit

value set in “Max. Speed”of vehicle type

setting and the actual driving speed. The

estimated time of arrival is only a reference

value, and does not guarantee arrival at

that time.

=For details, refer to “Route Preferences”

settings on page 63.

When the system cannot

receive a GPS signal

A triangular mark shows the current position

of your vehicle.

En 35

Chapter

How to use the map

When a GPS position is available, the triangu-

lar mark is displayed in full color.

When there is no GPS position, the triangular

mark is transparent. It shows your last known

position.

Chapter

04 How to use the map

CAUTION

For safety reasons, these route-setting functions

are not available while your vehicle is in motion.

To enable these functions, you must stop in a

safe place and put on the parking brake.

pSome information regarding traffic regula-

tions depends on the time when the route

calculation is performed. Thus, the infor-

mation may not correspond with a certain

traffic regulation when your vehicle actually

passes through the location in question.

Also, the information on the traffic regula-

tions provided applies for a passenger vehi-

cle, and not for a truck or other delivery

vehicles. Always follow the actual traffic

regulations when driving.

p[Destination from Phone] and [Online

Search] on the “New Route to...”screen

can be used when the AVICSYNC App con-

nection is established.

=Be sure read Expanding the use of the

navigation functions (page 71) before

using the AVICSYNC function.

Searching for a location by

address

The most frequently used function is “Ad-

dress”, in which the address is specified and

the location is searched.

pDepending on the search results, some

steps may be skipped.

1 Press the MAP button.

The Map screen appears.

2 Touch the following key.

Displays the navigation menu on

the Map screen.

3 Touch [New Route].

The “New Route to...”screen appears.

4 Touch [Address].

The “Find Address”screen appears.

5 Touch the following text box and set

the destination you are looking for.

!Country:

By default, your navigation system proposes

the country where you are.

If you want to change the area to search set

another country.

!City or ZIP Code:

By default, your navigation system proposes

the city/town where you are. You can select

the city/town using its postal code instead

of its name.

!Street:

If the street name is not available, touch

[Go to City] and select the city/town. This

way the center of the selected city/town be-

comes the destination of the route.

!Select House Number or Intersection:

This item will be displayed after you have

set a street. If the house number is not

available, touch [Go to Street] and select

the street. This way the center of the se-

lected street becomes the destination of the

route.

After you touch the selected address to finish

the address search, the searched location ap-

pears on the Map screen.

6 Touch [Select as Destination] on the

“Map Location”screen.

=For details on the operations in the “Map

Location”screen, refer to Using the “Map

Location”screen on page 45.

En 37

Chapter

Searching for a destination

After touching [Select as Destination], the

“Route Summary”screen appears and count-

down begins. When the countdown ends, the

guidance automatically starts. If the screen is

touched anywhere during the countdown, the

countdown stops and the screen will stay as it

is.

=For details on the operations in the “Route

Summary”screen, refer to Checking route

information and preferences on page 48.

7 Touch [Start Navigation].

Your navigation system starts the route gui-

dance.

=For details of the route guidance, refer to

Understanding the route guidance on page

34.

Searching for Points of

Interest (POI)

Information about various facilities (Points Of

Interest –POI), such as gas stations, parking

lots or restaurants, is available. You can

search for a POI by selecting the category (or

entering the POI Name).

Searching for POIs using preset

categories

The preset search allows you to quickly find

the most frequently selected types of POIs.

1 Press the MAP button.

The Map screen appears.

2 Touch the following key.

Displays the navigation menu on

the Map screen.

3 Touch [New Route].

The “New Route to...”screen appears.

4 Touch [Places].

The “Places”screen appears.

The preset search categories are as follows.

!Gas Station

!Accommodation

!Restaurant

!Parking

pWhen a route is not set, POIs are searched

for around the current position.

pWhen the current position is not available

either (no GPS signal), POIs are searched

for around the last known position.

pWhen a route is set, “Gas Station”and

“Restaurant”are searched for along the

route, and “Accommodation”and “Park-

ing”are searched for around the destina-

tion.

5 Touch the category you want.

The results appear in a list.

6 Touch the POI you want.

The searched location appears on the Map

screen.

#If you touch , you can sort the results or

show the locations of all facilities on the map.

7 Touch [Select as Destination] on the

“Map Location”screen.

=For details on the operations in the “Map

Location”screen, refer to Using the “Map

Location”screen on page 45.

After touching [Select as Destination], the

“Route Summary”screen appears and count-

down begins. When the countdown ends, the

guidance automatically starts. If the screen is

touched anywhere during the countdown, the

countdown stops and the screen will stay as it

is.

Chapter

05 Searching for a destination

=For details on the operations in the “Route

Summary”screen, refer to Checking route

information and preferences on page 48.

8 Touch [Start Navigation].

Your navigation system starts the route gui-

dance.

=For details of the route guidance, refer to

Understanding the route guidance on page

34.

Searching for POIs by

categories or directly from the

name of the facilities

You can search for POIs by their categories

and subcategories. You can also search for

POIs by their names in each of their cate-

gories.

1 Press the MAP button.

The Map screen appears.

2 Touch the following key.

Displays the navigation menu on

the Map screen.

3 Touch [New Route].

The “New Route to...”screen appears.

4 Touch [Places].

The “Places”screen appears.

5 Touch [Search Among All Places].

The “Search by Category”screen appears.

6 Touch [Around Here] and then select

the area in which the POIs should be

searched for.

!Category View:

You can select whether or not POI cate-

gories are displayed.

!Around Here:

Searches around the current position. Or,

around the last known position if the cur-

rent position is not available. (The results

will be listed in order of the distance from

this position.)

!In a City:

Searches for a place within a selected city/

town. (The results will be listed in order of

the distance from the center of the selected

city/town.)

!Around Destination:

Searches for a place around the destination

of the current route. (The results will be

listed in order of the distance from the des-

tination.)

pThis key is active only when the route is

set.

!Along Route:

Searches along the current route, and not

around a point already set. This is useful

when searching for a stopover that results

in a minimal detour, such as searching for

gas stations or restaurants. (The results will

be listed in order of the length of the neces-

sary detour.)

pThis key is active only when the route is

set.

7 Select one of the categories, subcate-

gories or brands to narrow down the

places.

The screen appears showing all places in the

selected main category around the selected lo-

cation or along the route.

#Touch [Search by Name] and enter the name

of the place using the keyboard.

8 Touch the POI you want.

The searched location appears on the Map

screen.

En 39

Chapter

Searching for a destination

#If you touch , you can change the sort

method of the results.

9 Touch [Select as Destination] on the

“Map Location”screen.

=For details on the operations in the “Map

Location”screen, refer to Using the “Map

Location”screen on page 45.

After touching [Select as Destination], the

“Route Summary”screen appears and count-

down begins. When the countdown ends, the

guidance automatically starts. If the screen is

touched anywhere during the countdown, the

countdown stops and the screen will stay as it

is.

=For details on the operations in the “Route

Summary”screen, refer to Checking route

information and preferences on page 48.

10 Touch [Start Navigation].

Your navigation system starts the route gui-

dance.

=For details of the route guidance, refer to

Understanding the route guidance on page

34.

Searching for providers nearby

that offer emergency or

roadside assistance services

IMPORTANT

Never use this product to route to hospitals,

police stations or similar facilities in an emer-

gency. Stop using any functions relating to the

hands-free phoning and please call the appro-

priate emergency number.

You can search for locations that provide

emergency or roadside assistance in the sur-

rounding areas.

pThis information does not necessarily cor-

respond to actual information. Utilize the

information for your reference.

1 Press the MAP button.

The Map screen appears.

2 Touch the following key.

Displays the navigation menu on

the Map screen.

3 Touch [Useful Information].

The “Useful Information”screen appears.

4 Touch [Help Nearby].

The “Help Nearby”screen appears.

The preset search categories are as follows.

!Car Repair

!Health

!Police

!Gas Station

5 Touch the category you want.

The results appear in a list.

6 Touch the POI you want.

The searched location appears on the Map

screen.

#If you touch , you can change the sort

method of the results.

7 Touch [Select as Destination] on the

“Map Location”screen.

=For details on the operations in the “Map

Location”screen, refer to Using the “Map

Location”screen on page 45.

After touching [Select as Destination], the

“Route Summary”screen appears and count-

down begins. When the countdown ends, the

guidance automatically starts. If the screen is

touched anywhere during the countdown, the

countdown stops and the screen will stay as it

is.

Chapter

05 Searching for a destination

=For details on the operations in the “Route

Summary”screen, refer to Checking route

information and preferences on page 48.

8 Touch [Start Navigation].

Your navigation system starts the route gui-

dance.

=For details of the route guidance, refer to

Understanding the route guidance on page

34.

Selecting a destination

from stored locations

Storing locations you visit frequently saves

time and effort.

Selecting an item from the list provides an

easy way to specify the position.

The list of saved locations contains two preset

categories: Home and Work.

pThis function is available if locations have

been registered in “Saved Location”.

=For details, refer to Storing a location in

“Saved Location”on page 51.

1 Press the MAP button.

The Map screen appears.

2 Touch the following key.

Displays the navigation menu on

the Map screen.

3 Touch [New Route].

The “New Route to...”screen appears.

4 Touch [Saved Location].

The “Saved Location”screen appears.

#If you touch and then [Edit], you can edit

the details of saved locations.

5 Touch the entry you want.

The searched location appears on the Map

screen.

6 Touch [Select as Destination] on the

“Map Location”screen.

=For details on the operations in the “Map

Location”screen, refer to Using the “Map

Location”screen on page 45.

After touching [Select as Destination], the

“Route Summary”screen appears and count-

down begins. When the countdown ends, the

guidance automatically starts. If the screen is

touched anywhere during the countdown, the

countdown stops and the screen will stay as it

is.

=For details on the operations in the “Route

Summary”screen, refer to Checking route

information and preferences on page 48.

7 Touch [Start Navigation].

Your navigation system starts the route gui-

dance.

=For details of the route guidance, refer to

Understanding the route guidance on page

34.

Selecting a destination

from stored routes

Storing routes you use frequently saves time

and effort.

pThis function is not available if no routes

have been registered in “Saved Routes”.

=For details, refer to Storing a route in

“Saved Routes”on page 52.

1 Press the MAP button.

The Map screen appears.

2 Touch the following key.

Displays the navigation menu on

the Map screen.

3 Touch [New Route].

The “New Route to...”screen appears.

4 Touch to show the next page.

En 41

Chapter

Searching for a destination

5 Touch [Saved Routes].

The “Saved Routes”screen appears.

6 Touch the entry you want.

The “Route Planner”screen appears.

pYou can add waypoints or change the final

destination on the “Route Planner”screen.

=For details, refer to Building a route

using “Route Planner”on page 46.

7 Touch [Show Route].

After touching [Show Route], the “Route

Summary”screen appears and countdown

begins. When the countdown ends, the gui-

dance automatically starts. If the screen is

touched anywhere during the countdown, the

countdown stops and the screen will stay as it

is.

=For details on the operations in the “Route

Summary”screen, refer to Checking route

information and preferences on page 48.

8 Touch [Start Navigation].

Your navigation system starts the route gui-

dance.

=For details of the route guidance, refer to

Understanding the route guidance on page

34.

Selecting a location you

searched for recently

The places that were previously set as destina-

tions or waypoints have been automatically

stored in “History”.

History

1 Press the MAP button.

The Map screen appears.

2 Touch the following key.

Displays the navigation menu on

the Map screen.

3 Touch [New Route].

The “New Route to...”screen appears.

4 Touch [History].

The list of recent destinations appears.

5 Touch the entry you want.

The searched location appears on the Map

screen.

6 Touch [Select as Destination] on the

“Map Location”screen.

=For details on the operations in the “Map

Location”screen, refer to Using the “Map

Location”screen on page 45.

After touching [Select as Destination], the

“Route Summary”screen appears and count-

down begins. When the countdown ends, the

guidance automatically starts. If the screen is

touched anywhere during the countdown, the

countdown stops and the screen will stay as it

is.

=For details on the operations in the “Route

Summary”screen, refer to Checking route

information and preferences on page 48.

7 Touch [Start Navigation].

Your navigation system starts the route gui-

dance.

=For details of the route guidance, refer to

Understanding the route guidance on page

34.

Smart History

Smart History suggests these previously used

locations as destinations based on your navi-

gation habits, using parameters like the cur-

rent time of day, the day of week, and the

current location.

Chapter

05 Searching for a destination

Smart History items are shown in the “New

Route to...”screen for easy access.

Searching for a location

using “Combined Search”

The “Combined Search”feature lets you

quickly find a place by its name and search

area.

pThe “Combined Search”function also

searches your stored data.

1 Press the MAP button.

The Map screen appears.

2 Touch the following key.

Displays the navigation menu on

the Map screen.

3 Touch [New Route].

The “New Route to...”screen appears.

4 Touch [Combined Search].

The “Combined Search”screen appears.

5 Touch the right text box to enter the

country and city/town you want search.

6 Enter the name, address, or category of

the destination you are looking for, then

touch the following key.

Displays the “Search Results”

screen.

7 Touch the entry you want.

The searched location appears on the Map

screen.

8 Touch the right of the list to narrow

down the search results.

1Shows the conditions that are currently se-

lected.

2Touch this key to show the other conditions.

#If you touch a map data provider logo, you can

narrow down the list of results by showing the re-

sults from the provider.

9 Touch [Select as Destination] on the

“Map Location”screen.

=For details on the operations in the “Map

Location”screen, refer to Using the “Map

Location”screen on page 45.

After touching [Select as Destination], the

“Route Summary”screen appears and count-

down begins. When the countdown ends, the

guidance automatically starts. If the screen is

touched anywhere during the countdown, the

countdown stops and the screen will stay as it

is.

=For details on the operations in the “Route

Summary”screen, refer to Checking route

information and preferences on page 48.

En 43

Chapter

Searching for a destination

10 Touch [Start Navigation].

Your navigation system starts the route gui-

dance.

=For details of the route guidance, refer to

Understanding the route guidance on page

34.

Searching for a location by

the coordinates

Entering a latitude and longitude pinpoints

the location.

1 Press the MAP button.

The Map screen appears.

2 Touch the following key.

Displays the navigation menu on

the Map screen.

3 Touch [New Route].

The “New Route to...”screen appears.

4 Touch to show the next page.

5 Touch [Coordinates].

The “Coordinates”screen appears.

6 Enter the latitude value and touch

[OK].

pWhen a value is already entered in the text

field, touch or to delete the value

first.

pYou can change the display format of the la-

titude and longitude to any of the following

formats: decimal degrees; degrees and dec-

imal minutes; or degrees, minutes and deci-

mal seconds.

#When entering the coordinates in UTM for-

mat, touch , then [UTM Coordinates].

7 Enter the longitude value and touch

[Go!].

pWhen a value is already entered in the text

field, touch or to delete the value

first.

The searched location appears on the Map

screen.

8 Touch [Select as Destination] on the

“Map Location”screen.

=For details on the operations in the “Map

Location”screen, refer to Using the “Map

Location”screen on page 45.

After touching [Select as Destination], the

“Route Summary”screen appears and count-

down begins. When the countdown ends, the

guidance automatically starts. If the screen is

touched anywhere during the countdown, the

countdown stops and the screen will stay as it

is.

=For details on the operations in the “Route

Summary”screen, refer to Checking route

information and preferences on page 48.

9 Touch [Start Navigation].

Your navigation system starts the route gui-

dance.

=For details of the route guidance, refer to

Understanding the route guidance on page

34.

Searching for a location by

scrolling the map

Specifying a location after scrolling the map

enables you to set the position as a destina-

tion or waypoint.

1 Press the MAP button.

The Map screen appears.

2 Touch and drag the screen to scroll the

map to the position you want.

3 Touch the location that you want to se-

lect as your destination.

The cursor appears.

Chapter

05 Searching for a destination

4 Touch [Select as Destination].

After touching [Select as Destination], the

“Route Summary”screen appears and count-

down begins. When the countdown ends, the

guidance automatically starts. If the screen is

touched anywhere during the countdown, the

countdown stops and the screen will stay as it

is.

=For details on the operations in the “Route

Summary”screen, refer to Checking route

information and preferences on page 48.

5 Touch [Start Navigation].

Your navigation system starts the route gui-

dance.

=For details of the route guidance, refer to

Understanding the route guidance on page

34.

Using the “Map Location”

screen

Once a location is searched, the “Map Loca-

tion”screen appears. You can select some op-

tions for the route or displayed map location

before route calculation.

13 42

576

pIf you touch the map, the cursor is placed

at that position. Also, you can scroll the

map by dragging the map.

1Zoom in/zoom out

pYou can also pinch or expand the map

to zoom in or out.

2Cancels the “Map Location”screen and dis-

plays the map of the current position.

3Returns the cursor to the initial position and

the map scale to the initial scale.

4Shows the route setting preferences for route

calculation. Touch the keys to activate or deac-

tivate the preference.

Calculates the route prioritizing

the use of freeways when the

key is activated.

Calculates the route prioritizing

the use of per-use charged toll

roads when the key is activated.

Calculates the route prioritizing

the use of ferries when the key

is activated.

Calculates the route prioritizing

the use of carpool and HOV

lanes when the key is activated.

5Returns to the previous screen.

6Sets the cursor position to your destination (or

waypoint).

7Displays the shortcuts.

!Detailed Information:

Shows the detailed information of the

point.

!Save Location:

Saves the displayed location as your fa-

vorite location. The saved location can

be easily recalled later.

!Places Around Cursor:

Searches for POIs around the displayed

location. Touch the POI to show the

“Map Location”screen, and also set

the POI as the destination (or

waypoint).

En 45

Chapter

Searching for a destination

Modifying the route

When navigation is already started, there are

several ways to modify the current route. The

following sections describe some of those op-

tions.

Building a route using “Route

Planner”

The “Route Planner”(or “My Route”) feature

lets you build your route using the list of desti-

nations.

Editing the list allows you to plan your route

easily.

pOnce you set the route, you can edit your

route using the menu displayed as “My

Route”.

1 Press the MAP button.

The Map screen appears.

2 Touch the following key.

Displays the navigation menu on

the Map screen.

3 Touch [Route Planner] or [My Route].

4 Touch one of the options.

15423

7968 ab

1Destination

2Cancels the “Route Planner”(or “My

Route”) screen and displays the map of the

current position.

3Adds a new destination and changes the

current destination to the last waypoint.

4Inserts a new waypoint.

5Touch or to scroll the list.

6Waypoint

7Returns to the previous screen.

8Starting position (The current vehicle posi-

tion is set as default and [Current GPS Po-

sition] is displayed.)

=For details, refer to Changing the starting

position on page 47.

9Calculates the route and shows the “Route

Summary”screen.

aDisplays the options for the location.

!Move Up/Move Down:

Edits the order you want to visit the loca-

tions.

!Delete:

Deletes the destination or waypoint.

!Save Location:

Stores the location in “Saved Location”.

=For details, refer to Storing a location

in “Saved Location”on page 51.

!Change:

Changes the destination or waypoint to

another location.

!Show on Map:

Shows the selected location on the map.

bDisplays the shortcuts.

!Delete All:

Deletes all waypoints and the destina-

tion. Touch [Continue Without Route]

to cancel the planned route.

!Optimize Waypoints:

Changes the order of waypoints automa-

tically so that the route can be easily tra-

veled. (If the resulting order is the same

as the current order, this option is inva-

lid.)

!Optimize Route:

Changes the order of all waypoints and

the destination automatically so that the

route can be easily traveled. (If the re-

sulting order is the same as the current

order, this option is invalid.)

Chapter

06 Checking and modifying the current route

Changing the starting position

The starting position for route can be changed

from the current position.

1 Press the MAP button.

The Map screen appears.

2 Touch the following key.

Displays the navigation menu on

the Map screen.

3 Touch [Route Planner] or [My Route].

4 Touch [Current GPS Position].

The pop-up menu appears.

5 Touch [Set Start Point] or [Change Start

Point] and then touch [OK].

6 Search for a location.

7 Touch [Set Start Point] or [Change Start

Point].

The selected position is set as the starting po-

sition for route calculation.

8 Touch [Show Route] or [Continue With-

out Route].

The system starts route recalculation after

[Show Route] is touched, and then the

“Route Summary”screen appears. After

[Start Navigation] is touched, your navigation

system starts the route guidance.

After [Continue Without Route] is touched,

the current position map appears.

Restoring the current position as the

starting position

1 Touch [Route Planner] or [My Route].

2 Touch [Current GPS Position].

The pop-up menu appears.

3 Touch [Back to GPS position] and then

touch [Delete Start Point].

The starting position for route calculation re-

turns to the current position.

Adding waypoints

1 Press the MAP button.

The Map screen appears.

2 Touch the following key.

Displays the navigation menu on

the Map screen.

3 Touch [Add Waypoint].

4 Search for a location.

5 Touch [Select as Waypoint].

The route is recalculated, and the “Route

Summary”screen appears. (When the way-

point is already set, the “My Route”screen ap-

pears. Touch [Show Route] and proceed to

the next step.)

6 Touch [Start Navigation].

Your navigation system starts the route gui-

dance.

Checking route alternatives

You can select another route and compare dif-

ferent route alternatives.

1 Press the MAP button.

The Map screen appears.

2 Touch the following key.

Displays the navigation menu on

the Map screen.

3 Touch [Detours & Alternatives].

4 Touch [Alternative Routes].

The “Alternative Routes”screen appears.

En 47

Chapter

Checking and modifying the current route

5 Touch any of the conditions you want

to display on the map.

You can see the approximate time required

and total distance of selected route alterna-

tives. Touch any of the route alternatives to see

it on the map.

pIf more than three route alternatives have

been found, [More Results] appears. Touch

[More Results] to show the other routes.

=For information about route calculation

conditions, refer to Route Planning

Method on page 64.

6 Touch [Select].

The selected route is applied as your current

route.

Checking detour routes

You can check for detour routes that avoid the

selected sections or streets, or that avoid the

road ahead. You can also check for alternative

routes.

1 Press the MAP button.

The Map screen appears.

2 Touch the following key.

Displays the navigation menu on

the Map screen.

3 Touch [Detours & Alternatives].

4 Touch one of the options.

!Alternative Routes:

Shows the alternative routes.

=For details, refer to Checking route alter-

natives on page 47.

!Avoid Special Sections:

Shows the route avoiding certain sections.

Touch the list item to select the section you

want to avoid. The distance and time differ-

ence, suggested route, current route, and

the section avoided are shown. Touch [Ac-

cept] to apply the suggested route.

!Avoid Specific Road:

Shows the route avoiding certain road.

Touch the list item to select the road you

want to avoid. Distance and time difference,

suggested route, current route, section

avoided are shown. Touch [Accept] to apply

the suggested route.

!Avoid Road Ahead:

Shows the route avoiding the road ahead.

Touch [+]or[–] to set the distance you want

to avoid. Touch [Avoid] to apply the sug-

gested route.

!Restore Original Route:

Cancels the route with avoidances and re-

stores the previous route.

pThe route set by [Alternative Routes]

cannot be canceled.

Checking route information

and preferences

Once you set the route, you can check a sum-

mary of the current route.

1 Press the MAP button.

The Map screen appears.

2 Touch the following key.

Displays the navigation menu on

the Map screen.

3 Touch [Route Summary].

The “Route Summary”screen appears.

Chapter

06 Checking and modifying the current route

4 Touch one of the options.

15423

768 9

pYou can scroll the map by dragging the

map.

1Shows the information for a transit point on

the route. Touching the items allows you to

see the location on the map. Touch [Avoid]

and [Accept] to set the location as a loca-

tion to avoid.

2Cancels the “Route Summary”screen and

displays the map of the current position.

3Shows the conditions of the displayed

route.

4The screen returns to the initial position

and the map scale returns to the initial

scale.

5Zoom in/zoom out

pYou can also pinch or expand the map

to zoom in or out.

6Shows alternative routes.

=For details, refer to Checking route alter-

natives on page 47.

7Returns to the previous screen.

8Shows the total length of the route and ap-

proximate required time for the route.

9Displays the shortcuts.

!Route Preferences:

Shows the route setting preferences. If

you change the preferences, the route is

recalculated.

!Itinerary:

Shows all transit points in detail. Touch

a transit point to show its position on

the map. If you touch [Avoid] on the

map screen, the route is recalculated

avoiding the transit point (as much as

possible).

!Save Route:

Saves the displayed route. The saved

route can be recalled later.

!Places Along Route:

Searches for POIs along the displayed

route. Touch the POI to show the “Map

Location”screen, and also set the POI

as a waypoint.

!Simulation:

You can run a simulation of the naviga-

tion for the current route, as a demon-

stration.

=For details, refer to Checking route al-

ternatives on page 47.

Canceling the current route

guidance

If you no longer need to travel to your destina-

tion, follow the steps below to cancel the route

guidance.

1 Press the MAP button.

The Map screen appears.

2 Touch the following key.

Displays the navigation menu on

the Map screen.

3 Touch [Cancel Route] or [Delete Way-

point].

The message screen appears.

4 Touch one of the options.

If there are no waypoints on the route, touch

[Cancel Route] to cancel the route.

If there are waypoints on the route, touch

[Cancel Route] to cancel the route. Touch

[Delete Waypoint] to delete only the nearest

waypoint. In such case, the route is recalcu-

lated.

En 49

Chapter

Checking and modifying the current route

Watching the simulation of the

route

You can run a simulation of the navigation for

the current route, as a demonstration. Follow

the steps below.

1 Set a route to your destination.

=For details, refer to Chapter 5.

2 Press the MAP button.

The Map screen appears.

3 Touch the following key.

Displays the navigation menu on

the Map screen.

4 Touch [Route Summary].

The “Route Summary”screen appears.

5 Touch the following key.

Displays the shortcuts.

6 Touch [Simulation].

The simulation starts from the starting point of

the route, and using a realistic speed, it leads

you through the whole recommended route.

pDuring simulation, you can use the follow-

ing control keys (they disappear after a few

seconds but you can view them again by

touching the map).

Jumps to the previous gui-

dance point (maneuver).

Pauses the simulation.

Jumps to the next guidance

point (maneuver).

Increases the speed of the si-

mulation to four, eight or 16

times the normal speed.

Touching the key again returns

to the normal speed.

#Touch [Close] to stop the simulation.

Chapter

06 Checking and modifying the current route

Storing a location in

“Saved Location”

Storing your favorite locations in “Saved Loca-

tion”allows you to save the time and effort

used on re-entering this information.

“Saved Location”can include your home lo-

cation, workplace, and places you have al-

ready registered.

Storing your home and your

workplace location

You can store one home location and one

workplace location. You can change the stored

information later. Also, routes to stored loca-

tions can be calculated easily by touching the

corresponding key.

1 Press the MAP button.

The Map screen appears.

2 Touch the following key.

Displays the navigation menu on

the Map screen.

3 Touch the following key.

Displays the “Saved Location”

screen.

4 Touch [Home] or [Work] and then touch

[OK].

pWhen you have already stored your home or

workplace, touch [Home]or[Work]to

show the location on the “Map Location”

screen.

5 Search for a location.

=For details, refer to Chapter 5.

6 Touch [Save Location].

The cursor position has been stored.

Storing your favorite locations

You can store a frequently visited location

(such as a relative’s home) to allow easy rout-

ing.

1 Press the MAP button.

The Map screen appears.

2 Touch the following key.

Displays the navigation menu on

the Map screen.

3 Touch the following key.

Displays the “Saved Location”

screen.

4 Touch [Add Location].

5 Search for a location.

=For details, refer to Chapter 5.

6 Touch [Save Location].

7 Enter the name if needed and then

touch the following key.

Saves the location as a new loca-

tion under “Saved Location”.

The cursor position has been stored.

pYou can also store the location without

using the “Saved Location”screen. When

the “Map Location”screen is displayed

after searching for the location or after

scrolling the map, open the shortcuts and

then touch [Save Location].

pIn the on-screen keyboard, touching or

enables you to store the location as your

home or workplace location.

Editing stored locations

Stored locations can be edited later.

En 51

Chapter

Registering and editing locations and routes

Renaming stored locations

1 Press the MAP button.

The Map screen appears.

2 Touch the following key.

Displays the navigation menu on

the Map screen.

3 Touch the following key.

Displays the “Saved Location”

screen.

4 Touch the following key.

Displays the shortcuts.

5 Touch [Edit].

The “Select Location to Edit”screen appears.

6 Touch the item you want to rename

and touch [Rename].

p“Home”and “Work”cannot be renamed.

The location can be set again.

7 Enter the name and then touch .

8 Touch [Done].

The “Saved Location”screen appears.

Deleting stored locations

1 Press the MAP button.

The Map screen appears.

2 Touch the following key.

Displays the navigation menu on

the Map screen.

3 Touch the following key.

Displays the “Saved Location”

screen.

4 Touch the following key.

Displays the shortcuts.

5 Touch [Edit].

The “Select Location to Edit”screen appears.

6 Touch the item you want to delete and

touch [Delete].

p“Home”and “Work”cannot be deleted.

The location can be set again.

pIf you touch and then touch [Delete

All], all entries (including the home and

workplace locations) can be deleted.

A message will appear asking you to confirm

the deletion.

7 Touch [OK].

8 Touch [Done].

The “Saved Location”screen appears.

pYou can also delete the stored location with-

out using the “Saved Location”screen.

When the “Map Location”screen is dis-

played after scrolling the map, place the

cursor on a stored location which you want

to delete and open the shortcuts and then

touch [Remove Saved Location].

Storing a route in “Saved

Routes”

Storing your favorite routes in “Saved Routes”

allows you to save the time and effort used on

re-entering this information.

1 Set a route to your destination.

=For details, refer to Chapter 5.

2 Press the MAP button.

The Map screen appears.

3 Touch the following key.

Displays the navigation menu on

the Map screen.

Chapter

07 Registering and editing locations and routes

4 Touch [Route Summary].

The “Route Summary”screen appears.

5 Touch the following key.

Displays the shortcuts.

6 Touch [Save Route].

The “Save Route”screen appears.

7 Enter the name if needed and then

touch the following key.

Saves the route as a new route

under “Saved Routes”.

Editing the stored route

Stored routes can be edited later.

Renaming stored routes

1 Press the MAP button.

The Map screen appears.

2 Touch the following key.

Displays the navigation menu on

the Map screen.

3 Touch [New Route].

The “New Route to...”screen appears.

4 Touch to show the next page.

5 Touch [Saved Routes].

The “Saved Routes”screen appears.

6 Touch the following key.

Displays the shortcuts.

7 Touch [Edit].

8 Touch the item you want to rename

and touch [Rename].

9 Enter the name and then touch .

10 Touch [Done].

Deleting stored routes

1 Press the MAP button.

The Map screen appears.

2 Touch the following key.

Displays the navigation menu on

the Map screen.

3 Touch [New Route].

The “New Route to...”screen appears.

4 Touch to show the next page.

5 Touch [Saved Routes].

The “Saved Routes”screen appears.

6 Touch the following key.

Displays the shortcuts.

7 Touch [Edit].

8 Touch the item you want to delete and

touch [Delete].

pIf you touch and then touch [Delete

All], all entries can be deleted.

9 Touch [Delete].

10 Touch [Done].

Saving a location as an

alert point

You can save any map location (such as a

school zone or railroad crossing) as an alert

point.

pTo use this function, activate the warnings

beforehand and set the alert types.

En 53

Chapter

Registering and editing locations and routes

=For details, refer to “Warnings”settings on

page 66.

1 Press the MAP button.

The Map screen appears.

2 Scroll the map and select a location.

The cursor appears at the selected point.

3 Touch the following key.

Displays the shortcuts.

#To edit a previously saved alert point, touch

4 Touch [Add Alert Points].

The “Add New Alert Point”screen appears.

5 Set the necessary parameters.

!Alert Type:

Sets the type of the alert point.

!Speed Limit:

Sets the speed limit for this alert point (if

applicable).

!Direction:

Sets the direction from which you expect

the alert to come from.

6 Touch [Save].

The location is saved as a new alert point.

=For details, refer to “Warnings”settings on

page 66.

pThe warning for road safety cameras (like

speed cameras) is disabled when you are in

certain countries where warnings for road

safety cameras are prohibited. However,

you are fully responsible for ensuring that

this feature is legal in the country where

you intend to use it.

Editing the stored alert points

Stored alert points can be edited later.

1 Press the MAP button.

The Map screen appears.

2 Scroll the map to the stored alert point.

3 Touch the following key.

Displays the shortcuts.

4 Touch [Edit Alert Points].

5 Set the necessary parameters.

#If you touch and then touch [Delete], the

selected alert point will be deleted.

6 Touch [Edit].

The alert settings are modified.

Chapter

07 Registering and editing locations and routes

The Traffic Message Channel (TMC) provides

real-time traffic reports. If the navigation sys-

tem is equipped with the TMC feature, you can

check the traffic reports and information re-

ceived.

pThe online function in “Traffic”can be used

if you connect an iPhone or a smartphone

that has the AVICSYNC App installed.

=Be sure read Expanding the use of the

navigation functions (page 71) before

using the AVICSYNC function.

Viewing the traffic list

Traffic information is displayed onscreen in a

list. This allows you to check how many traffic

incidents have occurred, the locations, and

the distance from your current position.

1 Press the MAP button.

The Map screen appears.

2 Touch the following key.

Displays the navigation menu on

the Map screen.

3 Touch [Traffic].

The “Traffic Summary”screen appears.

4 Touch [Traffic Events].

The “Traffic Events”screen appears.

A list with traffic information that has been re-

ceived is shown. The list is sorted by distance

from your current position. Places (street

names) where incidents have occurred are dis-

played on the list.

pIf a route is set, relevant events for your cur-

rent route are shown in the upper section of

the list.

pTouching the desired item allows you to

check its position on the map. Touch or

to show the previous or next event.

Checking the traffic

incidents on the map

Traffic event information can be displayed on

the map.

1 Press the MAP button.

The Map screen appears.

2 Touch the following key.

Displays the navigation menu on

the Map screen.

3 Touch [Traffic].

The “Traffic Summary”screen appears.

4 Touch [Traffic Map].

The “Current Traffic Map”screen appears.

Road segments affected by traffic incidents

are displayed in an alternate color on the map,

and small symbols above the road show the

nature of the incident.

The traffic congestion lines indicate the de-

gree of the congestion by color.

En 55

Chapter

Receiving real-time traffic information (TMC)

When traffic incidents

occur on your route

The notification icon shows the status of traffic

information reception.

Indicates that there are no traffic

incidents in your coverage area.

Indicates that information on traf-

fic incidents are being received.

Indicates that there are no signifi-

cant traffic incidents on your

route.

Indicates that there are significant

traffic incidents on your route. The

icon shows the type of the next

traffic incident.

1 Press the MAP button.

The Map screen appears.

2 Touch the relevant traffic event icon.

1Traffic notification icon

The “Traffic Summary”screen appears.

You can check the details of the traffic inci-

dents. Touch the relevant event to display the

location on the map.

Turning the traffic

information on or off

The traffic information feature is turned on by

default. To enable or disable the TMC feature,

perform the following procedure.

pIf you turn the traffic information feature

off, [Traffic] on the navigation menu disap-

pears.

1 Press the MAP button.

The Map screen appears.

2 Touch the following key.

Displays the navigation menu on

the Map screen.

3 Touch to show the next page.

4 Touch [Settings].

The “Settings”screen appears.

5 Touch to show the next page.

6 Touch [Traffic].

The “Traffic Settings”screen appears.

7 Touch [Traffic] to turn the switch on or

off.

The feature is enabled or disabled.

=For details, refer to “Traffic”settings on page

69.

Chapter

08 Receiving real-time traffic information (TMC)

Checking useful information

The “Useful Information”menu contains var-

ious information to support your driving.

pThe online function in “Parking”,“Weath-

er”and “Fuel Prices”can be used if you

connect an iPhone or a smartphone that

has the AVICSYNC App installed.

=Be sure read Expanding the use of the

navigation functions (page 71) before

using the AVICSYNC function.

1 Press the MAP button.

The Map screen appears.

2 Touch the following key.

Displays the navigation menu on

the Map screen.

3 Touch [Useful Information].

The “Useful Information”screen appears.

4 Touch the desired menu item.

!Parking:

Checks for parking lots near your current lo-

cation.

pFor details, refer to the manual for

AVICSYNC on our website.

!Fuel Prices:

Displays recent gas prices of gas stations

near the current location, along the current

route, or in the town.

pFor details, refer to the manual for

AVICSYNC on our website.

!Weather:

Checks the weather forecast for your cur-

rent location, along your route, around your

destination, as well as for your saved loca-

tions.

pFor details, refer to the manual for

AVICSYNC on our website.

!Where Am I?:

Displays a special screen with information

about the current position and a key to

search for nearby emergency or roadside

assistance services.

The screen provides the following informa-

tion:

—Latitude and longitude (coordinates of

the current position in WGS84 format)

—Address details of the current position

(when available)

—The nearest city

—Next crossing road/street

—Previous crossing road/street

pIf the current street is displayed below

the current position marker on the map,

touch it to open the “Where Am I?”

screen. When you are driving without a

planned route, touch the current street

or the arrows at the top section of the

Map screen to open the “Where Am I?”

screen.

pTo save the current position as a “Saved

Location”destination, touch .

=For details, refer to Storing a location

in “Saved Location”on page 51.

!Help Nearby:

Checks for POIs in your surroundings.

The preset search categories are as follows.

!Car Repair:

!Health:

!Police:

!Gas Station:

!Trip Monitor:

Checks the statistical data of your trips (for

example, start time, end time, average

speed, etc.).

=For details, refer to Recording your travel

history on page 58.

!GPS Information:

Displays the GPS information screen with

satellite position and signal strength infor-

mation.

En 57

Chapter

Checking useful information about your trip

!Fuel Consumption:

You can estimate the fuel cost to your desti-

nation by entering the fuel consumption in-

formation in the navigation system.

=For details, refer to Calculating the fuel

consumption on page 60.

Recording your travel history

Activating the trip logger enables you to re-

cord your driving history (hereinafter called

“trip log”). You can review your trip log later.

pThe trip logger is set so that it can be

started manually by default. You can

change the settings of this function in

order to save the log automatically.

=For details, refer to Trip Monitor:on page

62.

Activating trip logger temporarily

One-time activation is useful if you want to

create a log only for a particular trip.

1 Press the MAP button.

The Map screen appears.

2 Touch the following key.

Displays the navigation menu on

the Map screen.

3 Touch [Useful Information].

The “Useful Information”screen appears.

4 Touch [Trip Monitor].

The “Trip Monitor”screen appears.

A list of trip logs already recorded appears. A

blank list appears if you have not recorded any

trip logs yet.

5 Touch [Start New Recording].

The trip logger is activated. The touch key

changes to [Stop Recording]. Touching [Stop

Recording] allows you to deactivate the trip

logger.

pIf there is not enough space in the built-in

memory, the oldest trip log will be overwrit-

ten by the new one.

pIf you want the system to always activate

the trip logger whenever the GPS signal is

available, turn on “Enable Auto-Saving”.

=For details, refer to Enable Auto-Saving:

on page 59.

Browsing the trip log

1 Record the trip log.

2 Press the MAP button.

The Map screen appears.

3 Touch the following key.

Displays the navigation menu on

the Map screen.

4 Touch [Useful Information].

The “Useful Information”screen appears.

5 Touch [Trip Monitor].

The “Trip Monitor”screen appears.

pTo export all trip logs, touch [Export All].

6 Touch any of the items to see the de-

tails.

The screen showing the trip log in detail ap-

pears.

pTo display the trip log on the map, touch

[Visible on Map] to tick the check box.

Touching allows you to view the shortcuts

and enables you to use the following func-

tions.

!View on Map

Shows the trip log on the map screen.

!Export Track Log:

Exports the track log currently selected to

an external storage device.

Chapter

09 Checking useful information about your trip

Setting the trip logger

1 Record the trip log.

2 Press the MAP button.

The Map screen appears.

3 Touch the following key.

Displays the navigation menu on

the Map screen.

4 Touch [Useful Information].

The “Useful Information”screen appears.

5 Touch [Trip Monitor].

The “Trip Monitor”screen appears.

6 Touch and then touch [Trip Monitor

Settings].

The setting screen appears.

7 Touch any of the items to change the

settings.

!Enable Auto-Saving:

Sets whether automatic trip logging is acti-

vated or not.

!Save Track Log:

Track logs, the sequence of the positions

given by the GPS receiver, can be saved to-

gether with trip logs. You can activate the

track logger whenever the trip logger is acti-

vated.

p“Trip Database Size”indicates the cur-

rent data size of the trip log (track log in-

cluded).

Editing a trip log

1 Press the MAP button.

The Map screen appears.

2 Touch the following key.

Displays the navigation menu on

the Map screen.

3 Touch [Useful Information].

The “Useful Information”screen appears.

4 Touch [Trip Monitor].

The “Trip Monitor”screen appears.

5 Touch and then touch [Edit].

The “Select Trip to Edit”screen appears.

6 Touch any of the items to edit.

!Delete:

Deletes the trip log.

!Rename:

Renames the trip log.

!Change Color:

Changes the color by selecting another

color from the color table.

pIf you touch and then touch [Delete

All], all entries can be deleted.

7 Touch [Done].

Using the Trip Computer mode

In the trip computer screen, the information

received from the GPS receiver and your vehi-

cle is displayed like a meter for a vehicle.

1 Press the MAP button.

The Map screen appears.

2 Touch the data field key.

The “Trip Computer”screen appears.

En 59

Chapter

Checking useful information about your trip

pIf you touch [Trip Summary], the details of

the current trip are displayed. Touch [Save

Trip] to store the current trip log.

3 Touch the following key.

Returns to the Map screen.

pIf you press the MAP button, you can return

to the Map screen.

Calculating the fuel

consumption

The fuel consumption monitor helps you keep

track of the fuel consumption of your car even

if you do not use the navigation system for all

your journeys. Set the initial odometer value

and then record the distance driven and the

amount of fuel whenever you fill up your car.

You can also set reminders for regular car

maintenance.

These calculations are based only on the infor-

mation that you provide and not on any data

from the vehicle. The fuel mileage displayed is

only a reference value, and does not guarantee

that the fuel mileage displayed can be ob-

tained.

Setting the initial odometer value

Before you use the fuel consumption feature,

enter the initial odometer value from which

you want to start measuring the mileage.

1 Press the MAP button.

The Map screen appears.

2 Touch the following key.

Displays the navigation menu on

the Map screen.

3 Touch [Useful Information].

The “Useful Information”screen appears.

4 Touch [Fuel Consumption].

The “Fuel Consumption”screen appears.

5 Touch [Initial Milometer Value].

The “Set Initial Milometer Value”screen ap-

pears.

6 Enter the initial odometer value and

then touch .

The initial odometer value has been set.

Entering the fuel consumption

information

To calculate the fuel consumption for the dis-

tance you have traveled, enter the distance dri-

ven and the amount of fuel whenever you fill

up your car.

1 Press the MAP button.

The Map screen appears.

2 Touch the following key.

Displays the navigation menu on

the Map screen.

3 Touch [Useful Information].

The “Useful Information”screen appears.

4 Touch [Fuel Consumption].

The “Fuel Consumption”screen appears.

5 Touch [Add].

The “Add Consumption Entry”screen ap-

pears.

Chapter

09 Checking useful information about your trip

6 Touch [Current Milometer Value] and

then enter the current odometer value.

7 Touch [Fuel Amount] to enter the

amount of fuel pumped this time.

8 Touch [Fuel Price / Unit] to enter the

fuel unit price this time.

9 Touch [Add].

The “View Consumption Entry”screen ap-

pears.

10 Touch [Done].

The entry is created and the fuel consumption

is displayed.

pTo delete an entry, touch to display the

shortcut for deletion.

Setting the car maintenance

schedule

1 Press the MAP button.

The Map screen appears.

2 Touch the following key.

Displays the navigation menu on

the Map screen.

3 Touch [Useful Information].

The “Useful Information”screen appears.

4 Touch [Fuel Consumption].

The “Fuel Consumption”screen appears.

5 Touch .

6 Touch [Maintenance Schedule].

7 Touch [Add] or the one of entries.

8 Enter the name, date, and mileage for

the reminder.

9 Touch [Done].

pTo delete an entry, touch to display the

shortcut for deletion.

En 61

Chapter

Checking useful information about your trip

Customizing the

navigation settings

You can configure the navigation settings, and

modify the behavior of this system.

1 Press the MAP button.

The Map screen appears.

2 Touch the following key.

Displays the navigation menu on

the Map screen.

3 Touch to show the next page.

4 Touch [Settings].

The “Settings”screen appears.

!Route Preferences:

Sets the type of vehicle you are driving, the

road types used in route planning, and the

route planning method.

=For details, refer to “Route Preferences”

settings on page 63.

!Sound:

Adjusts the different sound volumes and

changes the voice guidance profile.

=For details, refer to “Sound”settings on

page 65.

!Warnings:

Enables or disables warnings and sets up

the warning function.

=For details, refer to “Warnings”settings

on page 66.

!Navigation Map:

Fine-tunes the appearance of the Map

screen and adjusts how the software helps

you navigate with different kinds of route-re-

lated information on the Map screen.

=For details, refer to “Navigation Map”set-

tings on page 66.

!Regional:

Changes the voice guidance language, the

application language, and measurement

units.

=For details, refer to “Regional”settings

on page 68.

!Display:

Sets separate themes for daytime and

nighttime use, adjusts the display back-

light, and enables or disables menu anima-

tions.

=For details, refer to “Display”settings on

page 69.

!Traffic:

Enables or disables the TMC receiver and

sets up the traffic function.

=For details, refer to “Traffic”settings on

page 69.

!Weather:

Enables or disables the online weather fore-

cast option and the automatic download of

weather information.

=For details, refer to “Weather”settings on

page 69.

!Fuel:

Enables or disables the online gas price op-

tion and sets up the gas type.

=For details, refer to “Fuel”settings on

page 69.

!Trip Monitor:

Turns automatic trip log saving on or off

and checks the current size of the trip data-

base.

=For details, refer to “Trip Monitor”set-

tings on page 69.

!AVICSYNC

Displays the connection method for

AVICSYNC.

pThe setting value is fixed. Use this pro-

duct as it is.

!Online Services:

Enables or disables the connected services.

=For details, refer to “Online Services”set-

tings on page 69.

!Usage Reports:

Enables or disables the collection of usage

information and GPS logs that may be used

for improving the application and the qual-

ity and coverage of maps.

=For details, refer to “Usage Reports”set-

tings on page 70.

!Start Configuration Wizard:

Chapter

10 Customizing preferences of the navigation

Modifies the basic software parameters

used during the initial setup process.

!SyncTool:

Starts the synchronization tool, which

makes it possible to update your maps.

=For details, refer to Getting the map up-

date on page 73.

Restoring the default settings

You can restore settings or recorded content

to the default settings.

1 Press the MAP button.

The Map screen appears.

2 Touch the following key.

Displays the navigation menu on

the Map screen.

3 Touch to show the next page.

4 Touch [Settings].

The “Settings”screen appears.

5 Touch the following key.

Displays the shortcuts.

6 Touch [Reset All Settings].

A confirmation message appears.

7 Touch [OK].

The recorded contents are cleared.

pIf you touch [Factory Reset] on the short-

cut, all data relevant to navigation (includ-

ing the items in saved locations and

histories) are deleted and all settings are

reset to their factory defaults.

Information on each option

of “Settings”

“Route Preferences”settings

Vehicle

You can set the type of vehicle you will be

using on the route.

pThe route is planned based on the selected

vehicle type.

Route planning can also be configured to

incorporate dimension, weight, and freight

hazard restrictions for maps that contain

such data.

To enhance the route accuracy, correctly

select a vehicle type that is similar to the

condition of your vehicle.

!Car:

—Maneuver restrictions and directional

constraints are taken into account when

planning a route.

—Roads are used only if access for cars is

allowed.

—Private roads and resident-only roads

are used only if they are inevitable to

reach the destination.

—Walkways are excluded from routes.

!Emergency:

—All maneuvers available at intersections

are taken into account.

—Directional constraints are taken into

account in the same way as travel in the

opposite direction is allowed at low

speeds.

—Only private roads that need to be used

to access the destination are included.

—Walkways are excluded from routes.

!Bus:

—Maneuver restrictions and directional

constraints are taken into account when

planning a route.

—Roads are used only if access for buses

is allowed.

—Private roads, resident-only roads and

walkways are excluded from routes.

!Taxi:

En 63

Chapter

Customizing preferences of the navigation

—Maneuver restrictions and directional

constraints are taken into account when

planning a route.

—Roads are used only if access for taxis is

allowed.

—Private roads, resident-only roads and

walkways are excluded from routes.

!Truck:

—Maneuver restrictions and directional

constraints are taken into account when

planning a route.

—Only roads that allow truck access are

included.

—Private roads, resident-only roads and

walkways are excluded from routes.

—U-turns are not used in routes (turning

around on a divided road is not consid-

ered a U-turn for the purpose of this sys-

tem).

pTo edit the name and estimated maximum

speed of the selected vehicle profile, touch

pTo add a new vehicle profile, touch [Add

Profile]. Then select one of the vehicle

types and set the name and estimated max-

imum speed.

Route Planning Method

You can change the route planning method.

Route calculation can be optimized for differ-

ent situations and vehicle types by changing

the planning method. The route planning

method types are as follows.

!Fast

Calculates a route with the shortest travel

time to your destination as a priority. Usual-

ly the best selection for fast and standard

cars.

!Easy

Results in a route with fewer turns and no

difficult maneuvers. With this option, you

can make this system to take, for example,

the freeway instead of a series of smaller

roads or streets.

!Short

Calculates a route with the shortest dis-

tance to your destination as a priority.

Usually practical for slower vehicles. Rarely

practical to use to search for shorter routes

for normal vehicles regardless of the

speed.

!Economical

Calculates a route that is quick and saves

fuel.

Navigation Mode

You can enable or disable off-road navigation.

!On-road

The route is planned towards the destina-

tion along the roads on the map.

!Off-road

The route is planned towards the destina-

tion in a straight line, not along the roads

on the map.

Highways

When this function is turned off, the route is

calculated prioritizing the avoidance of free-

ways.

This function is useful when you want to avoid

freeways when you are driving a slow car or

you are towing another vehicle.

Period Charge

When this function is turned off, the route is

calculated prioritizing the avoidance of toll

roads.

This function is useful when you want to avoid

toll roads with restricted time access that re-

quire you to purchase a separate pass or vign-

ette to extend the length of time allotted for

use.

pThis option can be enabled or disabled se-

parately from the pre-use toll road usage

option.

Per-use Toll

When this function is turned off, the route is

calculated prioritizing the avoidance of per-

use charged toll roads.

This function is useful when you want to avoid

toll roads where there is a per-use charge.

Chapter

10 Customizing preferences of the navigation

Ferries

When this function is turned off, the route is

calculated prioritizing the avoidance of ferries.

Car Shuttle Trains

When this function is turned off, the route is

calculated prioritising the avoidance of car

shuttle trains.

Car shuttle trains are used to transport vehi-

cles for relatively short distances and they

usually connect places that are not easily ac-

cessible by road.

Unpaved Roads

When this function is turned off, the route is

calculated prioritizing the avoidance of un-

paved roads.

pThe navigation system avoids unpaved

roads by default.

Carpool Lanes

When this function is turned off, the route is

calculated prioritizing the avoidance of car-

pool and HOV lanes.

pThe navigation system avoids carpool and

HOV lanes by default.

“Sound”settings

Voice

You can adjust the volume of the guidance

sounds (verbal instructions).

Alert Beeps

You can adjust the volume of the non-verbal

alert sounds (beeps).

Ding

You can turn off the attention tone that pre-

cedes the verbal instructions or adjust its vo-

lume.

Voice Guidance

You can enable or disable voice guidance.

pThis function is enabled by default.

Announce Streets and Roads in Native

Language Area

You can select whether to have the navigation

system announce the street names in the na-

tive language of the area, only the road num-

bers, or only the maneuvers.

Announce Streets and Roads in Foreign

Language Area

You can select whether to have the navigation

system read the street names in a foreign

country, only the road numbers, or only the

maneuvers.

Early Indication of Maneuvers

You can select whether you want an immedi-

ate announcement for the next maneuver or to

receive the information when the maneuver is

near.

Verbosity Level

You can set the verbosity of the voice instruc-

tions: how much information is given and how

often the prompts occur.

!Minimal: Voice instructions are given once

right before the next maneuver.

!Medium: Voice instructions are given once

as the vehicle approaches the next maneu-

ver and it is repeated right before the man-

euver.

!Verbose: Voice instructions are given once

relatively far from the next maneuver, it is

repeated as the vehicle approaches the

next maneuver, and it is repeated again

right before the actual maneuver.

Announce Route Summary

You can select whether to have the navigation

system announce by voice a quick summary

of the route whenever a route is calculated.

Announce Traffic Info

You can select whether to have the navigation

system announce by voice the traffic informa-

tion whenever a traffic incident on your route

is received.

En 65

Chapter

Customizing preferences of the navigation

Announce System Messages

When a system message appears, this naviga-

tion system can read out the message.

“Warnings”settings

IMPORTANT

!This system is able to warn you if you exceed

the current speed limit. This information may

not be available for your region (ask your local

dealer), or may not be fully correct for all

roads on the map.

!You are liable for ensuring that using this fea-

ture is legal in the country where you intend

to use it.

Speed Warning

!Warn When Speeding

You can select whether you want to receive

visible and/or audible warnings.

The following alert types are available:

—Audio and Visual: When selected, audi-

ble and visible warnings will go off

when you exceed the speed limit.

—Visual: When selected, visible warnings

will go off when you exceed the speed

limit.

!Speed Limit Always Visible

You can select whether you want to see the

speed limit sign on the map all the time.

When you set the speed limit to always be

visible, the color of the speed limit sign

changes when you exceed the speed limit.

!Warn at *** percent of the Speed Limit

(Outside Cities)

You can receive a warning when you reach

the set percentage of the speed limit in

rural areas.

!Warn at *** percent of the Speed Limit

(in Cities)

You can receive a warning when you reach

the set percentage of the speed limit in

urban areas.

Alert Points

This setting allows you to receive a warning

when approaching alert points like school

zones or railroad crossings.

=For details, refer to Setting the alert point

warnings on page 70.

“Navigation Map”settings

Map Display

You can see the effect when you change a set-

ting.

!Viewpoint

You can adjust the basic zoom and tilt le-

vels to your needs. Three levels are avail-

able.

!Color Mode

You can switch between daytime and night-

time color modes or let the software switch

between the two modes automatically a

few minutes before sunrise and a few min-

utes after sunset.

!Day Map Color

You can select the color scheme used in

the daytime map.

!Night Map Color

You can select the color scheme used in

nighttime map.

!Landmarks

This setting shows or hides 3D landmarks

which are 3D artistic or block representa-

tions of prominent or well-known objects.

pFor AVIC-6100NEX and AVIC-5100NEX,

this function becomes effective only

when the additional map data is in-

stalled.

!Buildings

This setting shows or hides 3D city models

which are 3D artistic or block representa-

tions of complete city building data con-

taining actual building sizes and actual

positions on the map.

pFor AVIC-6100NEX and AVIC-5100NEX,

this function becomes effective only

when the additional map data is in-

stalled.

Chapter

10 Customizing preferences of the navigation

!3D Terrain

This setting shows or hides the 3D eleva-

tion of the surrounding terrain.

!Track Logs

You can turn on or off track log saving

which saves the sequence of the locations

you go through on your journeys.

!Place Markers

You can select which POI icons to show on

the map while navigating.

pWhen a large number of POI icons exist

on a map display, maps and POI icons

become hard to see. To maintain map

and POI visibility, reduce the displayed

categories as much as possible.

Data Fields

You can choose to have different values dis-

played for when navigating a route to a select

destination and for when just cruising around

without any particular destination.

=For details, refer to Browsing the data field

on page 35.

“First”,“Second”and “Third”selects items

displayed in the data fields shown when the

route exists. “Without Route”selects the

items displayed in the data fields shown when

a route does not exist.

Route Progress Bar

You can turn on the route progress bar to dis-

play the current route as a straight line located

on the right side of the map. The arrow repre-

sents your current position and moves up the

line as you travel along the route. Waypoints

and traffic event markers are also displayed on

the line.

Offer Freeway Services

You may need to stop by a gas station or a res-

taurant during your journey.

=For details, refer to Frequently shown route

events on page 34.

Services Displayed

You can select the service types displayed for

the freeway exits or service stations. Choose

from the POI categories.

Automatic Overview

When selected, the map zooms out to show

an overview of the surrounding area if the next

route event (maneuver) is far. When you get

close to the event, the map returns to the nor-

mal map view.

Signposts

Whenever adequate information is available,

lane information similar to the real ones on

road signs above the road is displayed at the

top of the map. You can turn this feature on or

off.

Junction View

If you are approaching a freeway exit or a com-

plex intersection and the necessary informa-

tion is available, the map is replaced with a 3D

view of the junction.

Tunnel View

When entering tunnels, the surface roads and

buildings can be distracting. This feature

shows a generic picture of a tunnel instead of

the map. A top-down overview of the tunnel

and remaining distance are also displayed.

Offer Congestion Detour on Highways

When you slow down while driving on a free-

way due to a traffic congestion, this navigation

system offers you a detour using the next exit.

The message shows you the distance to the

exit and the difference in the distance and esti-

mated time compared to the original route.

You can choose from one of the following op-

tions:

!Touch [Dismiss] or just ignore the message

if you want to keep the original route.

!Touch [Preview] to see an overview of the

original route and the detour to make the

decision. You can accept the detour as

shown in the preview, or increase the free-

way segment bypassed before accepting.

!Turn to the suggested new direction and

the route will be automatically recalcu-

lated.

En 67

Chapter

Customizing preferences of the navigation

Offer Real-time Route Alternatives

Alternative routes can be suggested when

driving on normal roads. This navigation sys-

tem will select a different turn in the upcom-

ing intersection and offer you a different route

for the next section of the route. You cannot,

however, modify the offered detour.

Offer Parking Around Destination

Parking at the destination may not be easy to

find in city areas. As you approach the destina-

tion, this navigation system can offer parking

category places near your destination. Touch

to open a top-down map with the destina-

tion and the offered parking places. The route

is calculated by selecting one of the parking

places.

Offer Hints Upon Detour

If you leave the recommended route and sud-

denly exit the freeway, this navigation system

offers different alternatives near the exit like

gas stations or restaurants. Also, if there are

avoidable parts of the original route ahead

(like a tunnel, a toll road or a ferry), you will

find them in the list in case you want to bypass

them with the help of this navigation system.

“Regional”settings

Language

This key displays the current language of the

user interface. By touching the key, you can

select a new language from the list of avail-

able languages. This system will restart if you

change this setting.

Voice Language

This key displays the current voice guidance

profile. By touching the key, you can select a

new voice guidance language from the list of

available languages and speakers. Touch any

of these keys to hear a sample voice prompt.

Units and Formats

You can set the various units to be used by

this system.

pThis system may not support all the listed

units in some voice guidance languages.

pYou can also set other country specific

units used to display different values in this

system.

Distance

The unit of distance can be changed.

Fuel Economy

The unit of fuel mileage can be changed.

Weight

The unit of weight can be changed.

Coordinate Display Format

The format of the coordinates can be chan-

ged.

Currency

The currency unit can be set.

Time Zone

By default, the time zone is taken from the

map information and adjusted according to

your current location.

!Automatic Time Zone

The time zone setting changes automati-

cally.

!Manual Time Zone

The present setting value for the time differ-

ence and daylight saving time that you set

are used.

!Manual Time Zone if Auto Unavailable

The time zone setting changes automati-

cally if automatic change is available.

Otherwise, the present setting value that

you set is used.

!Manual Time Zone in Current Zone

The present setting value that you set are

used in the current time zone. If your vehi-

cle moves to another time zone, the time

zone setting changes automatically.

Time Zone

You can set the time difference.

Chapter

10 Customizing preferences of the navigation

Daylight Saving Time

You can turn on or off the daylight saving time

for this navigation system.

“Display”settings

Menu Animations

When animation is turned on, the keys on the

menus and keyboard screens appear in an

animated way. Screen transitions are also ani-

mated.

Day Skin Theme

You can select the style and colors of the navi-

gation menu used in the daytime.

Night Skin Theme

You can select the style and colors of the navi-

gation menu used in the nighttime.

“Traffic”settings

Traffic

You can set to enable or disable the TMC recei-

ver that can receive real-time traffic informa-

tion.

Data Source

You can select what data source you want to

use for receiving real-time traffic information.

[Online] is available only if the device is en-

abled.

Show Traffic Info

You can select whether to show icons relevant

to traffic incidents and lines indicating the

traffic flow on the map.

!Off

No traffic icons or lines indicating the traf-

fic flow are shown.

!Color

Only the line relevant traffic incidents are

shown on the map.

!Color And Icon

Icons for the relevant traffic incidents and

lines indicating the traffic flow are shown

on the map.

Show Free Traffic Flow As Well

You can select whether to receive information

on smooth traffic flow.

Offer Detour if it Saves at Least

You can set the minimum time to be saved

when having the system suggest a detour

route. If the estimated time saved by the

planned detour avoiding the traffic incidents is

more than the set time, the system suggests

the new detour route. Otherwise, the new

route is not suggested.

Confirm Detours Manually

You can enable or disable the manual confir-

mation of every recalculation.

“Weather”settings

pFor details, refer to the manual for

AVICSYNC on our website.

“Fuel”settings

pFor details, refer to the manual for

AVICSYNC on our website.

“Trip Monitor”settings

Enable Auto-Saving

=For details, refer to Setting the trip logger on

page 59.

Save Track Log

=For details, refer to Setting the trip logger on

page 59.

“Online Services”settings

You can use the “Online Services”settings to

enable or disable connected online features.

pFor details, refer to the manual for

AVICSYNC on our website.

=For details, refer to Expanding the use of

the navigation functions on page 71.

En 69

Chapter

Customizing preferences of the navigation

Online Traffic

You can enable or disable the online traffic ser-

vice.

Online Weather

You can enable or disable the online weather

forecast service.

Online Parking

You can enable or disable the online parking

service.

Online Fuel Prices

You can enable or disable the online gas price

service.

Online Search

You can enable or disable the online search

service.

“Usage Reports”settings

Application Usage Information

You can enable or disable the collection of

anonymous statistical information on using

this navigation system for later development

purposes.

pThe collected data is used for improving

the user interface and the program work-

flow. The data is processed anonymously,

and no one will be able to track any perso-

nal information.

GPS Tracks

You can set to enable or disable collecting

anonymous track logs for later development

purposes.

pThe collected data is used for improving

the quality and coverage of maps. The data

is processed anonymously, and no one will

be able to track any personal in-

formation.

Setting the alert point

warnings

You can set an alert for the different alert point

categories, individually.

1 Press the MAP button.

The Map screen appears.

2 Touch the following key.

Displays the navigation menu on

the Map screen.

3 Touch to show the next page.

4 Touch [Settings].

The “Settings”screen appears.

5 Touch [Warnings].

The “Warnings”screen appears.

6 Touch [Alert Points].

The “Alert Points”screen appears.

7 Touch [Alert Point Warnings] to turn it

on.

8 Touch [Alert Types].

The “Select Alert Types”screen appears.

9 Touch any of the items to change the

setting.

The warning setting screen of the selected ca-

tegory is shown.

10 Touch [Warning Type] and then touch

one of the options.

The following alert types are available:

!Disabled:

The system does not warn you of the alert

points for this category.

!Audio and Visual:

You will receive audible and visible warn-

ings while you are approaching the points

in this category.

!Visual:

You will receive a visible warning while you

are approaching the points in this category.

Chapter

10 Customizing preferences of the navigation

pIf you select “Audio and Visual”in the

warning type setting, you can change the

reception timing of the audio alert. If you

select “Only When Speeding”, the audio

alert is only played when you exceed the

given speed limit. If you select “When Ap-

proaching”, the audio alert is always played

when approaching one of these alert points.

In order to draw your attention, the alert is

different when you exceed the speed lim-

it.

Expanding the use of the

navigation functions

You can expand the use of the navigation func-

tions to iPhone or smartphones if you connect

an iPhone or a smartphone (Android) that has

the AVICSYNC App installed.

Be sure to read before you use

AVICSYNC function

IMPORTANT

!Premium services for AVICSYNC require a

paid subscription in order to be used, and

not all services are available in all coun-

tries. Please refer to our website for more

details.

!Please be aware that you may be charged

additional roaming charges by your cellular

provider if you use connected services

while abroad.

!If the Data Plan for your iPhone or smart-

phone (Android) does not provide for unlim-

ited data usage, additional charges from

your carrier may apply for accessing app-

based connected content via networks

other than Wi-Fi.

!The information which is sent by content

provider, such as search results, regula-

tions, prices, etc. may not necessarily corre-

spond to the actual condition. Utilise the

information for your reference.

!To ensure compatibility, always use the lat-

est version of the AVICSYNC App.

Limitations:

!Access to app-based connected content will

depend on the availability of cellular and/or

Wi-Fi network coverage for the purpose of al-

lowing your smartphone to connect to the In-

ternet.

!Service availability may be geographically lim-

ited to the region. Consult the connected con-

tent service provider for additional

information.

!Ability of this product to access connected

content is subject to change without notice

and could be affected by any of the following:

compatibility issues with future firmware ver-

sions of smartphone; compatibility issues with

future versions of the connected content ap-

plication(s) for the smartphone; changes to or

discontinuation of the connected Content ap-

plication(s) or service by its provider.

En 71

Chapter

Customizing preferences of the navigation

!Pioneer is not liable for any issues that may

arise from incorrect or flawed app-based con-

tent.

!The content and functionality of the supported

applications are the responsibility of the App

providers.

What is the AVICSYNC App?

The AVICSYNC App is a dynamic companion

app that you can use to connect your iPhone

or smartphone to a compatible Pioneer navi-

gation system.

Once linked, the navigation system communi-

cates with your iPhone or smartphone to

share information such as contacts, naviga-

tion history, planned routes, POI favorites, and

even where you parked your vehicle.

With the AVICSYNC App, your navigation sys-

tem can also access Premium connected ser-

vices such as real-time local search and

weather, traffic, parking, and gas price data

lookup to ensure that you’ll have all the infor-

mation you need to reach your desired desti-

nation.

As new mapping data becomes available, you

can use the AVICSYNC App to review, pur-

chase, download, and transfer updated map-

ping content directly to the compatible

Pioneer navigation system.

In addition to augmenting your Pioneer in-

dash navigation experience, AVICSYNC App

also works as a standalone navigation app.

This means that you’ll always have access to

Pioneer’s accurate turn-by-turn navigation,

even when you’re not in your vehicle.

Access our website to check further details for

the AVICSYNC App.

—For U.S.A.

http://www.pioneerelectronics.com/AVICSYNC

—For Canada

http://www.pioneerelectronics.ca/AVICSYNC

Compatibility and

connectivity

You need to install the free AVICSYNC App to

your iPhone or smartphone (Android). To use

the AVICSYNC App function, both iPhone or

smartphone (Android) compatibility with the

AVICSYNC App and connectivity with the na-

vigation system are required.

AVICSYNC compatibility

AVICSYNC is available for the following mod-

els.

(As of November 2014)

pDepending on the software version of the

iPhone and Android, it may not be compati-

ble with this product. For latest compatibil-

ity with this product and AVICSYNC App,

refer to the information on our website.

iPhone models

!iPhone 6 Plus: iOS 8.0.x

!iPhone 6: iOS 8.0.x

!iPhone 5s: iOS 7.0.x, 7.1.x, 8.0.x, 8.1

!iPhone 5c: iOS 7.0.x, 7.1.x, 8.0.x, 8.1

!iPhone 5: iOS 7.0.x, 7.1.x, 8.0.x, 8.1

!iPhone 4s: iOS 7.0.x, 7.1.x, 8.0.x, 8.1

!iPhone 4: iOS 6.x

Smartphone (Android) models

SAMSUNG

!Galaxy S2: Android 4.1.2

!Galaxy S3: Android 4.1.2, 4.3

!Galaxy S4: Android 4.2.2, 4.4.2

!Galaxy Note B: Android 4.1.1

!Galaxy Tab 2: Android 4.0.3

!Nexus 5: Android 4.4.2

ASUS

!Nexus 7 (2013) 4.3

Chapter

10 Customizing preferences of the navigation

Preparations before using the

AVICSYNC function

1 Download the AVICSYNC App from

App Store or Google Play and install the

app to your iPhone or smartphone

(Android).

To find AVICSYNC App, access the App Store

or Google Play and enter “AVICSYNC”in the

search box.

2 Start the AVICSYNC App on your

iPhone or smartphone (Android).

3 Connect your iPhone or smartphone

(Android) to the navigation system via

Bluetooth or USB cable connection.

=For details of the Bluetooth connection,

refer to Chapter 11.

=For details of the USB connections, refer to

the Installation Manual.

4 Press the MAP button.

The Map screen appears.

5 Touch the following key.

Displays the navigation menu on

the Map screen.

6 Touch on the navigation menu.

7 Touch [Associate New Phone].

8 Touch the iPhone or smartphone

(Android) that you want to associate with

the navigation system and then touch [As-

sociate].

9 Accept the association on your iPhone

or smartphone (Android).

Once the association is established, your

iPhone or smartphone (Android) is automati-

cally associated when you connect your

iPhone or smartphone (Android) to the naviga-

tion system.

10 Purchase connected services via the

AVICSYNC App.

11 Display the navigation menu and then

touch [Settings].

12 Touch [Online Services].

13 Touch the service that you want to acti-

vate.

The menus for the connected service are

activated.

Getting the map update

You can update existing content, purchase ad-

ditional maps and activate extra services on

your product. To update the content, download

the update on your USB memory storage by

using the computer to which the Naviextras

Toolbox is installed. Then, transfer the data

from connected USB memory storage to your

navigation system by using “SyncTool”on this

product.

pFor details, access the following URL and

refer to "HOW TO UPDATE?" GUIDE.

http://pioneer.naviextras.com

En 73

Chapter

Customizing preferences of the navigation

If your devices feature Bluetooth®technology,

this product can be connected to your devices

wirelessly. This section describes how to set

up a Bluetooth connection.

For details about connectivity with the devices

featuring Bluetooth wireless technology, refer

to the information on our website.

pThe “Bluetooth”menu is available only

when you stop your vehicle in a safe place

and apply the parking brake.

Preparing communication

devices

This product has a built-in function that en-

ables to use devices featuring Bluetooth wire-

less technology.

=For details, refer to Notes for hands-free

phoning on page 86.

You can register and use devices that feature

the following profiles with this product.

!HFP (Hands-Free Profile)

!A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Pro-

file)

!SPP (Serial Port Profile)

pWhen this product is turned off, the

Bluetooth connection is also disconnected.

When the system restarts, the system auto-

matically attempts to reconnect the pre-

viously-connected device. Even when the

connection is severed for some reason, the

system automatically reconnects the speci-

fied device (except when the connection is

severed due to device operation).

Registering your Bluetooth

devices

You need to register your devices featuring

Bluetooth wireless technology when you con-

nect it to this product for the first time. A total

of three devices can be registered. Two regis-

tration methods are available:

!Searching for nearby Bluetooth devices

!Pairing from your Bluetooth devices

pIf three devices are already paired, “Mem-

ory Full”is displayed and pairing cannot

be performed. In such cases, delete a

paired device first.

=For details, refer to Deleting a registered

device on page 76.

Searching for nearby Bluetooth

devices

The system searches for available Bluetooth

devices near this product, displays them in a

list, and registers them for connection.

pWhen the device is already connected, this

function is inactive.

1 Activate the Bluetooth wireless tech-

nology on your devices.

pFor some Bluetooth devices, no specific ac-

tion is necessary to activate Bluetooth wire-

less technology. For details, refer to the

instruction manual of your devices.

pSet the device visible to other devices.

2 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

3 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “Bluetooth”screen appears.

4 Touch [Connection].

The following screen appears.

Chapter

11 Registering and connecting a Bluetooth device

5 Touch the following key.

Starts searching.

The system searches for Bluetooth devices

waiting for a connection and displays them in

the list if a device is found.

pUp to 20 devices will be listed in the order

that the devices are found.

6 Wait until your Bluetooth device ap-

pears in the list.

pIf you cannot find the Bluetooth device that

you want to connect, check that the device

is waiting for a Bluetooth wireless technol-

ogy connection.

7 Touch the name of the Bluetooth device

you want to register.

While connecting, “Pairing…Please wait.”is

displayed. If the connection is established,

“Paired.”is displayed.

pIf your device supports SSP (Secure Simple

Pairing), a six-digit number appears on the

display of this product. Touch [Yes] to pair-

ing the device.

pIf the connection fails, “Error”is displayed.

In such cases, try again from the begin-

ning.

pThe PIN code is set to “0000”as the default,

but can be changed.

=For details, refer to Entering the PIN code

for Bluetooth wireless connection on

page 77.

pOnce the connection is established, the de-

vice name is displayed. Touch the device

name to disconnect.

After the device is successfully registered, a

Bluetooth connection is established from the

system.

The profile icons displayed on the registered

device list screen light up as follows.

Lights up when your mobile device

is successfully connected with the

HFP (Hands-Free Profile).

Lights up when your audio device

is successfully connected with the

A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribu-

tion Profile)/AVRCP (Audio/Video

Remote Control Profile).

Lights up when the Bluetooth con-

nection is established with the

SPP (Serial Port Profile).

pAfter pairing, the phone book registered in

the device may be automatically trans-

mitted to this product.

#If you touch the following key, you can switch

the display between the device names and

Bluetooth device addresses.

Switches between the device

names and Bluetooth device ad-

dresses.

Pairing from your Bluetooth

devices

You can register a Bluetooth device by setting

this product to standby mode and requesting

a connection from the Bluetooth device.

pBefore registration, make sure that “Visibi-

lity”in the “Bluetooth”menu is set to

“On”.

En 75

Chapter

Registering and connecting a Bluetooth device

=For details, refer to Switching visibility on

page 77.

1 Activate the Bluetooth wireless tech-

nology on your devices.

pFor some Bluetooth devices, no specific ac-

tion is necessary to activate Bluetooth wire-

less technology. For details, refer to the

instruction manual of your devices.

2 Use the Bluetooth setting in the device

to pair this product with the device.

pIf a PIN code input is required, enter a PIN

code. (The default PIN code is “0000”.)

When the device is successfully registered,

the connection settings are made from the

device.

pIf registration fails, repeat the procedure

from the beginning.

Connecting to a Bluetooth

device automatically

If this function is set to on, a connection be-

tween your Bluetooth device and this product

will take place automatically as soon as the

two devices are less than a few meters apart.

Initially, this function is set to on.

pIf this function is set to on, a connection

with the last connected Bluetooth device

will be established automatically when the

ignition switch is turned on.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “Bluetooth”screen appears.

3 Touch [Auto Connect] repeatedly until

the desired setting appears.

!On (default):

Turns the automatic connection on.

!Off:

Turns the automatic connection off.

If your Bluetooth device is ready for a

Bluetooth wireless connection, a connection

to this product will automatically be estab-

lished.

If connection fails, “Bluetooth auto connec-

tion failed. Retry?”appears.

Touch [Yes] to reconnect.

Deleting a registered device

When you have already registered three

Bluetooth devices and you want to add an-

other one, you must first delete one of the re-

gistered devices.

pIf a registered phone is deleted, all the

phone book entries and call history lists

that correspond to the phone will be also

cleared.

CAUTION

Never turn this product off while the paired

Bluetooth device is being deleted.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “Bluetooth”screen appears.

3 Touch [Connection].

The following screen appears.

Chapter

11 Registering and connecting a Bluetooth device

4 Touch the following key.

Deletes a paired device.

A confirmation message appears.

5 Touch [Yes].

The device is deleted.

Connecting a registered

Bluetooth device manually

Connect the Bluetooth device manually in the

following cases:

!Two or more Bluetooth devices are regis-

tered, and you want to manually select the

device to be used.

!You want to reconnect a disconnected

Bluetooth device.

!Connection cannot be established automa-

tically for some reason.

To start the connection manually, carry out the

following procedure.

1 Activate the Bluetooth wireless tech-

nology on your devices.

pFor some Bluetooth devices, no specific ac-

tion is necessary to activate Bluetooth wire-

less technology. For details, refer to the

instruction manual of your devices.

2 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

3 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “Bluetooth”screen appears.

4 Touch [Connection].

The following screen appears.

5 Touch the name of the device that you

want to connect.

Switching visibility

This function sets whether or not to make this

product visible to other devices.

Initially, this function is set to on.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “Bluetooth”screen appears.

3 Touch [Visibility] repeatedly until the

desired setting appears.

!On (default):

Turns the visibility on.

!Off:

Turns the visibility off.

Entering the PIN code for

Bluetooth wireless connection

To connect your Bluetooth device to this pro-

duct via Bluetooth wireless technology, you

need to enter a PIN code on your Bluetooth

device to verify the connection.

pThe default code is “0000”, but you can

change it with this function.

En 77

Chapter

Registering and connecting a Bluetooth device

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “Bluetooth”screen appears.

3 Touch [PIN Code Input].

The “PIN Code”screen appears.

4 Touch [0] to [9] to input pin code (up to

8 digits).

5 Touch the following key.

Stores the PIN code in this pro-

duct.

Displaying the Bluetooth

address

You can check the Bluetooth address of this

product.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “Bluetooth”screen appears.

3 Touch [Device Information].

The Bluetooth address is displayed.

Clearing the Bluetooth

memory

CAUTION

Never turn this product off while the Bluetooth

memory is being cleared.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “Bluetooth”screen appears.

3 Touch [Bluetooth Memory Clear].

4 Touch [Clear].

The confirmation screen appears.

5 Touch [OK].

The Bluetooth memory is cleared.

#If you do not want to clear the memory, touch

[Cancel].

Updating Bluetooth software

This function is used to update this product

with the latest Bluetooth software. For details

on Bluetooth software and updating, refer to

our website.

pThe source is turned off and the Bluetooth

connection is disconnected before the pro-

cess starts.

CAUTION

Never turn this product off while the software is

being updated.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

Chapter

11 Registering and connecting a Bluetooth device

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “Bluetooth”screen appears.

3 Touch [BT Software Update].

4 Touch [Start].

The data transfer screen is displayed.

pFollow the on-screen instructions to finish

updating the Bluetooth software.

Displaying the Bluetooth

software version

If this product fails to operate properly, you

may need to consult your dealer for repair.

In such cases, you may be asked to specify the

software version. Perform the following proce-

dure to check the version on this unit.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “Bluetooth”screen appears.

3 Touch [Bluetooth Version Information].

The version of this product’s Bluetooth mod-

ule appears.

En 79

Chapter

Registering and connecting a Bluetooth device

CAUTION

For your safety, avoid talking on the phone as

much as possible while driving.

If your cellular phone features Bluetooth tech-

nology, this product can be connected to your

cellular phone wirelessly. Using this hands-

free function, you can operate this product to

make or receive phone calls. This section de-

scribes how to set up a Bluetooth connection

and how to operate a cellular phone featuring

Bluetooth technology on this product.

For details about connectivity with the devices

featuring Bluetooth wireless technology, refer

to the information on our website.

Displaying the phone menu

pConnect a cellular phone to this product

for using hands-free phoning.

=For details, refer to Chapter 11.

pThe Phone icon is displayed on the follow-

ing screens.

—Top menu screen

—AV operation screen

—On the App control side bar on the

AppRadio Mode and MirrorLink mode

screens

%Touch the following key.

Displays the Phone menu screen.

pThe “Phone Book”screen appears when

using this function for the first time. The

screen of the last-used function appears

from the next time.

Touch panel keys

6 7

1Displays the preset dial screen.

2Switches to the phone book list.

3Switches to the missed, received and dialed

call lists.

4Switches the mode to enter the phone num-

ber directly.

5Switches to the voice recognition function.

6Displays the Setting menu screen.

7Closes the screen.

8Displays entries in the list by the initial charac-

ter.

Reading the screen

1 32456

1Menu title

2Name of the connected cellular phone

3Battery status of the cellular phone

4Reception status of the cellular phone

5Indicates that a Bluetooth telephone is con-

nected.

The list number of the connected device is dis-

played.

6List display area

Chapter

12 Using hands-free phoning

Making a phone call

You can make a phone call in many different

ways.

Direct dialing

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “Dial”screen appears.

1 2

1Dial pad

2Deletes one digit. Touch and hold to delete

all digits.

3 Touch the number keys to enter the

phone number.

4 Touch the following key.

Makes a call.

5 Touch the following key.

Ends the call.

The call ends.

pYou may hear a noise when you hang up

the phone.

Calling a number in the phone

book

After finding the number you want to call in

the phone book, you can select the entry and

make the call.

pThe contacts on your phone will normally

be transferred to this product automatically

when the phone is connected.

If the contacts are not transferred automati-

cally, you can transfer the contacts using

the phone menu of the cellular phone.

To transfer the contacts using the phone

menu of the cellular phone, set this pro-

duct visible to other devices.

=For details, refer to Switching visibility

on page 77.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “Phone Book”screen appears.

3 Touch the desired name on the list.

The details screen of the phone book appears.

4 Touch the phone number you want to

dial.

The dial screen appears.

5 Dialing starts.

pTo cancel the call, touch .

En 81

Chapter

Using hands-free phoning

6 Touch the following key.

Ends the call.

The call ends.

Selecting a number by alphabet

search mode

If many phone numbers are registered in the

phone book, you can search for phone num-

bers by alphabet search mode.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “Phone Book”screen appears.

3 Drag the Initial Search Bar to find an

entry by the initial character of the name.

The alphabet corresponding to the current po-

sition on the Initial Search Bar is displayed.

4 Release the Initial Search Bar at the de-

sired alphabet.

The “Phone Book”entries starting with that

letter (e.g. “Ben”,“Brian”and “Burt”when “B”

is selected) will be displayed.

pTo refine the search with a different letter,

touch [Cancel].

5 Touch an entry to display the phone

number list of the entry.

The details screen of the phone book appears.

6 Touch the phone number you want to

dial.

The dial screen appears.

7 Dialing starts.

pTo cancel the call, touch .

8 Touch the following key.

Ends the call.

The call ends.

Dialing from the history

The most recent calls made (dialed, received

and missed) are stored in the call history list.

You can browse the call history list and call

numbers from it.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “History”screen appears.

pDepending on the type of cellular phone,

some calls may not be displayed in the call

history.

1Type of call history

Received calls.

Dialed calls.

Missed calls.

Chapter

12 Using hands-free phoning

3 Touch the desired entry on the list to

make a call.

The dial screen appears.

4 Dialing starts.

pTo cancel the call, touch .

5 Touch the following key.

Ends the call.

The call ends.

Using the preset dial lists

You can dial a number from the preset dial

list.

Registering a phone number

You can easily store up to six phone numbers

per device as presets.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “Phone Book”or “History”screen ap-

pears.

3 Touch the following key.

Registers the phone number to the

“Preset Dial”list.

Dialling from the preset dial list

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “Preset Dial”screen appears.

3 Touch the desired entry on the list to

make a call.

The dial screen appears.

4 Dialing starts.

pTo cancel the call, touch .

5 Touch the following key.

Ends the call.

The call ends.

Deleting a phone number

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “Preset Dial”screen appears.

3 Touch the following key.

Deletes the phone number.

Receiving a phone call

You can answer an incoming call to your cellu-

lar phone via this product.

En 83

Chapter

Using hands-free phoning

Answering an incoming call

This product informs you that it is receiving a

call by displaying a message and producing a

ring sound.

pYou can set the system to automatically an-

swer incoming calls. If this product is not

set to automatically answer incoming calls,

answer the calls manually.

=For details, refer to Answering a call

automatically on page 85.

pThe registered name appears if the phone

number of the received call is already regis-

tered in “Phone Book”.

1 Touch the following key.

Answers an incoming call.

Rejects an incoming call.

The rejected call is recorded in the missed call

history list.

=For details, refer to Dialing from the history

on page 82.

2 Touch the following key.

Ends the call.

The call ends.

Minimizing the dial

confirmation screen

pThe dial confirmation screen cannot be

minimized on the AV operation screen.

pAV sources cannot be selected even if the

dial confirm screen is minimized while talk-

ing on the phone.

1 Touch the following key.

The dial confirmation screen is

minimized.

2 Touch the following key.

Displays the dial confirmation

screen again.

Chapter

12 Using hands-free phoning

Changing the phone settings

Answering a call automatically

This product automatically answers incoming

calls to the connected cellular phone, so you

can answer calls while driving without taking

your hands off the steering wheel.

When “Auto Answer”is set to “On”, an in-

coming call will be automatically answered in

5 seconds.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “Bluetooth”screen appears.

3 Touch [Auto Answer] repeatedly until

the desired setting appears.

!Off (default):

Turns the automatic answering off.

!On:

Turns the automatic answering on.

Switching the ring tone

You can select whether or not to use this pro-

duct’s ring tone.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “Bluetooth”screen appears.

3 Touch [Ring Tone] repeatedly until the

desired setting appears.

!On (default):

Turns the ring tone on.

!Off:

Turns the ring tone off.

Inverting names in the phone book

When your device is connected to this pro-

duct, the first and last names of your contacts

may be registered to the phone book in reverse

order.

You can use this function to change the order

back. (Inverting the names in the phone book)

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “Bluetooth”screen appears.

3 Touch [Invert Name].

The confirmation screen appears.

4 Touch [Yes].

pIf the inversion fails, “Invert Name Error”

appears. In such cases, try again from the

beginning.

pInverting the names of your contacts from

this product does not affect the data on

your cellular phone.

Setting the private mode

During a conversation, you can switch to pri-

vate mode (talk directly on your cellular

phone).

En 85

Chapter

Using hands-free phoning

%Touch the following keys to turn pri-

vate mode on or off.

Talk directly on your mobile device.

Hands-free phoning

Adjusting the other party’s

listening volume

To maintain good sound quality, this product

can adjust the other party’s listening volume.

If the volume is too loud or not loud enough,

use this function.

%Touch the following key.

Switches between the three vo-

lume levels.

pThis function can be performed even while

talking on the phone.

pSettings can be stored for each device.

Using the voice recognition

function

You can use the voice recognition function of

iPhone or smartphone.

pWhen an iPhone running iOS 6.1 or higher

is used, Siri Eyes Free Mode is available

with this product.

pFor AVIC-8100NEX and AVIC-7100NEX

users

For using this function with a smartphone,

the device must be compatible with

Android Auto and “Mode”in “Smart-

phone Setup”must be set to “Android

Auto”beforehand.

=For details, refer to Information on the

connections and functions for each de-

vice on page 90.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys to start voice

control.

The voice recognition function launches and

the voice control screen appears.

You can use the voice recognition function in

the same way as using it on the iPhone or

smartphone.

pYou can also launch the voice recognition

function by pressing and holding the

HOME button.

Indicates that this product is on

standby for your voice commands.

Cancels the voice recognition

function.

Notes for hands-free phoning

General notes

!Connection to all cellular phones featuring

Bluetooth wireless technology is not guar-

anteed.

Chapter

12 Using hands-free phoning

!The line-of-sight distance between this pro-

duct and your cellular phone must be

10 meters or less when sending and receiv-

ing voice and data via Bluetooth technol-

ogy. However, the actual transmission

distance may be shorter than the estimated

distance, depending on the usage environ-

ment.

!With some cellular phones, the ring sound

may not be output from the speakers.

!If private mode is selected on the cellular

phone, hands-free phoning may be dis-

abled.

Registration and connection

!Cellular phone operations vary depending

on the type of cellular phone. Refer to the

instruction manual that came with your cel-

lular phone for detailed instructions.

!With cellular phones, phone book transfer

may not work even though your phone is

paired with this product. In that case, dis-

connect your phone, and then perform

pairing again from your phone to this pro-

duct.

Making and receiving calls

!You may hear a noise in the following situa-

tions:

—When you answer the phone using the

button on the phone.

—When the person on the other end of

the line hangs up the phone.

!If the person on the other end of the line

cannot hear the conversation due to an

echo, decrease the volume level for hands-

free phoning. This may reduce the echo.

!With some cellular phones, even if you

press the accept button on the cellular

phone when a call comes in, hands-free

phoning may not be performed.

!The registered name appears if the phone

number of the received call is already regis-

tered in the phone book. When one phone

number is registered under different

names, only the phone number is dis-

played.

!If the phone number of the received call is

not registered in the phone book, the

phone number of the received call appears.

The received call and the dialed

number histories

!You cannot make a call to the entry of an

unknown user (no phone number) in the re-

ceived call history.

!If calls are made by operating your cellular

phone, no history data will be recorded in

this product.

Phone book transfers

!If there are more than 800 phone book en-

tries on your cellular phone, all entries may

not be downloaded completely.

!With some cellular phones, it may not be

possible to transfer all items in the phone

book at one time. In this case, transfer

items one by one from your cellular phone.

!Depending on the cellular phone, this pro-

duct may not display the phone book cor-

rectly. (Some characters may be garbled, or

the order of first and last names may be re-

versed.)

!If the phone book in the cellular phone con-

tains image data, the phone book may not

be transferred correctly. (Image data can-

not be transferred from the cellular phone.)

!Depending on the cellular phone, phone

book transfer may not be available.

En 87

Chapter

Using hands-free phoning

When using an iPod / iPhone or a smartphone

with this product, configure the settings of

this product according to the device to be con-

nected.

This section describes the settings required

for each device.

The basic flow of iPod /

iPhone or smartphone setup

1Select the method for connecting your de-

vice.

=For details, refer to Setting the device

connection method on page 88.

2Connect your device to this product.

=For details of the connections, refer to

the Installation Manual.

3If necessary, connect your device to this

product via Bluetooth connection.

=For details of the Bluetooth connection,

refer to Chapter 11.

Setting the device

connection method

If you want to use the application for iPhone

or smartphone on this product, you must se-

lect the method for connecting your device.

Settings are required according to the con-

nected device.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “System”screen appears.

3 Touch [Input/Output Settings].

4 Touch [Smartphone Setup].

The “Smartphone Setup”screen appears.

5 Configure the following settings.

!Device: Select the device to be connected.

!Connection: Select the connection meth-

od.

pConfigure the settings correctly according

to the device to be connected and the con-

nection method to be used.

=For details, refer to Information on the

connections and functions for each de-

vice on page 90.

pIf you change the setting, the confirmation

screen appears.

Touch [OK].

The setting will change after the following

processes are automatically executed.

—The source is turned off.

—AppRadio Mode or MirrorLink mode is

exited.

—The smartphone connection (USB and

Bluetooth) is disconnected.

To cancel, touch [Cancel].

pThe setting cannot be changed for a while

after the setting is changed.

iPod compatibility

This product supports only the following iPod

models and iPod software versions. Others

may not work correctly.

Made for

!iPhone 6 Plus: iOS 8

!iPhone 6: iOS 8

!iPhone 5s: iOS 7.0.3

!iPhone 5c: iOS 7.0.3

!iPhone 5: iOS 7.0.3

!iPhone 4s: iOS 7.0.3

!iPhone 4: iOS 7.0.3

!iPhone 3GS: iOS 6.0.1

!iPod touch (5th generation): iOS 6.0.1

!iPod touch (4th generation): iOS 6.0.1

!iPod touch (3rd generation): iOS 5.1.1

!iPod touch (2nd generation): iOS 4.2.1

!iPod classic 160GB (2009): Ver. 2.0.4

Chapter

13 iPod / iPhone or smartphone setup operation

!iPod classic 160GB (2008): Ver. 2.0.1

!iPod classic 80GB: Ver. 1.1.2

!iPod nano (7th generation)

!iPod nano (6th generation): Ver. 1.2

!iPod nano (5th generation): Ver. 1.0.2

!iPod nano (4th generation): Ver. 1.0.4

!iPod nano (3rd generation): Ver. 1.1.3

pYou can connect and control an iPod com-

patible with this product by using sepa-

rately sold connector cables.

pOperation methods may vary depending on

the iPod model and the software version of

the iPod.

pDepending on the software version of the

iPod, it may not be compatible with this

product.

For details about iPod compatibility with

this product, refer to the information on our

website.

This manual applies to the following iPod

models.

iPod with 30-pin connector

!iPhone 4s

!iPhone 4

!iPhone 3GS

!iPod touch 4th generation

!iPod touch 3rd generation

!iPod touch 2nd generation

!iPod classic 160GB

!iPod classic 80GB

!iPod nano 6th generation

!iPod nano 5th generation

!iPod nano 4th generation

!iPod nano 3rd generation

iPod with Lightning connector

!iPhone 6 Plus

!iPhone 6

!iPhone 5s

!iPhone 5c

!iPhone 5

!iPod touch 5th generation

!iPod nano 7th generation

Android™device compatibility

pOperation methods may vary depending on

the Android device and the software ver-

sion of the Android OS.

pDepending on the version of the Android

OS, it may not be compatible with this pro-

duct.

pCompatibility with all Android devices is

not guaranteed.

=For details about Android device compat-

ibility with this product, refer to the infor-

mation on our website.

AppRadio Mode Compatibility

iPod with 30-pin connector

!iPhone 4s

!iPhone 4

!iPod touch 4th generation

iPod with Lightning connector

!iPhone 6 Plus

!iPhone 6

!iPhone 5s

!iPhone 5c

!iPhone 5

!iPod touch 5th generation

=For details about Android device compat-

ibility with this product, refer to the infor-

mation on our website.

MirrorLink device

compatibility

pThis product is compatible with MirrorLink

version 1.0.

pCompatibility with all MirrorLink devices is

not guaranteed.

=For details about MirrorLink device com-

patibility with this product, refer to the in-

formation on our website.

En 89

Chapter

iPod / iPhone or smartphone setup operation

Information on the connections and functions for each device

The settings and cables required for connecting each device, and the available sources are as follows.

iPod / iPhone with a 30-pin connector

Required cable (sold separately) Cable connection is

not required. CD-IU201V CD-IU201S

Smartphone Setup

Device iPhone/iPod iPhone/iPod iPhone/iPod

Connection Bluetooth USB USB

Bluetooth connection Bluetooth connec-

tion is required.

——

Connection requirement —

Connect to USB

port 1 for using aha,

Pandora,or

AVICSYNC App.

Connect to USB

port 1 for using aha,

Pandora,AppRadio

Mode,or

AVICSYNC App.

Available source

iPod (audio) —11

iPod (video) —11

aha 111

Pandora 111

AppRadio Mode ——1

AVICSYNC App 111

Chapter

13 iPod / iPhone or smartphone setup operation

iPod / iPhone with a Lightning connector

Required cable (sold separately)

Cable connec-

tion is not re-

quired.

CD-IU52

!CD-IH202

!CD-IU52

!Lightning Di-

gital AV

Adapter

!CD-IV202AV

!CD-IU52

!Lightning to

VGA Adapter

Smartphone

Setup

Device iPhone/iPod iPhone/iPod iPhone/iPod iPhone/iPod

Connection Bluetooth USB Digital AV

adapter VGA adapter

Bluetooth connection

Bluetooth con-

nection is re-

quired.

—

Bluetooth con-

nection is re-

quired.

Bluetooth con-

nection is re-

quired.

Connection requirement —

Connect to USB

port 1 for using

aha,Pandora,

or AVICSYNC

App.

——

Available source

iPod (audio) —1—(*1) —(*1)

iPod (video) ———(*1) —(*1)

aha 1111

Pandora 1111

AppRadio

Mode

——11

AVICSYNC App 1111

Remarks ——

!This connec-

tion and set-

tings are

available on

AVIC-

8100NEX,

AVIC-

7100NEX

and AVIC-

6100NEX.

!This connec-

tion and set-

tings are

available on

AVIC-

5100NEX.

(*1) Use AppRadio Mode to play music or videos on an iPod. For using AppRadio Mode, install the

CarMediaPlayer app on your iPod.

=For details about the CarMediaPlayer, refer to the information on our website.

=Refer to the CarMediaPlayer manual for more information.

En 91

Chapter

iPod / iPhone or smartphone setup operation

Android, MirrorLink

Required cable (sold separately) Cable connection is

not required. CD-MU200 CD-AH200

Smartphone Setup

Device Others Others Others

Connection Bluetooth USB HDMI

Mode —Android Auto (*1)/

MirrorLink/Off

—

Bluetooth connection Bluetooth connec-

tion is required.

Bluetooth connec-

tion is required for

using aha,Pandora,

or Android Auto.

Bluetooth connec-

tion is required.

Connection requirement —

Connect to USB port

2 for using

MirrorLink,

Android Auto or

AVICSYNC App.

—

Available source

aha 1(*2) 11(*2)

Pandora 1(*2) 11(*2)

AppRadio Mode ——1

MirrorLink —1(*2) —

Android Auto —1(*1) (*2) —

AVICSYNC App 1(*3) 1(*3) 1(*3)

Remarks —

!Select “Android

Auto”for

“Mode”for

using Android

Auto.

!Select

“MirrorLink”for

“Mode”for

using

MirrorLink

mode.

!This connection

and settings are

available on

AVIC-8100NEX,

AVIC-7100NEX

and AVIC-

6100NEX.

(*1) For AVIC-8100NEX and AVIC-7100NEX users

Available only when an Android Auto-compatible device is connected. The AVICSYNC App function automatically

turns off when an Android Auto-compatible device is connected with this product for the first time. From the next

time a compatible device is connected, Android Auto cannot be used while the AVICSYNC App function is on.

(*2) Not available when the AVICSYNC App function is turned on.

(*3) Turn on the AVICSYNC App function for using AVICSYNC App.

Chapter

13 iPod / iPhone or smartphone setup operation

5100NEX

You can listen to the radio using this product.

This section describes operations for the

radio.

Using the touch panel keys

21 4

1Displays the source list.

=For details, refer to Selecting a front

source on the source list on page 25.

2Selects a band.

=For details, refer to Selecting a band on

page 94.

3Displays the Time and date setting

screen.

=For details, refer to Setting the time and

date on page 221.

4Displays the Setting menu screen.

5Recalls equalizer curves.

=For details, refer to Using the equalizer

on page 202.

6Stores song information to an iPod.

=For details, refer to Storing song informa-

tion to an iPod (iTunes Tagging) on page

221.

7Displays the Phone menu screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the phone

menu on page 80.

8Performs manual tuning or seek tuning.

=For details, refer to Manual tuning on

page 94.

=For details, refer to Seek tuning on page

94.

9Displays the preset channels.

=For details, refer to Selecting a preset

channel from the preset channel list on

page 95.

aRecalls the preset channel stored to a key

from memory with a single touch of the

key.

Stores the current broadcast frequency to

a key for later recall by continuing to

touch the key.

=For details, refer to Storing broadcast fre-

quencies on page 95.

Reading the screen

786

1Band indicator

Shows the tuned band: FM1, FM2, FM3 or AM.

2Current time and date

3Program service name indicator

Shows the program service name (station

name) of the current station.

4Song title

Shows the title of the current song (when

available).

5Artist name

Shows the artist name for the current song

(when available).

6iTunes®tagging song status indicator

Shows the status of the song information

stored in this product.

pThe icon is displayed on all operation

screens of AV sources.

En 93

Chapter

Using the radio

Indicator Meaning

Appears when the song information

tag is stored in this product.

Appears when the song information

tag is being transferred to an iPod.

7iTunes®tagging indicator

Indicates songs that are capable of iTunes tag-

ging.

pThe icon is displayed on all operation

screens of AV sources.

Indicator Meaning

Appears when this product receives

an iTunes song tag that can be

stored and then downloaded to an

iPod for later purchase.

Flashes when this product is storing

song tag information.

8Frequency indicator

9Preset number indicator

Highlights the selected preset item.

Starting procedure

1 Display the AV source selection screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Dis-

playing the AV operation screen on page 24.

2 Touch [Radio] on the AV source selec-

tion screen.

The “Radio”screen appears.

3 Use the touch panel keys on the screen

to control the radio.

=For details, refer to Using the touch panel

keys on page 93.

Selecting a band

%Touch the following key.

Switches between the following FM

bands: FM1, FM2 and FM3.

Switches to AM band.

pThis function is convenient for preparing

different preset lists for each band.

Manual tuning

%Touch the following keys to tune manu-

ally.

Moves down one step at a time.

Moves up one step at a time.

pThis function is convenient for preparing

different preset lists for each band.

Seek tuning

%Touch and hold one of the following

keys for about one second and then re-

lease.

Scans frequencies until it finds a broad-

cast strong enough for good reception.

You can cancel seek tuning by touching

either key briefly.

If you keep holding either key, you can

skip broadcasting frequencies. Seek

tuning will start when you release the

key.

Chapter

14 Using the radio

Selecting a preset channel

from the preset channel list

Once you have stored broadcast channels,

you can easily recall preset channels from

memory with a single touch of a key.

=For details, refer to Storing broadcast fre-

quencies on page 95.

1 Touch the preset channel list display

key.

1Preset channel list display key

2 Touch the item on the list (“1”to “6”)to

switch to a channel registered as a preset

channel.

pIf you touch the preset channel list display

key while the preset channel list is dis-

played, the list disappears and the preset

tuning keys are displayed.

Storing broadcast frequencies

With a touch of any of the preset tuning keys

(“1”to “6”), you can easily store up to six

broadcast channels for later recall (also with

the touch of a key).

1 Select a frequency that you want to

store in memory.

2 Touch and hold a preset tuning key [1]

to [6].

The selected radio station is stored in memory.

The next time you touch the preset tuning key

“1”to “6”, the broadcast channel is recalled

from memory.

pUp to 18 FM stations, six for each of the

three FM bands, as well as six AM stations,

can be stored in memory.

Storing the strongest

broadcast frequencies

BSM (best stations memory) function automa-

tically stores the six strongest broadcast fre-

quencies under the preset tuning keys “1”to

“6”and, once stored there, you can tune into

them with the touch of a key.

pStoring broadcast frequencies with BSM

may replace broadcast frequencies you

have already saved.

pPreviously stored broadcast frequencies

may remain stored if the number of strong

broadcast frequencies stored has not

reached the limit.

1 Touch the preset channel list display

key.

The preset channel list appears.

2 Touch [BSM] to start a search.

A message appears. While the message is dis-

played, the six strongest broadcast frequen-

cies will be stored under the preset tuning

keys “1”to “6”in order of their signal strength.

When this is complete, the message disap-

pears.

#If you touch [Cancel], the storage process is

canceled.

Tuning into strong frequencies

Local seek tuning allows you to only tune into

those radio stations with sufficiently strong

signals for good reception.

pThis setting is available only when “Radio”

is selected as the source.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “System”screen appears.

En 95

Chapter

Using the radio

3 Touch [AV Source Settings].

The following screen appears.

4 Touch [Radio Settings].

5 Touch [Local].

The pop-up menu appears.

6 Touch the item you want to set.

!Off (default):

Turns the seek tuning setting off.

!Level1:

Sets the level of sensitivity for FM to level 1.

!Level2:

Sets the level of sensitivity for FM to level 2.

!Level3:

Sets the level of sensitivity for FM to level 3.

!Level4:

Sets the level of sensitivity for FM to level 4.

!Off (default):

Turns the seek tuning setting off.

!Level1:

Sets the level of sensitivity for AM to level 1.

!Level2:

Sets the level of sensitivity for AM to level 2.

pThe FM “Level4”(AM “Level2”) setting al-

lows reception of only stations with the

strongest signals, while lower settings

allow reception of those with weaker sig-

nals.

Storing song information

to an iPod (iTunes Tagging)

=For details, refer to Storing song information

to an iPod (iTunes Tagging) on page 221.

Operating with the

hardware buttons

Press the TRK button.

You can move up or down the preset chan-

nels.

Press and hold the TRK button.

You can perform seek tuning.

Chapter

14 Using the radio

8100NEX 7100NEX 6100NEX

HD Radio stations

HD Radio stations offer high quality audio and

data services. HD Radio stations are brought

to you by your local FM or AM stations.

HD Radio stations feature the following:

!High quality audio

!FM multicasting

!Data service

: Sub channel

AM band

Analog AM

Analog AM Digital AM

FM band

Analog FM

Analog FM Digital FM

Analog FM Digital FM-1ch

Digital FM-2ch

Digital FM-3ch

: Main channel

Digital, CD-quality sound. HD Radio Technology enables

local radio stations to broadcast a clean digital signal.

AM sounds like today’s FM and FM sounds like a CD.

Program Service Data: Contributes to the superior user

experience of HD Radio Technology. Presents song

name, artist, station IDs, HD2/HD3 Channel Guide, and

other relevant data streams.

Adjacent to traditional main stations are extra local FM

channels. These HD2/HD3 Channels provide new, origi-

nal music as well as deep cuts into traditional genre.

iTunes®Tagging provides you the opportunity to discover

a wide range of content and the means to “tag”that con-

tent for later review and purchase from the iTunes®

Store.

Visual information related to content being played on

your HD Radio receiver, such as Album Art, historical

photographs, still art from live broadcasts, among other

related content.

Using the touch panel keys

12 43

a98

1Displays the source list.

=For details, refer to Selecting a front

source on the source list on page 25.

2Selects a band.

=For details, refer to Selecting a band on

page 99.

3Displays the Time and date setting

screen.

=For details, refer to Setting the time and

date on page 221.

4Displays the Setting menu screen.

5Recalls equalizer curves.

=For details, refer to Using the equalizer

on page 202.

6Switches the text display between the

main channel and multicast channels.

=For details, refer to Reading the screen

on page 98.

7Displays the Phone menu screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the phone

menu on page 80.

8Stores song information to an iPod.

En 97

Chapter

HD Radio™reception

=For details, refer to Storing song informa-

tion to an iPod (iTunes Tagging) on page

221.

9Performs manual tuning or seek tuning.

=For details, refer to Manual tuning on

page 99.

=For details, refer to Seek tuning on page

99.

aDisplays the preset channels.

=For details, refer to Selecting a preset

channel from the preset channel list on

page 100.

bRecalls the preset channel stored to a key

from memory with a single touch of the

key.

Stores the current broadcast frequency to

a key for later recall by continuing to

touch the key.

=For details, refer to Storing broadcast fre-

quencies on page 100.

Reading the screen

a 9 56

1Band indicator

Shows the tuned band: FM1, FM2, FM3 or AM.

2Detailed information

Main channel

!Call sign, program service or fre-

quency

Shows the call sign, the program ser-

vice or the frequency of the broadcast

station currently being received.

!Song title

Shows the title of the current song

(when available).

!Artist (performer) name

Shows the artist (performer) name for

the song currently playing (when avail-

able).

Multicast channels

!Multicast channel number and song

title

Shows the numbers of multicast chan-

nels and the song titles.

pThe information is not displayed if

there is no corresponding informa-

tion.

pThe currently tuned multicast chan-

nel is displayed at the top of the list.

3Current time and date

4Album artwork

Shows the artwork for the current song (when

available).

pIf the album artwork cannot be ac-

quired, the station logo is displayed. If

the station logo cannot be acquired

either, a preinstalled image is displayed.

5iTunes®tagging song status indicator

Shows the status of the song information

stored in this product.

pThe icon is displayed on all operation

screens of AV sources.

Indicator Meaning

Appears when the song information

tag is stored in this product.

Appears when the song information

tag is being transferred to an iPod.

6iTunes®tagging indicator

Indicates songs that are capable of iTunes tag-

ging.

pThe icon is displayed on all operation

screens of AV sources.

Indicator Meaning

Appears when this product receives

an iTunes song tag that can be

stored and then downloaded to an

iPod for later purchase.

Flashes when this product is storing

song tag information.

Chapter

15 HD Radio™reception

7Signal type indicator

Shows the type of signal currently being re-

ceived. If a digital broadcast is being received,

appears. Otherwise,

appears.

8HD Radio indicator

Shows that HD Radio station information is

being received.

9Multicasting indicator

Shows the number of multicast channels in

the current frequency.

aFrequency indicator

bPreset number indicator

Shows the selected preset item.

Starting procedure

1 Display the AV source selection screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Dis-

playing the AV operation screen on page 24.

2 Touch [HD Radio] on the AV source se-

lection screen.

The “HD Radio”screen appears.

3 Use the touch panel keys on the screen

to control the radio.

=For details, refer to Using the touch panel

keys on page 97.

Selecting a band

%Touch the following key.

Switches between the following FM

bands: FM1, FM2 and FM3.

Switches to AM band.

pThis function is convenient for preparing

different preset lists for each band.

Manual tuning

%Touch the following keys to tune manu-

ally.

Moves down one step at a time.

Moves up one step at a time.

pThis function is convenient for preparing

different preset lists for each band.

Seek tuning

%Touch and hold one of the following

keys for about one second and then re-

lease.

Scans frequencies until it finds a broad-

cast strong enough for good reception.

You can cancel seek tuning by touching

either key briefly.

If you keep holding either key, you can

skip broadcasting frequencies. Seek

tuning will start when you release the

key.

pWhen an analog station is being received,

only analog broadcasts can be tuned up or

down.

If a digital broadcast is not being received

yet, tuning up or down seeks the next or

previous analog station.

Analog FM

Analog FM Digital FM-1ch

Digital FM-2ch

Digital FM-3ch

En 99

Chapter

HD Radio™reception

Selecting a preset channel

from the preset channel list

Once you have stored broadcast channels,

you can easily recall preset channels from

memory with a single touch of a key.

=For details, refer to Storing broadcast fre-

quencies on page 100.

1 Touch the preset channel list display

key.

1Preset channel list display key

2 Touch the item on the list (“1”to “6”)to

switch to a channel registered as a preset

channel.

pIf you touch the preset channel list display

key while the preset channel list is dis-

played, the list disappears and the preset

tuning keys are displayed.

Storing broadcast frequencies

With a touch of any of the preset tuning keys

(“1”to “6”), you can easily store up to six

broadcast channels for later recall (also with

the touch of a key).

1 Select a frequency that you want to

store in memory.

2 Touch and hold a preset tuning key [1]

to [6].

The selected radio station is stored in memory.

The next time you touch the same preset tun-

ing key “1”to “6”, the service component is re-

called from memory.

pUp to 18 FM stations, six for each of the

three FM bands, as well as six AM stations,

can be stored in memory.

Storing the strongest

broadcast frequencies

The BSM (best stations memory) function

automatically stores the six strongest broad-

cast frequencies under the preset tuning keys

“1”to “6”and, once stored there, you can tune

into them with the touch of a key.

pStoring broadcast frequencies with BSM

may replace broadcast frequencies you

have already saved.

pPreviously stored broadcast frequencies

may remain stored if the number of strong

broadcast frequencies stored has not

reached the limit.

1 Touch the preset channel list display

key.

The preset channel list appears.

2 Touch [BSM] to start a search.

A message appears. While the message is dis-

played, the six strongest broadcast frequen-

cies will be stored under the preset tuning

keys “1”to “6”in the order of their signal

strength. When this is complete, the message

will disappear.

#If you touch [Cancel], the storage process is

canceled.

Tuning into strong frequencies

Local seek tuning allows you to only tune into

those radio stations with sufficiently strong

signals for good reception.

pThis setting is available only when

“HD Radio”is selected as the source.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

100

Chapter

15 HD Radio™reception

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “System”screen appears.

3 Touch [AV Source Settings].

The following screen appears.

4 Touch [Radio Settings].

The following screen appears.

5 Touch [Local].

The pop-up menu appears.

6 Touch the item you want to set.

!Off (default):

Turns the seek tuning setting off.

!Level1:

Sets the level of sensitivity for FM to level 1.

!Level2:

Sets the level of sensitivity for FM to level 2.

!Level3:

Sets the level of sensitivity for FM to level 3.

!Level4:

Sets the level of sensitivity for FM to level 4.

!Off (default):

Turns the seek tuning setting off.

!Level1:

Sets the level of sensitivity for AM to level 1.

!Level2:

Sets the level of sensitivity for AM to level 2.

pThe FM “Level4”(AM “Level2”) setting al-

lows reception of only stations with the

strongest signals, while lower settings

allow reception of those with weaker sig-

nals.

Switching the seek mode

You can select the method of seek tuning.

pThis setting is available only when

“HD Radio”is selected as the source.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “System”screen appears.

3 Touch [AV Source Settings].

The following screen appears.

4 Touch [Radio Settings].

The following screen appears.

En 101

Chapter

HD Radio™reception

5 Touch [Seek] repeatedly until the de-

sired setting appears.

!Seek All (default):

Seeks stations from both analog and digital

broadcasting.

!Seek HD:

Only seeks stations from digital broad-

casting.

Switching the reception mode

If reception of a digital broadcast becomes

weak, the tuner automatically switches to the

analog broadcast of the same frequency level

by default. If you want to avoid frequent auto-

matic switching, change this setting to “Off”.

pThis setting is available only when

“HD Radio”is selected as the source.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “System”screen appears.

3 Touch [AV Source Settings].

The following screen appears.

4 Touch [Radio Settings].

The following screen appears.

5 Touch [Blending] repeatedly until the

desired setting appears.

!On (default):

Switches to the analog broadcast of the

same frequency automatically.

!Off:

Does not switch to the analog broadcast of

the same frequency automatically.

Storing song information

to an iPod (iTunes Tagging)

=For details, refer to Storing song information

to an iPod (iTunes Tagging) on page 221.

Operating with the

hardware buttons

Press the TRK button.

You can move up or down the preset chan-

nels.

Press and hold the TRK button.

You can perform seek tuning.

102

Chapter

15 HD Radio™reception

You can play a normal music CD, Video-CD or

DVD-Video using the built-in drive of this pro-

duct. This section describes these operations.

CAUTION

For safety reasons, video images cannot be

viewed while your vehicle is in motion. To view

video images, you must stop in a safe place and

apply the parking brake.

Using the touch panel keys

(for audio)

Example: CD

Playback screen (page 1)

132

b a 898

Playback screen (page 2)

7cde

Using the touch panel keys

(for video)

Example: DVD

Playback screen (page 1)

132

8k j8i

Playback screen (page 2)

nopeqr

1Displays the source list.

=For details, refer to Selecting a front

source on the source list on page 25.

2Displays the Time and date setting

screen.

=For details, refer to Setting the time and

date on page 221.

3Displays the Setting menu screen.

4Recalls equalizer curves.

=For details, refer to Using the equalizer

on page 202.

5Selects a track from the list.

=For details, refer to Selecting files from

the file name list on page 106.

6Displays the Phone menu screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the phone

menu on page 80.

7Switches to the next or previous page of

touch panel keys.

8Skips files forward or backward.

En 103

Chapter

Playing a disc

9Changes the playback point by dragging

the key.

=For details, refer to Operating the time

bar on page 27.

aSwitches the media file type.

=For details, refer to Switching the media

file type on page 107.

bSwitches between playback and pause.

cUses “Sound Retriever”function.

=For details, refer to Setting the “Sound

Retriever”function on page 222.

dPlays files in random order.

=For details, refer to Playing tracks in ran-

dom order on page 106.

eSets a repeat play range.

=For details, refer to Setting a repeat play

range on page 106.

fSearches for the part you want to play.

=For details, refer to Searching for the part

you want to play on page 107.

gHides the touch panel keys.

Touching this area hides the touch panel keys.

pTouch anywhere on the LCD screen to

display the touch panel keys again.

hDisplays the DVD menu.

=For details, refer to Operating the DVD

menu on page 107.

iSwitches the subtitle language.

=For details, refer to Switching the subtitle

language on page 108.

jSwitches the audio language.

=For details, refer to Switching the audio

language on page 108.

kStops playback.

lChanges the wide screen mode.

=For details, refer to Changing the wide

screen mode on page 223.

mMoves ahead one frame (frame-by-frame

playback) or slows down playback speed

(slow-motion playback).

=For details, refer to Frame-by-frame play-

back on page 108.

=For details, refer to Slow motion playback

on page 108.

nPerforms an operation (such as resuming)

that is stored on the disc.

=For details, refer to Returning to a speci-

fied scene on page 108.

oResumes playback (Bookmark).

=For details, refer to Resuming playback

(Bookmark) on page 109.

pDisplays the DVD menu keypad.

=For details, refer to Operating the DVD

menu using touch panel keys on page

109.

qChanges the viewing angle (Multi-angle).

=For details, refer to Switching the multi-

angle DVD display on page 109.

rSelects the audio output.

=For details, refer to Selecting the audio

output on page 109.

104

Chapter

16 Playing a disc

Reading the screen (for audio)

Example: CD

Reading the screen (for video)

Example: DVD

Example: Video-CD

1Current time and date

2Playback condition indicator

Indicates the current playback condition.

Playing tracks in random order

Indicator Meaning

Does not play tracks in random

order.

Plays all tracks in the current disc in

random order.

Setting a repeat play range

Indicator Meaning

Repeats just the current track.

Repeats the current disc.

Repeats just the current chapter.

Repeats just the current title.

3Play time indicator

Shows the elapsed playing time within the

current file.

4Track number indicator

Shows the number of the track currently play-

ing (when available).

5Audio channel indicator

Shows the current audio channel type, such

as “Mch”(Multi-channel).

6Digital sound format indicator

Shows which digital sound format (surround

sound format) has been selected.

7Sampling frequency indicator

Shows the sampling frequency currently play-

ing.

8Title number indicator

Shows the title number currently playing.

9Chapter number indicator

Shows the chapter number currently playing.

aPBC ON indicator

Indicates that a disc with PBC On is being

played.

En 105

Chapter

Playing a disc

Starting procedure

1 Display the AV source selection screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Dis-

playing the AV operation screen on page 24.

2 Insert the disc you want to play into

the disc-loading slot.

The source changes and then playback will

start.

=For details, refer to Inserting and ejecting a

disc on page 17.

pIf the disc is already set, touch [Disc] on the

source list or on the AV source selection

screen.

=For details, refer to Selecting a front

source on the source list on page 25.

=For details, refer to Selecting a front

source on the AV source selection screen

on page 25.

3 Use the touch panel keys on the screen

to control the disc.

=For details, refer to Using the touch panel

keys (for audio) on page 103.

=For details, refer to Using the touch panel

keys (for video) on page 103.

Selecting files from the file

name list

You can select tracks to play back using the

track title list which is a list of the tracks re-

corded on a disc.

1 Touch the following key.

Displays a list of the tracks re-

corded on the disc.

2 Touch a track on the list to play back.

Playing tracks in random order

All tracks on the disc can be played at random

by only touching a single key.

%Touch the following key repeatedly

until the desired setting appears.

Turns random play on or off.

!(default):

Does not play tracks in random order.

Plays all tracks in the current repeat play

range in random order.

pIf you turn random play on when the re-

peat play range is set to the current

track, the repeat play range changes to

the whole of the current disc auto-

matically.

Setting a repeat play range

The repeat play range can be changed by only

touching a single key.

%Touch the following key repeatedly

until the desired setting appears.

Changes the repeat play range.

Audio

!(default):

Repeats the current disc.

Repeats just the current track.

pIf you turn random play on when the repeat

play range is set to the current track, the re-

peat play range changes to the whole of the

current disc automatically.

pIf you change the repeat play range from

the whole of the current disc to the current

track when random play is turned on, the

random play turns off automatically.

Video

!(default):

106

Chapter

16 Playing a disc

Repeats all files.

Repeats just the current chapter.

Repeats just the current title.

Switching the media file type

When playing a digital media containing a

mixture of various media file types, you can

switch between media file types to play.

1 Touch the following key.

Displays the pop-up menu for selecting

a media file type to play on the disc.

2 Touch the item you want to set.

!Music:

Switches the media file type to music (com-

pressed audio).

!Video:

Switches the media file type to video.

!CD-DA:

Switches the media file type to CD (audio

data (CD-DA)).

Searching for the part you

want to play

You can use the search function to find the

part you want to play.

pFor DVD-Videos, you can select Title (title),

Chapter (chapter) or 10Key (numeric key-

pad).

pFor Video-CDs, you can select Track (track)

or 10Key (numeric keypad).

10Key (numeric keypad) is available for

Video-CDs featuring PBC (playback con-

trol) only.

pChapter search and time search are not

available when disc playback has been

stopped.

1 Touch the following key.

Displays the screen for direct num-

ber search.

2 Touch [Title] (title), [Chapter] (chapter),

[10Key] (numeric keypad), or [Track]

(track).

3 Touch [0] to [9] to input the desired

number.

pTo cancel an input number, touch [C]. To

cancel the input numbers, touch and hold

[C].

4 Touch the following key.

Registers the numbers and starts

playback.

Operating the DVD menu

You can operate the DVD menu by touching

the menu item on the screen directly.

pThis function may not work properly with

some DVD disc content. In that case, use

touch panel keys to operate the DVD menu.

1 Touch the screen to display the touch

panel keys.

2 Touch the following key.

Displays the touch panel keys to oper-

ate the DVD menu.

3 Touch the desired menu item.

En 107

Chapter

Playing a disc

Switching the subtitle

language

You can switch the subtitle language while a

disc is playing when the disc has multilingual

data (multi-subtitle).

%Touch the following key repeatedly

until the desired setting appears.

Changes the subtitle language.

You can specify the desired lan-

guage as the default subtitle lan-

guage.

=For details, refer to Setting the

top-priority languages on page

213.

Switching the audio language

You can switch the audio language while a

disc is playing when the disc has multilingual

data (multi-audio).

%Touch the following key repeatedly

until the desired setting appears.

Changes the audio language.

You can specify the desired lan-

guage as the default audio lan-

guage.

=For details, refer to Setting the

top-priority languages on page

213.

Frame-by-frame playback

This lets you move ahead one frame at a time

during pause.

%Touch [r] during pause.

The video advances one frame each time [r]

is touched.

pTo return to normal playback, touch [d/e].

pWith some discs, images may be unclear

during frame-by-frame playback.

Slow motion playback

This lets you slow down the playback speed.

1 Touch and hold [r] until an arrow icon

is displayed during playback.

The arrow icon is displayed, and forward slow

motion playback starts.

pTo return to normal playback, touch [d/e].

2 Touch [r] to adjust playback speed

during slow motion playback.

Each time you touch [r], the speed changes

in four steps in the following order:

1/16 d1/8 d1/4 d1/2

pThere is no sound during slow motion play-

back.

pWith some discs, images may be unclear

during slow motion playback.

pReversed slow motion playback is not possi-

ble.

Returning to a specified scene

When using a disc that has a point recorded

that indicates where to return to, the disc re-

turns to the specified point and starts play-

back from there.

This function cannot be used if a specified

scene has not been preprogrammed on the

disc.

pThis function is available for DVD-Video

and Video-CDs featuring PBC (playback

control) only.

%Touch the following key.

Returns to the specified point and

starts playback from there.

pThe specified point differs depending on

the disc.

108

Chapter

16 Playing a disc

Resuming playback

(Bookmark)

The Bookmark function lets you resume play-

back from a selected scene the next time the

disc is loaded.

%Touch the following key.

Bookmarks one point for each of

up to five discs.

pIf you try to memorize another point for the

same disc, the older bookmark will be over-

written by the new one.

pTo clear the bookmark on a disc, touch and

hold this key.

pThe oldest bookmark is replaced by the new

one.

Operating the DVD menu

using touch panel keys

If items on the DVD menu appear, the touch

panel keys may overlay them. If so, select an

item using those touch panel keys.

1 Touch the following keys to select the

desired menu item.

Selects the left menu item.

Selects the right menu item.

Selects the upper menu item.

Selects the lower menu item.

pIf the touch panel keys for DVD menu selec-

tion disappear, touch anywhere on the

screen, and then touch . The touch

panel keys are displayed again.

2 Touch the following key.

Confirms the selected item.

pThe way to display the menu differs depend-

ing on the disc.

#If you touch , the touch panel keys disap-

pear and the icon is displayed.

Switching the multi-angle

DVD display

With DVDs featuring multi-angle recordings

(scenes shot from multiple angles), you can

switch among viewing angles during play-

back.

%Touch the following key repeatedly

until the desired setting appears.

Switches between viewing angles.

During the playback of a scene

shot from multiple angles, the

angle icon is displayed.

Turn the angle icon display on or

off using the “DVD/DivX Setup”

menu.

=For details, refer to Setting the

angle icon display on page 214.

Selecting the audio output

When playing DVDs recorded with LPCM

audio, you can switch the audio output.

%Touch the following key repeatedly

until the desired setting appears.

Changes the audio output setting.

!L+R: Left and right

!Left: Left

!Right: Right

En 109

Chapter

Playing a disc

!Mix: Mixing left and right

pThis function is not available when disc

playback has been stopped.

pThe appearance of this key changes accord-

ing to the current setting.

Operating with the

hardware buttons

Press the TRK button.

You can skip tracks or chapters forward or

backward.

Press and hold the TRK button.

You can perform fast reverse or fast for-

ward.

110

Chapter

16 Playing a disc

You can play compressed audio files stored in

a disc or an external storage device (USB, SD)

using the built-in drive of this product. This

section describes how.

=For details, refer to Media compatibility

chart on page 245.

Using the touch panel keys

Example: USB

Playback screen (page 1)

1243

d c aba

Playback screen (page 2)

hij

1Displays the source list.

=For details, refer to Selecting a front

source on the source list on page 25.

2Displays the MIXTRAX screen.

=For details, refer to Chapter 31.

3Displays the Time and date setting

screen.

=For details, refer to Setting the time and

date on page 221.

4Displays the Setting menu screen.

5Recalls equalizer curves.

=For details, refer to Using the equalizer

on page 202.

6Selects a file from the list.

=For details, refer to Selecting files from

the file name list on page 114.

Displays a list related to the song cur-

rently playing (link search).

=For details, refer to Selecting a file from

the list related to the song currently play-

ing (link search) on page 114.

7Switches the text display between tag in-

formation and file/folder information.

=For details, refer to Reading the screen

on page 112.

=For details, refer to Switching the browse

mode on page 113.

8Displays the Phone menu screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the phone

menu on page 80.

9Switches to the next or previous page of

touch panel keys.

aSkips files forward or backward.

bChanges the playback point by dragging

the key.

=For details, refer to Operating the time

bar on page 27.

cSwitches the media file type.

=For details, refer to Switching the media

file type on page 115.

dSwitches between playback and pause.

eDisplays the album list.

pThis function is available only when

playing files in an external storage de-

vice (USB, SD) in the Music Browse

mode.

fUses “Sound Retriever”function.

=For details, refer to Setting the “Sound

Retriever”function on page 222.

gPlays files in random order.

=For details, refer to Playing files in ran-

dom order on page 114.

hSets a repeat play range.

=For details, refer to Setting a repeat play

range on page 115.

iSelects the previous folder or the next

folder.

jDisplays the category list including the

selected item.

En 111

Chapter

Playing compressed audio files

pThis function is available only when

playing files in an external storage de-

vice (USB, SD) in the Music Browse

mode.

Reading the screen

Example: USB

1Current file information

Music Browse mode

!Song title/File name

Shows the title of the song currently

playing (when available). If the title of a

song is not available, the file name ap-

pears.

!:Artist name

Shows the artist name for the song cur-

rently playing (when available). “No

Name”is displayed if there is no corre-

sponding information.

!:Album title/Folder name

Shows the title of the album of the cur-

rent file (when available). If the title of

the album is not available, the folder

name appears.

!:Genre

Shows the genre of the current file

(when available). “No Genre”is dis-

played if there is no corresponding infor-

mation.

pNothing is displayed if the song cur-

rently playing is in a format which does

not support these functions.

Folder Browse mode

!:File name

Shows the name of the file currently

playing.

!:Folder name

Shows the name of the folder contain-

ing the file currently playing.

2Current time and date

3Album artwork

Album art of the current song is displayed if it

is available.

4Playback condition indicator

Indicates the current playback condition.

Playing files in random order

Indicator Meaning

Does not play files in random order.

Plays all files within the repeat range

in random order.

Setting a repeat play range (for Disc)

Indicator Meaning

Repeats just the current file.

Repeats just the current folder.

Repeats all compressed audio files.

Setting a repeat play range (for Music

Browse mode)

Indicator Meaning

Repeats just the current file.

Repeats all compressed audio files.

112

Chapter

17 Playing compressed audio files

Setting a repeat play range (for Folder

Browse mode)

Indicator Meaning

Repeats just the current file.

Repeats just the current folder.

Repeats all compressed audio files.

5Play time indicator

Shows the elapsed playing time within the

current file.

Starting procedure (for Disc)

1 Display the AV source selection screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Dis-

playing the AV operation screen on page 24.

2 Insert the disc you want to play into

the disc-loading slot.

The source changes and then playback will

start.

=For details, refer to Inserting and ejecting a

disc on page 17.

pIf the disc is already set, touch [Disc] on the

source list or on the AV source selection

screen.

=For details, refer to Selecting a front

source on the source list on page 25.

=For details, refer to Selecting a front

source on the AV source selection screen

on page 25.

3 Use the touch panel keys on the screen

to control the disc.

=For details, refer to Using the touch panel

keys on page 111.

Starting procedure (for

USB/SD)

1 Display the AV source selection screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Dis-

playing the AV operation screen on page 24.

2 Insert the SD memory card into the SD

card slot or plug the USB storage device

into the USB connector.

=For details, refer to Plugging in a USB sto-

rage device on page 19.

=For details, refer to Inserting and ejecting an

SD memory card on page 18.

3 Touch [USB] or [SD] on the AV source

selection screen.

The source changes and then playback will

start.

4 Use the touch panel keys on the screen

to control the external storage device

(USB, SD).

=For details, refer to Using the touch panel

keys on page 111.

pPlayback is performed in order of folder

numbers. Folders are skipped if they con-

tain no playable files. If there are no play-

able files in folder 01 (root folder), playback

starts from folder 02.

Switching the browse mode

This product supports two types of browse

modes: Folder Browse mode and Music

Browse mode.

pThe browse modes are available only for

the external storage device (USB, SD).

Music Browse mode

Displays a song title, artist name, album title

and genre in the current file information dis-

play area on the AV operation screen. Select

when you want to play music files narrowed

down by a category of song title, artist name,

album title or genre.

En 113

Chapter

Playing compressed audio files

If connecting an external storage device (USB,

SD), this product accesses the database of

music files with tag information and switches

to the Music Browse mode automatically.

Folder Browse mode

Displays a folder name and file name in the

current file information display area on the AV

operation screen. Select when you want to

search for folders or music files on the list

screen.

pYou can switch between the browse modes

for file search by touching the tabs and se-

lecting a file on the list screen.

%Touch the following key repeatedly

until the desired setting appears.

Switches the display information

between the tag information (title,

artist name, album title etc.) and

the file/folder name information.

Selecting files from the file

name list

You can find files to play back using the list of

the files and folders stored on a disc or in an

external storage device (USB, SD).

1 Touch the following key.

Displays the list of the files or

folders stored on a disc or in the

external storage device (USB, SD).

pTouch the “File”tab to display the file/folder

list for an external storage device (USB,

SD).

2 Touch a file on the list to play back.

pFiles are played back in file number order.

pTouching a folder on the list shows its con-

tents. You can play a file on the list by

touching it.

Selecting a file from the list

related to the song currently

playing (link search)

You can select files to play back using the ca-

tegory list for the files in an external storage

device (USB, SD).

pThis function is available for the external

storage device (USB, SD) only.

1 Touch the following key.

Displays the list of the files or

folders stored in the external sto-

rage device (USB, SD).

pIf the “File”list is displayed, touch the “Tag”

tab to display the category list.

2 Touch the desired category to display

the file list.

The list screen appears.

3 Touch the item that you want to refine.

Refine the item until the desired song title or

file name is displayed on the list.

pTouching [All] on the list includes all op-

tions in the current list. For example, if you

touch [All] after touching [Artists], you can

proceed to the next screen with all artists in

the list selected.

pAfter you select “Artists”,“Albums”or

“Genres”, touch one of the lists to start

playing the first song in the selected list or

display the next options.

4 Touch the desired song title or file

name to play back.

Playing files in random order

All files on the disc or in the external storage

device (USB, SD) can be played at random by

only touching a single key.

114

Chapter

17 Playing compressed audio files

%Touch the following key repeatedly

until the desired setting appears.

Turns random play on or off.

!(default):

Does not play files in random order.

Plays all audio files in the current repeat

play range in random order.

pIf you turn random play on when the re-

peat play range is set to the current file

in the Music Browse mode, the repeat

play range changes to the current folder

in the current disc or external storage

device (USB, SD) automatically.

pIf you turn random play on when the re-

peat play range is set to the current file

in the Folder Browse mode, the repeat

play range changes to the whole of the

current disc or external storage device

(USB, SD) automatically.

Setting a repeat play range

The repeat play range can be changed by only

touching a single key.

%Touch the following key repeatedly

until the desired setting appears.

Changes the repeat play range.

Disc

!(default):

Repeats all compressed audio files.

Repeats just the current file.

Repeats just the current folder.

Music Browse mode

!(default):

Repeats all files.

Repeats just the current file.

Folder Browse mode

!(default):

Repeats all files.

Repeats the current folder.

Repeats just the current file.

Switching the media file type

When playing a digital media containing a

mixture of various media file types, you can

switch between media file types to play.

1 Touch the following key.

Displays the pop-up menu for selecting

a media file type to play on the disc or

in the external storage device (USB,

SD).

2 Touch the item you want to set.

!Music:

Switches the media file type to music (com-

pressed audio).

!Video:

Switches the media file type to video.

!CD-DA:

Switches the media file type to CD (audio

data (CD-DA)).

!Photo:

Switches the media file type to still image

(JPEG data).

Operating with the

hardware buttons

Press the TRK button.

You can skip files forward or backward.

Press and hold the TRK button.

You can perform fast reverse or fast for-

ward.

En 115

Chapter

Playing compressed audio files

You can play compressed video files stored on

a disc or in an external storage device (USB,

SD) using the built-in drive of this product.

This section describes how.

=For details, refer to Media compatibility

chart on page 245.

CAUTION

For safety reasons, video images cannot be

viewed while your vehicle is in motion. To view

video images, you must stop in a safe place and

apply the parking brake.

Using the touch panel keys

Example: Disc

132

a bda

1Displays the source list.

=For details, refer to Selecting a front

source on the source list on page 25.

2Displays the Time and date setting

screen.

=For details, refer to Setting the time and

date on page 221.

3Displays the Setting menu screen.

4Recalls equalizer curves.

=For details, refer to Using the equalizer

on page 202.

5Selects a file from the list.

=For details, refer to Selecting files from

the file name list on page 117.

6Hides the touch panel keys.

Touching this area hides the touch panel keys.

pTouch anywhere on the LCD screen to

display the touch panel keys again.

7Sets a repeat play range.

=For details, refer to Setting a repeat play

range on page 118.

8Switches the subtitle language.

With DivX featuring multi-subtitle recordings,

you can switch between subtitle languages

during playback.

9Displays the Phone menu screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the phone

menu on page 80.

aSkips files forward or backward.

bSwitches the audio language.

With DivX files that provide audio playback in

different languages and different audio sys-

tems (Dolby Digital, DTS, etc.), you can switch

between languages or audio systems during

playback.

cChanges the playback point by dragging

the key.

=For details, refer to Operating the time

bar on page 27.

dMoves ahead one frame (frame-by-frame

playback) or slows down playback speed

(slow-motion playback).

=For details, refer to Frame-by-frame play-

back on page 118.

=For details, refer to Slow motion playback

on page 118.

eSwitches the media file type.

=For details, refer to Switching the media

file type on page 118.

fSwitches between playback and pause.

gChanges the wide screen mode.

=For details, refer to Changing the wide

screen mode on page 223.

hStops playback.

116

Chapter

18 Playing compressed video files

Reading the screen

Example: Disc

1Current time and date

2Play time indicator

Shows the elapsed playing time within the

current file.

3Current file information

!:File name

Shows the name of the file currently

playing.

!:Folder name

Shows the name of the folder contain-

ing the file currently playing.

Starting procedure (for Disc)

1 Display the AV source selection screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Dis-

playing the AV operation screen on page 24.

2 Insert the disc you want to play into

the disc-loading slot.

The source changes and then playback will

start.

=For details, refer to Inserting and ejecting a

disc on page 17.

pIf the disc is already set, touch [Disc] on the

source list or on the AV source selection

screen.

=For details, refer to Selecting a front

source on the source list on page 25.

=For details, refer to Selecting a front

source on the AV source selection screen

on page 25.

3 Use the touch panel keys on the screen

to control the disc.

=For details, refer to Using the touch panel

keys on page 116.

Starting procedure (for

USB/SD)

1 Display the AV source selection screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Dis-

playing the AV operation screen on page 24.

2 Insert the SD memory card into the SD

card slot or plug the USB storage device

into the USB connector.

=For details, refer to Plugging in a USB sto-

rage device on page 19.

=For details, refer to Inserting and ejecting an

SD memory card on page 18.

3 Touch [USB] or [SD] on the AV source

selection screen.

The image is displayed on the screen.

4 Use the touch panel keys on the screen

to control the external storage device

(USB, SD).

=For details, refer to Using the touch panel

keys on page 116.

pPlayback is performed in order of folder

numbers. Folders are skipped if they con-

tain no playable files. If there are no play-

able files in folder 01 (root folder), playback

starts from folder 02.

Selecting files from the file

name list

You can select files to view using the file name

list of the files stored on a disc or in the exter-

nal storage device (USB, SD).

1 Touch the following key.

Displays the list of the files or

folders stored on a disc or in the

external storage device (USB, SD).

En 117

Chapter

Playing compressed video files

2 Touch a file on the list to play back.

pFiles are played back in file number order

and folders are skipped if they contain no

files. (If folder 01 (root folder) contains no

files, playback commences with folder 02.)

pTouching a folder on the list shows its con-

tents. You can play a file on the list by

touching it.

#Touch the playback sign of the thumbnail to

preview the file.

Setting a repeat play range

The repeat play range can be changed by only

touching a single key.

%Touch the following key repeatedly

until the desired setting appears.

Changes the repeat play range.

!or (default):

Repeats all files.

Repeats just the current folder.

Repeats just the current file.

Frame-by-frame playback

This lets you move ahead one frame at a time

during pause.

pThis function is available while a com-

pressed video file stored on a disc is being

played.

%Touch [r] during pause.

The video advances one frame each time [r]

is touched.

pTo return to normal playback, touch [d/e].

pWith some discs, images may be unclear

during frame-by-frame playback.

Slow motion playback

This lets you slow down the playback speed.

%Touch [r] (external storage device

(USB, SD)) or touch and hold [r] (disc)

during playback.

The arrow icon is displayed, and forward slow

motion playback starts.

pThere is no sound during slow motion play-

back.

pWith some discs and external storage de-

vices (USB, SD), images may be unclear

during slow motion playback.

pTo return to normal playback, touch [d/e].

pReversed slow motion playback is not possi-

ble.

Switching the media file type

When playing a digital media containing a

mixture of various media file types, you can

switch between media file types to play.

1 Touch the following key.

Displays the pop-up menu for selecting

a media file type to play on the disc or

in the external storage device (USB,

SD).

2 Touch the item you want to set.

!Music:

Switches the media file type to music (com-

pressed audio).

!Video:

Switches the media file type to video.

!Photo:

Switches the media file type to still image

(JPEG data).

!CD-DA:

Switches the media file type to CD (audio

data (CD-DA)).

Operating with the

hardware buttons

Press the TRK button.

You can skip files forward or backward.

Press and hold the TRK button.

You can perform fast reverse or fast for-

ward.

118

Chapter

18 Playing compressed video files

You can view still images (JPEG images)

stored in an external storage device (USB, SD)

using the built-in drive of this product. This

section describes how.

Using the touch panel keys

Example: USB

132

abcd

9 9

1Displays the source list.

=For details, refer to Selecting a front

source on the source list on page 25.

2Displays the Time and date setting

screen.

=For details, refer to Setting the time and

date on page 221.

3Displays the Setting menu screen.

4Recalls equalizer curves.

pThis key is not available while you are

viewing still images stored in an exter-

nal storage device (USB, SD).

5Selects a file from the list.

=For details, refer to Selecting files from

the file name list on page 120.

6Hides the touch panel keys.

Touching this area hides the touch panel keys.

pTouch anywhere on the LCD screen to

display the touch panel keys again.

7Plays files in random order.

=For details, refer to Playing files in ran-

dom order on page 120.

8Displays the Phone menu screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the phone

menu on page 80.

9Skips files forward or backward.

aSets a repeat play range.

=For details, refer to Setting a repeat play

range on page 120.

bRotates the displayed picture 90° clock-

wise.

cSelects the previous folder or the next

folder.

dSwitches the media file type.

=For details, refer to Switching the media

file type on page 120.

eSwitches between playback and pause.

fChanges the wide screen mode.

=For details, refer to Changing the wide

screen mode on page 223.

Reading the screen

Example: USB

1Current time and date

2Current file information

!:File name

Shows the name of the file currently

playing.

!:Folder name

Shows the name of the folder contain-

ing the file currently playing.

Starting procedure

1 Display the AV source selection screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Dis-

playing the AV operation screen on page 24.

2 Insert the SD memory card into the SD

card slot or plug the USB storage device

into the USB connector.

=For details, refer to Plugging in a USB sto-

rage device on page 19.

=For details, refer to Inserting and ejecting an

SD memory card on page 18.

En 119

Chapter

Playing compressed still image files

3 Touch [USB] or [SD] on the AV source

selection screen.

The image is displayed on the screen.

4 Use the touch panel keys on the screen

to control the external storage device

(USB, SD).

=For details, refer to Using the touch panel

keys on page 119.

pPlayback is performed in order of folder

numbers. Folders are skipped if they con-

tain no playable files. If there are no play-

able files in folder 01 (root folder), playback

starts from folder 02.

Selecting files from the file

name list

You can select files to view using the file name

list of the files stored in the external storage

device (USB, SD).

1 Touch the following key.

Displays the list of the files stored

in the external storage device

(USB, SD).

2 Touch a file on the list to play back.

pFiles are played back in file number order

and folders are skipped if they contain no

files. (If folder 01 (root folder) contains no

files, playback commences with folder 02.)

pTouching a folder on the list shows its con-

tents. You can play a file on the list by

touching it.

Playing files in random order

All files in the external storage device (USB,

SD) can be played at random by only touching

a single key.

%Touch the following key repeatedly

until the desired setting appears.

Turns random play on or off.

!(default):

Does not play files in random order.

Plays all files in the current repeat play

range in random order.

Setting a repeat play range

The repeat play range can be changed by only

touching a single key.

%Touch the following key repeatedly

until the desired setting appears.

Changes the repeat play range.

!(default):

Repeats all files.

Repeats the current folder.

Switching the media file type

When playing a digital media containing a

mixture of various media file types, you can

switch between media file types to play.

1 Touch the following key.

Displays the pop-up menu for selecting

a media file type to play in the external

storage device (USB, SD).

2 Touch the item you want to set.

!Music:

Switches the media file type to music (com-

pressed audio).

!Video:

Switches the media file type to video.

!Photo:

Switches the media file type to still image

(JPEG data).

Setting the slideshow interval

JPEG files can be viewed as a slideshow on

this product. In this setting, the interval be-

tween each image can be set.

120

Chapter

19 Playing compressed still image files

pThis setting is available during playback of

the JPEG files.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “Video Setup”screen appears.

3 Touch [Time Per Photo Slide].

The pop-up menu appears.

4 Touch the item you want to set.

!10sec (default):

JPEG images switch at intervals of 10 sec-

onds.

!5sec:

JPEG images switch at intervals of 5 sec-

onds.

!15sec:

JPEG images switch at intervals of 15 sec-

onds.

!Manual:

JPEG images can be switched manually.

Operating with the

hardware buttons

Press the TRK button.

You can skip files forward or backward.

Press and hold the TRK button.

You can search 10 JPEG files at a time.

pIf the number of files in the folder (from the

file currently being played to the first or last

file) is fewer than 10, the first or last file in

the folder is automatically played.

pIf the file currently being played is the first

or last file in the folder, the search is not

performed.

En 121

Chapter

Playing compressed still image files

For iPod with a 30-pin connector users

pDepending on your iPod, there may not be

any output unless you use a USB interface

cable for iPod / iPhone (CD-IU201S/CD-

IU201V) (sold separately). Be sure to use a

USB interface cable for iPod / iPhone (CD-

IU201S/CD-IU201V) (sold separately) to

connect your iPod.

iPod audio and/or video sources are en-

abled if either of the cables is connected.

=For details of the connections, refer to

the Installation Manual.

For iPod / iPhone with a Lightning con-

nector users

pTo use iPod audio source, you must con-

nect your iPod to this product using a USB

interface cable for iPod / iPhone (CD-IU52)

(sold separately).

However, functions related to iPod video

files and AppRadio Mode are not avail-

able.

piPod audio and/or video sources are not

available when an iPod with a Lightning

connector is connected to this product

with a interface cable (CD-IH202/CD-

IV202AV) (sold separately).

=For details of the connections, refer to

the Installation Manual.

When you want to play audio and/or video

files on your iPod with a Lightning connec-

tor, first install CarMediaPlayer on your

iPod with a Lightning connector and then

launch CarMediaPlayer while in

AppRadio Mode.

For details about the CarMediaPlayer,

refer to the information on our website.

CAUTION

For safety reasons, video images cannot be

viewed while your vehicle is in motion. To view

video images, you must stop in a safe place and

apply the parking brake.

Using the touch panel keys

(for audio)

Playback screen (page 1)

132

b9a9

Playback screen (page 2)

8defg

Using the touch panel keys

(for video)

132

b9a 9

122

Chapter

20 Using an iPod

Using the touch panel keys

(for iTunes Radio)

a 9

dkb

1Displays the source list.

=For details, refer to Selecting a front

source on the source list on page 25.

2Displays the Time and date setting

screen.

=For details, refer to Setting the time and

date on page 221.

3Displays the Setting menu screen.

4Recalls equalizer curves.

=For details, refer to Using the equalizer

on page 202.

5Selects a track from the list.

=For details, refer to Selecting song or

video sources from the playlist screen on

page 126.

6Switches the control mode to “App

Mode”.

=For details, refer to Using this product’s

iPod function from your iPod on page

128.

7Displays the Phone menu screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the phone

menu on page 80.

8Switches to the next or previous page of

touch panel keys.

9Skips files forward or backward.

pAvailability of the skip-forward function

while playing iTunes Radio depends on

the iPod.

pThe skip-back key is not available while

playing iTunes Radio.

aChanges the playback point.

=For details, refer to Operating the time

bar on page 27.

bSwitches between playback and pause.

cDisplays the song list of the album cur-

rently playing.

=For details, refer to Displaying lists re-

lated to the song currently playing (link

search) on page 129.

dUses “Sound Retriever”function.

=For details, refer to Setting the “Sound

Retriever”function on page 222.

ePlays files in random order.

=For details, refer to Setting the shuffle

play on page 125.

fSets a repeat play range.

=For details, refer to Setting a repeat play

range on page 125.

gChanges the audiobook speed.

=For details, refer to Changing the speed

of audiobook playback on page 128.

hDisplays the category list including the

selected item.

iHides the touch panel keys.

Touching this area hides the touch panel keys.

pTouch anywhere on the LCD screen to

display the touch panel keys again.

jChanges the wide screen mode.

=For details, refer to Changing the wide

screen mode on page 223.

kDisplays the pop-up menu for iTunes

Radio.

Reading the screen (for audio)

En 123

Chapter

Using an iPod

Reading the screen (for video)

Reading the screen (for

iTunes Radio)

1Current track information

!Song title

Shows the title of the song currently

being played (when available). “No

Title”is displayed if there is no corre-

sponding information.

!:Artist name

Shows the artist name for the song cur-

rently being played (when available).

“No Name”is displayed if there is no

corresponding information.

!:Album title

Shows the title of the album of the cur-

rent file (when available). “No Title”is

displayed if there is no corresponding

information.

pThis information is not available

while playing iTunes Radio.

!:Genre

Shows the genre of the current file

(when available). “No Genre”is dis-

played if there is no corresponding infor-

mation.

pThis information is not available

while playing iTunes Radio.

!:Station

Shows the station name of the song cur-

rently being played.

pThis information is available while

playing iTunes Radio.

2Current time and date

3Album artwork

Album art of the current song is displayed if it

is available.

4Playback condition indicator

Indicates the current playback condition.

Setting the shuffle play

Indicator Meaning

Plays back songs or videos in

random order within the se-

lected list.

Selects an album randomly, and

then plays back all songs in that

album in order.

Setting a repeat play range

Indicator Meaning

Repeats all songs or videos in

the selected list.

Repeats just the current song or

video.

5Play time indicator

Shows the elapsed playing time within the

current file.

124

Chapter

20 Using an iPod

Starting procedure

When connecting an iPod to this product, you

must select the method for connecting your

device. Settings are required according to the

connected device.

=For details, refer to Chapter 13.

1 Display the AV source selection screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Dis-

playing the AV operation screen on page 24.

2 Connect your iPod.

pIf connecting an iPhone or iPod touch, quit

applications before connecting.

pIf an iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 6, iPhone 5s,

iPhone 5c, iPhone 5, or iPod touch (5th gen-

eration) is connected, the media library

(song information) will be imported from

the connected device and saved to this pro-

duct. Wait until the process completes.

The media library will not be imported if an

updated media library of the connected de-

vice has been imported or the memory of

this product is full.

3 Touch [iPod] on the AV source selection

screen.

4 Use the touch panel keys on the screen

to control your iPod.

=For details, refer to Using the touch panel

keys (for audio) on page 122.

=For details, refer to Using the touch panel

keys (for video) on page 122.

pThe video image of the iPod may have noise

if the rear display outputs the video image.

When noise is produced in the video image

of the iPod, turn off the output setting of the

rear display.

=For details of the operations, refer to Se-

lecting the video for the rear display on

page 224.

Setting the shuffle play

This function shuffles songs, albums or videos

and plays them in random order.

pThis function is not available while playing

iTunes Radio.

%Touch the following key repeatedly

until the desired setting appears.

Turns random play on or off.

Plays back songs or videos in random order

within the selected list.

Selects an album randomly, and then plays

back all songs in that album in order.

pThis icon may not be displayed when an

iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 6, iPhone 5s,

iPhone 5c, iPhone 5, or iPod touch (5th

generation) is used.

Setting a repeat play range

The repeat play range can be changed by only

touching a single key.

pThis function is not available while playing

iTunes Radio.

%Touch the following key repeatedly

until the desired setting appears.

Changes the repeat play range.

Repeats all songs or videos in the selected

list.

Repeats just the current song or video.

pThe repeat setting can be turned off when

an iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 6, iPhone 5s,

iPhone 5c, iPhone 5, or iPod touch (5th gen-

eration) is used.

En 125

Chapter

Using an iPod

Selecting song or video

sources from the playlist

screen

You can search for the song, video, or radio

stations you want to play from the playlist

screen.

1 Touch the following key.

Displays the list of the category.

The “ROOT”screen appears.

2 Touch the following keys to switch the

music or video category list.

Switches to the music category

list.

Switches to the video category list.

pThe video category list icon is not available

when using iPod function with an iPhone 6

Plus, iPhone 6, iPhone 5s, iPhone 5c,

iPhone 5, or iPod touch (5th generation).

3 Touch the category you want to search

for.

Category lists (for music):

!Radio (iTunes Radio)

!Playlists

!Artists

!Albums

!Songs

!Podcasts

!Genres

!Composers

!Audiobooks

Category lists (for video):

!Video Playlists

!Movies

!Music Videos

!TV Shows

!Video Podcasts

pCategory items that do not correspond to

the connected iPod are not displayed.

p“Radio”is displayed only if iTunes Radio is

available on the iPod.

4 Drag the Initial Search Bar to find a file

by the initial character of the file name.

The alphabet corresponding to the current po-

sition on the Initial Search Bar is displayed

and the list scrolls as the bar is slid.

pThe Initial Search Bar is not displayed in

the top category list or the song list.

5 Release the Initial Search Bar at the de-

sired alphabet.

The items whose initial character is the se-

lected alphabet are displayed.

6 Touch the title of the list that you want

to play.

Repeat this operation until you find the de-

sired song or video.

7 Start playback of the selected list.

pDepending on the generation or version of

the iPod, some functions may not be avail-

able.

pYou can play playlists created with the

MusicSphere application. The application

is available on our website.

126

Chapter

20 Using an iPod

pPlaylists that you created with the

MusicSphere application are displayed in

abbreviated form.

Using iTunes Radio

pThis function is only available when using

iPod function with an iPhone 6 Plus,

iPhone 6, iPhone 5s, iPhone 5c, iPhone 5,

or iPod touch (5th generation).

1 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

2 Touch [Radio].

3 Use the touch panel keys on the screen

to control your iPod.

=For details, refer to Using the touch panel

keys (for iTunes Radio) on page 123.

Playing back songs similar to

the current song

You can listen to songs similar to the song cur-

rently being played.

1 Touch the following key.

Displays the pop-up menu.

2 Touch [Play More Like This].

pThe display of the menu item indicates as

follows:

—When the menu item is active, the func-

tion can be turned on.

—When the menu item is highlighted, the

function is turned on.

—When the menu item is not active, the

function is not available for the current

song.

pIf you touch [Play More Like This] when

the menu item is active, songs similar to

the current song will be played back.

pIf you touch [Play More Like This] when

the menu item is highlighted, the function

will turn off.

pThe operation result depends on the iPod.

Setting the current song not to

be played back again

You can set the current song not to be played

back again.

1 Touch the following key.

Displays the pop-up menu.

2 Touch [Never Play This Song].

pThe display of the menu item indicates as

follows:

—When the menu item is active, the func-

tion can be turned on.

—When the menu item is highlighted, the

function is turned on.

—When the menu item is not active, the

function is not available for the current

song.

pIf you touch [Never Play This Song] when

the menu item is active, the song will not

be played back again.

pIf you touch [Never Play This Song] when

the menu item is highlighted, the function

will turn off.

pThe operation result depends on the iPod.

Adding the current song to the

wish list

You can add the current song to the wish list

for easy access to the song later.

En 127

Chapter

Using an iPod

1 Touch the following key.

Displays the pop-up menu.

2 Touch [Add to iTunes Wish List].

The song will be added to the wish list.

pIf the song is already in the wish list, [Re-

move from iTunes Wish List ] is displayed

instead of [Add to iTunes Wish List]. If you

touch [Remove from iTunes Wish List ],

the song will be removed from the wish list.

pThe operation result depends on the

iPod.

Using this product’s iPod

function from your iPod

You can control this product’s iPod function

from the connected iPod if the control mode is

set to “App Mode”. The application screen of

the iPod can be displayed on this product, and

the music files and video files in the iPod can

be played back with this product.

pThis function is not available when using

iPod function with an iPhone 6 Plus,

iPhone 6, iPhone 5s, iPhone 5c, iPhone 5,

or iPod touch (5th generation).

pWhile this function is in use, the iPod will

not turn off even if the ignition key is turned

off. Operate the iPod to turn off the power.

1 Touch the following key.

Switches the control mode.

pThe control mode switches to “App Mode”.

The icon changes to .

2 Operate the connected iPod to select a

video or song and play.

pThe following functions are still accessible

from this product even if the control mode

is set to “App Mode”. However, the opera-

tion will depend on your applications.

—Playing/pausing

—Fast forwarding/reversing

—Tracking up/down

—Moving up/down to a chapter

3 Touch the following key.

Switches the control mode, to con-

trol iPod functions from this pro-

duct.

Changing the speed of

audiobook playback

The playback speed can be changed while

playing an audiobook.

%Touch the following key.

Changes the playback speed.

!(default):

Plays back in normal speed.

Plays back faster than normal speed.

Plays back slower than normal speed.

pThe icon does not change when using this

function with an iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 6,

iPhone 5s, iPhone 5c, iPhone 5, or iPod

touch (5th generation). The setting changes

as follows when the icon is touched, even

though the icon does not change.

Faster dSlower dNormal dFaster...

128

Chapter

20 Using an iPod

Displaying lists related to

the song currently playing

(link search)

pThis function is not available while playing

iTunes Radio.

1 Touch the artwork to open a list of the

names of songs on the album currently

playing.

2 Touch the name of the song you want

to play to start playing that song.

pIf part of the recorded information is not

displayed, a scroll key appears on the right

side of list. Touch the scroll key to scroll.

Operating with the

hardware buttons

Press the TRK button.

You can skip songs or videos forward or back-

ward.

pThe skip-back key is not available while

playing iTunes Radio.

When a song or video with chapters is played,

you can skip a chapter forward or backward.

Press and hold the TRK button.

You can perform fast reverse or fast for-

ward.

Playing back music from a

music app other than iPod

music, as the iPod source

The app name and the song information are

also displayed.

Using the touch panel keys

9 8 8

132

1Displays the source list.

=For details, refer to Selecting a front

source on the source list on page 25.

2Displays the Time and date setting

screen.

=For details, refer to Setting the time and

date on page 221.

3Displays the Setting menu screen.

4Recalls equalizer curves.

=For details, refer to Using the equalizer

on page 202.

5Selects a track from the list.

=For details, refer to Selecting song or

video sources from the playlist screen on

page 126.

6Switches the control mode to “App

Mode”.

=For details, refer to Using this product’s

iPod function from your iPod on page

128.

7Displays the Phone menu screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the phone

menu on page 80.

8Skips files forward or backward.

9Switches between playback and pause.

En 129

Chapter

Using an iPod

Reading the screen

45 6

1App name

Shows the App name of the currently playing.

2Song title

Shows the title of the song currently being

played (when available). “No Title”is dis-

played if there is no corresponding informa-

tion.

3Artist name

Shows the artist name for the song currently

being played (when available). “No Name”is

displayed if there is no corresponding infor-

mation.

4Album title

Shows the title of the album of the current file

(when available). “No Title”is displayed if

there is no corresponding information.

5Pause indicator

6Album artwork

Album art of the current song is displayed if it

is available.

130

Chapter

20 Using an iPod

8100NEX 7100NEX

If an Android Auto-compatible device is con-

nected to this product, you can listen to the

music output from the Android device with

this product, and control the playback directly

from this product.

pThis function is available only when

Android Auto is turned on. Start the

Android Auto before using this function.

=For details, refer to Using Android Auto

on page 138.

Using the touch panel keys

655

1Displays the Time and date setting

screen.

=For details, refer to Setting the time and

date on page 221.

2Displays the Setting menu screen.

3Recalls equalizer curves.

=For details, refer to Using the equalizer

on page 202.

4Displays the Phone menu screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the phone

menu on page 80.

5Skips files forward or backward.

pOperations may vary depending on the

application used on the Android Auto-

compatible device.

6Switches between playback and pause.

Reading the screen

1Current track information

!Application name

Shows the application name (when

available). “No Name”is displayed if

there is no corresponding information.

!Song title

Shows the title of the song currently

playing (when available). “No Title”is

displayed if there is no corresponding

information.

!:Artist name

Shows the artist name for the song cur-

rently being played (when available).

“No Name”is displayed if there is no

corresponding information.

!:Album title

Shows the title of the album of the cur-

rent file (when available). “No Title”is

displayed if there is no corresponding

information.

2Current time and date

3Album artwork

Album art of the current song is displayed if it

is available.

4Playback condition indicator

Indicates the current playback condition.

Setting the shuffle play

Indicator Meaning

Plays all files in the current re-

peat play range in random order.

En 131

Chapter

Playing music output from the Android Auto-compatible device

Playing music output from the Android Auto-

compatible device

Setting a repeat play range

Indicator Meaning

Repeats all songs in the se-

lected list.

Repeats just the current song.

pPlayback condition indicators may not

be displayed depending on the Android

device.

5Play time indicator

Shows the elapsed playing time within the

current file.

Starting procedure

1 Start up Android Auto.

=For details, refer to Using Android Auto on

page 138.

2 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

3 Touch [USB2] on the AV source selec-

tion screen.

4 Use the touch panel keys on the screen

to control the playback.

=For details, refer to Using the touch panel

keys on page 131.

pThe Android Auto function may not oper-

ate properly if the Bluetooth connection

with the Android Auto-compatible device

is terminated.

132

Chapter

21 Playing music output from the Android Auto-

compatible device

WARNING

Certain uses of an iPhone or a smartphone

may not be legal while driving in your juris-

diction, so you must be aware of and obey

any such restrictions.

If in doubt as to a particular function, only

perform it while the car is parked.

No feature should be used unless it is safe to

do so under the driving conditions you are

experiencing.

Using AppRadio Mode

You can control applications for an iPhone or

a smartphone directly from the screen

(AppRadio Mode).

In AppRadio Mode, you can operate applica-

tions with finger gestures such as tapping,

dragging, scrolling or flicking on the screen of

this product.

=For details of AppRadio Mode compatible

devices, refer to AppRadio Mode Compatibil-

ity on page 89.

pIn this chapter, iPhone and iPod touch will

be referred to as “iPhone”.

pFor AVIC-5100NEX users

AppRadio Mode is only available on an

iPhone.

pThe compatible finger gestures vary de-

pending on the application for an iPhone

or a smartphone.

pWhen an application not compatible with

AppRadio Mode is started, depending on

the application, you can see an image of

the application on the screen of this pro-

duct. However, you will not be able to oper-

ate the application.

To use AppRadio Mode, install the AppRadio

app on the iPhone or smartphone beforehand

to enable launching of the application on this

product. For details about the AppRadio app,

visit the following site:

For U.S.A.

http://www.pioneerelectronics.com/AppRadioMode

For Canada

http://www.pioneerelectronics.ca/AppRadioMode

pBe sure to read Using app-based connected

content before you perform this operation.

=For details, refer to Using app-based con-

nected content on page 251.

!Content and functionality of compatible ap-

plications are the responsibility of the App

providers.

!In AppRadio Mode, usage is limited while

driving, with availability of functions and

content determined by the App providers.

!AppRadio Mode allows access to applica-

tions other than those listed, subject to lim-

itations while driving.

!PIONEER IS NOT RESPONSIBLE AND DIS-

CLAIMS LIABILITY FOR THIRD PARTY

(NON-PIONEER) APPS AND CONTENT, IN-

CLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY IN-

ACCURACIES OR INCOMPLETE

INFORMATION.

Using the touch panel keys

(App control side bar)

1Displays the source list.

=For details, refer to Selecting a front

source on the source list on page 25.

2Displays the launcher application screen.

3Displays the previous screen.

pWhen you use an iPhone, this key is not

available.

4Displays the menu screen.

pWhen you use an iPhone, this key is not

available.

5Displays the Phone menu screen.

En 133

Chapter

Using your iPhone or smartphone applications

=For details, refer to Displaying the phone

menu on page 80.

6Displays the current source.

pIn AppRadio Mode, App control side bar

will appear.

pIf you press the HOME button twice, the

App control side bar will disappear. Press

the HOME button twice again, and the App

control side bar will appear.

Starting procedure

When connecting an iPhone or smartphone to

this product, you must select the method for

connecting your device. Settings are required

according to the connected device.

=For details, refer to Chapter 13.

The procedure varies depending on the type of

device.

For iPhone with a 30-pin connector users

1 Connect your iPhone.

=For details of the connections, refer to the

Installation Manual.

2 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

3 Touch [APPS].

A message, which notifies you that your

iPhone can launch the application, appears

on the screen.

A message, which asks you whether you want

to launch your application, appears on your

iPhone.

4 Use your iPhone to launch the applica-

tion.

The AppRadio app is launched.

5 Touch [OK] on the screen of this pro-

duct.

The AppRadio Mode screen (Application

menu screen) appears.

pIf you connect your device while an

AppRadio Mode-compatible application is

already running, the application operation

screen will appear on this product.

6 Touch the desired application icon.

The desired application is launched, and the

application operation screen appears.

7 Operate the application.

8 Press the HOME button to go back to

the Top menu screen.

For iPhone with a Lightning

connector users

1 Register your iPhone and connect it to

this product via Bluetooth wireless technol-

ogy.

pThe registered device must be selected as

the priority device.

=For details, refer to Registering your

Bluetooth devices on page 74.

2 Unlock your iPhone.

3 Connect your iPhone.

pThe cable connection method varies de-

pending on your device.

=For details of the connections, refer to the

Installation Manual.

4 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

5 Touch [APPS].

The AppRadio app is launched, and the

AppRadio Mode screen (Application menu

screen) appears.

134

Chapter

22 Using your iPhone or smartphone applications

pIf you connect your device while an

AppRadio Mode-compatible application is

already running, the application operation

screen will appear on this product.

6 Touch the desired application icon.

The desired application is launched, and the

application operation screen appears.

7 Operate the application.

8 Press the HOME button to go back to

the Top menu screen.

For smartphone users

8100NEX 7100NEX 6100NEX

1 Register your smartphone and connect

it to this product via Bluetooth wireless

technology.

pThe registered device must be selected as

the priority device.

=For details, refer to Registering your

Bluetooth devices on page 74.

2 Unlock your smartphone.

3 Connect your smartphone to this pro-

duct via the separately sold App Connectiv-

ity Kit (CD-AH200).

pThe cable connection method varies de-

pending on your device.

=For details of the connections, refer to the

Installation Manual.

4 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

5 Touch [APPS].

The AppRadio app is launched, and the

AppRadio Mode screen (Application menu

screen) appears.

pIf you connect your device while an

AppRadio Mode-compatible application is

already running, the application operation

screen will appear on this product.

6 Touch the desired application icon.

The desired application is launched, and the

application operation screen appears.

7 Operate the application.

8 Press the HOME button to go back to

the Top menu screen.

Using the keyboard

CAUTION

For your safety, the keyboard functionality is only

available when the vehicle is stopped and the

parking brake is engaged.

pThis function is only available in AppRadio

Mode on the iPhone.

pThis function may not be available depend-

ing on your iPhone.

When you tap the text input area of an applica-

tion for iPhone, a keyboard will be displayed

on the screen. You can input the desired text

directly from this product.

pThe language preference for the keyboard

of this product should be same as the set-

ting on your iPhone.

If the settings for this product and the

iPhone are different, you may be unable to

enter characters properly.

En 135

Chapter

Using your iPhone or smartphone applications

1 Set the keyboard language.

=For details of the operations, refer to Setting

the keyboard language with the application

for iPhone on page 186.

2 Start up the AppRadio Mode.

=For details, refer to Starting procedure on

page 134.

3 Touch the text input area on the appli-

cation operation screen.

A keyboard for entering text appears.

3456

1Enters the characters.

2Deletes the entered text one letter at a time,

beginning at the end of the text.

3Confirms the entry and allows you to pro-

ceed to the next step.

4Hides the keyboard and the text can now be

entered using the keyboard of the iPhone.

5Changes the iPhone keyboard layout.

pThe iPhone keyboard layouts that can be

selected by tapping depends on the

setting for Hardware Keyboard Layout

set on your iPhone.

6Switches to a keyboard offering numeric

characters and symbols.

7Converts the case of the keyboard charac-

ters.

Adjusting the image size (For

smartphone users)

8100NEX 7100NEX 6100NEX

Black dots may appear on the screen when

using AppRadio Mode with an Android de-

vice connected to this product.

CAUTION

This setting is available only when you stop your

vehicle in a safe place and apply the parking

brake.

pThis function can be set under the follow-

ing conditions:

—When an Android device is connected

to this product using CD-AH200 (sold

separately), and when AppRadio Mode

is available after a Bluetooth connection

using SPP (Serial Port Profile) has been

established.

pIf this setting has not been set, the setting

screen automatically appears in the follow-

ing cases:

—When entering AppRadio Mode after a

Bluetooth connection using SPP (Serial

Port Profile) has been established.

—When a Bluetooth connection using

SPP (Serial Port Profile) has been estab-

lished in AppRadio Mode.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “System”screen appears.

3 Touch [Input/Output Settings].

4 Touch [AppRadio Video Adjustment].

The confirmation screen appears.

5 Touch [OK].

136

Chapter

22 Using your iPhone or smartphone applications

6 Touch the following keys to adjust the

line to fit smartphone image size.

Moves the line to the left.

Moves the line to the right.

Moves the line upward.

Moves the line downward.

7 Touch [Preview].

pConfirm that the whole image fills the

screen.

8 Touch [OK].

pIf you want to adjust the setting again from

the beginning, touch [RESET].

Displaying the image of your

application (iPhone with 30-pin

connector)

You can set an image of an application for

iPhone, which is not compatible with

AppRadio Mode, to be shown on the screen.

pDepending on the type of application, you

may not be able to see the image on the

screen.

pYou can only control the application on the

connected device.

pWhen you touch the display in this func-

tion, “Don’t Touch”mark appears on the

upper right corner of the screen.

1 Connect your iPhone.

=For details of the connections, refer to the

Installation Manual.

2 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

3 Touch [APPS].

A message, which notifies you that your

iPhone can launch the application, appears

on the screen.

A message, which asks you whether you want

to launch your application, appears on your

iPhone.

4 Use your iPhone to refuse to launch the

application.

5 Touch [OK] on the screen of this pro-

duct.

The black screen appears.

6 Launch an application on your iPhone.

An image of the application appears on the

screen.

7 Press the HOME button to return to the

Top menu screen.

Displaying the image of your

application (iPhone with

Lightning connector)

You can set an image of an application for

smartphone, which is not compatible with

AppRadio Mode, to be shown on the screen.

pDepending on the type of application, you

may not be able to see the image on the

screen.

pWhen you use this function, do not connect

other devices via Bluetooth wireless tech-

nology. Be sure to disconnect your

Bluetooth device before using this func-

tion.

pYou can only control the application on the

connected device.

pWhen you touch the display in this func-

tion, “Don’t Touch”mark appears on the

upper right corner of the screen.

1 Connect your iPhone.

pThe cable connection method varies de-

pending on your device.

=For details of the connections, refer to the

Installation Manual.

En 137

Chapter

Using your iPhone or smartphone applications

2 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

3 Touch [APPS].

The image in your iPhone appears on the

screen.

4 Launch an application on your iPhone.

An image of the application appears on the

screen.

5 Press the HOME button to return to the

Top menu screen.

Displaying the image of your

application (smartphone)

8100NEX 7100NEX 6100NEX

You can set an image of an application for

smartphone, which is not compatible with

AppRadio Mode, to be shown on the screen.

pCompatibility with all smartphones is not

guaranteed.

pWhen you use this function, do not connect

other devices via Bluetooth wireless tech-

nology. Be sure to disconnect your

Bluetooth device before using this func-

tion.

pYou can only control the application on the

connected device.

pWhen you touch the display in this func-

tion, “Don’t Touch”mark appears on the

upper right corner of the screen.

1 Connect your smartphone to this pro-

duct via the separately sold App Connectiv-

ity Kit (CD-AH200).

pThe cable connection method varies de-

pending on your device.

=For details of the connections, refer to the

Installation Manual.

2 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

3 Touch [APPS].

The image in your smartphone appears on the

screen.

4 Launch an application on your smart-

phone.

An image of the application appears on the

screen.

5 Press the HOME button to return to the

Top menu screen.

Using Android Auto

8100NEX 7100NEX

You can control applications for a smartphone

directly from the screen (Android Auto).

In Android Auto, you can operate applica-

tions with finger gestures such as tapping,

dragging, scrolling or flicking on the screen of

this product.

pAndroid Auto may not be available in your

country or region.

For details about Android Auto, please

refer to the Google support site:

http://support.google.com/androidauto

pThis function is available for the Android

Auto-compatible device only.

pThe compatible finger gestures vary de-

pending on the application for a smart-

phone.

To use Android Auto, set “Mode”in “Smart-

phone Setup”to “Android Auto”before-

hand.

=For details, refer to Setting the device con-

nection method on page 88.

138

Chapter

22 Using your iPhone or smartphone applications

!Content and functionality of compatible ap-

plications are the responsibility of the App

providers.

!In Android Auto, usage is limited while

driving, with availability of functions and

content determined by the App providers.

!Android Auto allows access to applica-

tions other than those listed, subject to lim-

itations while driving.

!PIONEER IS NOT RESPONSIBLE AND DIS-

CLAIMS LIABILITY FOR THIRD PARTY

(NON-PIONEER) APPS AND CONTENT, IN-

CLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY IN-

ACCURACIES OR INCOMPLETE

INFORMATION.

Starting procedure

When connecting an Android Auto-compati-

ble device to this product, you must select the

method for connecting your device. Settings

are required according to the connected de-

vice.

=For details, refer to Chapter 13.

pTurn off the AVICSYNC App function for

using Android Auto.

pTo achieve optimum usability of Android

Auto, set the driving position setting cor-

rectly according to the vehicle.

=For details, refer to Setting the driving po-

sition on page 139.

1 Connect an Android Auto-compatible

device to this product via the separately

sold USB interface cable for use with

Android devices (CD-MU200).

=For details of the connections, refer to the

Installation Manual.

2 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

3 Touch [Android Auto].

The Bluetooth connection with the Android

Auto-compatible device will automatically be

established.

pIf Android Auto is turned on during a call

on a cellular phone other than the Android

Auto-compatible device, the Bluetooth con-

nection will be terminated after the call

ends.

pIf the AVICSYNC App function is not turned

off, a message confirming whether to turn

off the AVICSYNC App function appears.

4 Operate the application.

=For details on adjusting the volume, refer to

Adjusting the volume on page 140.

pThe Android Auto function may not oper-

ate properly if the Bluetooth connection

with the Android Auto-compatible device

is terminated.

Setting the driving position

To achieve optimum usability of Android

Auto, set the driving position setting correctly

according to the vehicle.

1 Touch the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “System”screen appears.

3 Touch [Driving Position].

4 Touch the item you want to set.

!Left (default):

Select for a left-hand drive vehicle.

!Right:

Select for a right-hand drive vehicle.

The setting will be applied the next time an

Android Auto-compatible device is con-

nected to this product.

En 139

Chapter

Using your iPhone or smartphone applications

Adjusting the volume

You can adjust the guidance volume/alert

sound volume separately from the main sound

volume when Android Auto is used.

%Touch the VOL (+/–) button.

1 2 3

1Touch to mute. Touch again to unmute.

2Displays the main sound volume.

3Adjusts the guidance volume/alert sound

volume.

Each touch of [+]or[–] increases or de-

creases the volume level.

pYou cannot adjust the volume of the main

sound on the screen. Touch the VOL (+/–)

button to adjust the volume of the main

sound.

pThe volume menu is displayed for four sec-

onds. If the screen disappears, touch the

VOL (+/–) button again. The screen reap-

pears.

Using MirrorLink mode

When you connect a MirrorLink device with

compatible applications installed, you can

control the applications for the mobile device

directly from this product (MirrorLink mode).

You can view and operate the compatible ap-

plications via the display with multi-touch ges-

tures like tapping, dragging, scrolling, and

flicking.

pMulti-touch gestures may be disabled de-

pending on the MirrorLink device that is

connected.

Using the touch panel keys

(App control side bar)

1Displays the source list.

=For details, refer to Selecting a front

source on the source list on page 25.

2Displays the launcher application screen.

3Displays the previous screen.

pDepending on the type of MirrorLink

device, this key is not available.

4Displays the menu screen.

pDepending on the type of MirrorLink

device, this key is not available.

5Displays the Phone menu screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the phone

menu on page 80.

6Displays the current source.

pIn MirrorLink mode, App control side bar

will appear.

pIf you press the HOME button twice, the

App control side bar will disappear. Press

the HOME button twice again, and the App

control side bar will appear.

Starting procedure

When connecting a MirrorLink device to this

product, you must select the method for con-

necting your device. Settings are required ac-

cording to the connected device.

=For details, refer to Chapter 13.

pTurn off the AVICSYNC App function for

using MirrorLink mode.

1 Unlock your MirrorLink device.

2 Connect your MirrorLink device to this

product via the separately sold USB inter-

face cable for use with MirrorLink devices

(CD-MU200).

=For details of the connections, refer to the

Installation Manual.

140

Chapter

22 Using your iPhone or smartphone applications

3 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

4 Touch [APPS].

If the launcher application is installed in the

MirrorLink device, the application launches.

If not, the Application menu screen will ap-

pear.

pIf the AVICSYNC App function is not turned

off, a message confirming whether to turn

off the AVICSYNC App function appears.

5 Touch the desired application icon.

The desired application is launched, and the

application operation screen appears.

pSome applications may not launch depend-

ing on the state of the connected device. If

it does not launch, launch the application

according to the application startup mes-

sage.

6 Operate the application.

7 Press the HOME button to go back to

the Top menu screen.

Using the audio mix function

You can output audio mixing AV source and

an application for iPhone or smartphone

when the AppRadio Mode or MirrorLink

mode is used.

pWhen the audio mix function is set to on,

the voice guidance of the navigation sys-

tem is not output. To output the voice gui-

dance of the navigation system, set the

audio mix function to off.

pIf the screen is switched to the Map screen

when the audio mix function is turned on,

the message, “NOTE: Navigation Sounds

are unavailable with the current app &

source selections. Do you want to out-

put Navigation Sounds instead of App-

based Audio?”is displayed. To output

voice guidance for the navigation system,

touch [Yes].

1 Start up the AppRadio Mode or

MirrorLink mode.

2 Press the VOL (+/–) button.

The audio mix menu will be displayed on the

screen.

1 2 3

1Touch to mute. Touch again to unmute.

2Sets whether to switch the sound mix func-

tion on or off.

!Left tab: The audio mix function is en-

abled (mix on). The App volume is dis-

played. If you touch the App volume, the

volume keys will be displayed.

!Right tab: The audio mix function is dis-

abled (mix off).

3Adjusts the application audio volume.

Each touch of [+]or[–] increases or de-

creases the volume level.

pThe AV operation screen and the Applica-

tion screen can be switched by pressing the

MODE button.

pThe right tab is not displayed on the AV op-

eration screen.

pYou cannot adjust the volume of the main

sound on the screen. Press the VOL (+/–)

button to adjust the volume of the main

sound.

pThe audio mix menu is displayed for four

seconds. If the screen disappears, press the

VOL (+/–) button again. The screen reap-

pears.

En 141

Chapter

Using your iPhone or smartphone applications

WARNING

Certain uses of an iPhone or a smartphone

may not be legal while driving in your juris-

diction, so you must be aware of and obey

any such restrictions.

If in doubt as to a particular function, only

perform it while the car is parked.

No feature should be used unless it is safe to

do so under the driving conditions you are

experiencing.

Pandora operations

You can enjoy Pandora by connecting an

iPhone or a smartphone that has the Pandora

application installed.

Important

!Requirements to access Pandora using

Pioneer car audio/video products:

=For details, refer to Chapter 13.

!Please update the firmware of the Pandora ap-

plication to the latest version before use.

!The latest version of the Pandora application

can be downloaded from the iTunes App Store

or Google Play.

!Create a free or a paid account online. You

can create the account in the Pandora appli-

cation from your iPhone or from the website

(http://www.pandora.com/register).

!If the Data Plan for your iPhone does not pro-

vide for unlimited data usage, additional

charges from your carrier may apply for acces-

sing the Pandora service via 3G, EDGE and/or

LTE (4G) networks.

!You need to connect to the Internet via 3G,

EDGE, LTE (4G) or Wi-Fi network to use the

Pandora service.

Limitations:

!Depending on the availability of the Internet,

you may not be able to receive the Pandora

service.

!The Pandora service is subject to change with-

out notice.

The service could be affected by any of the fol-

lowing: firmware version of the iPhone, firm-

ware version of the Pandora application,

changes to the Pandora music service.

!Certain functions of the Pandora service are

not available when accessing the service

through Pioneer car audio/video products.

They include, but are not limited to the follow-

ing: sending information about current sta-

tions, buying tracks from iTunes, viewing

additional text information, logging in to

Pandora, adjusting Cell Network Audio Qual-

ity.

Notes

!Pandora internet radio is a music service not

affiliated with Pioneer. More information is

available at

http://www.pandora.com

!The Pandora mobile application is available

for iPhone and smartphone, please visit

www.pandora.com/everywhere/mobile for the

latest compatibility information.

Using the touch panel keys

Playback screen (page 1)

132

a 8

Playback screen (page 2)

bcd 7

1Displays the source list.

=For details, refer to Selecting a front

source on the source list on page 25.

142

Chapter

23 Streaming Pandora®

2Displays the Time and date setting

screen.

=For details, refer to Setting the time and

date on page 221.

3Displays the Setting menu screen.

4Recalls equalizer curves.

=For details, refer to Using the equalizer

on page 202.

5Touching the key displays the list of your

Pandora stations.

=For details, refer to Selecting a Pandora

station from the list on page 145.

6Displays the Phone menu screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the phone

menu on page 80.

7Switches to the next or previous page of

touch panel keys.

8Touching the key gives a “Thumbs Down”

to the track currently playing and skips to

the next track.

pThis function is not available when

using a shared station.

9Touching the key gives a “Thumbs Up”to

the track currently playing.

pThis function is not available when

using a shared station.

aSwitches between playback and pause.

bUses “Sound Retriever”function.

=For details, refer to Setting the “Sound

Retriever”function on page 222.

cAdds information for the track currently

playing to bookmarks.

pSongs added to bookmarks cannot be

viewed from this product.

dCreates a new station.

=For details, refer to Creating a station on

page 145.

Reading the screen

1Current track information

!Shows the Pandora station name the

tuner is currently tuned in to.

!:Track title

Shows the title of the current track.

!:Artist name

Shows the artist name for the track cur-

rently playing.

!:Album title

Shows the title of the album of the cur-

rent track.

pThe information is not displayed if there

is no corresponding information.

2Play time indicator

Shows the elapsed time, remaining time and

time bar of the current track.

Starting procedure

When connecting an iPhone or smartphone to

this product, you must select the method for

connecting your device. Settings are required

according to the connected device.

=For details, refer to Chapter 13.

En 143

Chapter

Streaming Pandora®

For iPhone with a 30-pin

connector users

1 Unlock your iPhone.

2 Connect your iPhone.

pConnect via USB or Bluetooth.

=For details of the Bluetooth connection,

refer to Registering your Bluetooth de-

vices on page 74.

3 Display the AV source selection screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Dis-

playing the AV operation screen on page 24.

4 Touch [Pandora] on the AV source selec-

tion screen.

5 Use the touch panel keys on the screen

to control the Pandora application.

=For details, refer to Using the touch panel

keys on page 142.

For iPhone with a Lightning

connector users

1 Unlock your iPhone.

2 Connect your iPhone.

8100NEX 7100NEX 6100NEX

pConnect via USB, Bluetooth, or HDMI and

Bluetooth.

=For details of the Bluetooth connection,

refer to Registering your Bluetooth de-

vices on page 74.

pThe cable connection method varies de-

pending on your device.

=For details of the connections, refer to

the Installation Manual.

5100NEX

pConnect via USB or Bluetooth.

=For details of the Bluetooth connection,

refer to Registering your Bluetooth de-

vices on page 74.

pThe cable connection method varies de-

pending on your device.

=For details of the connections, refer to

the Installation Manual.

3 Display the AV source selection screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Dis-

playing the AV operation screen on page 24.

4 Touch [Pandora] on the AV source selec-

tion screen.

When you touch [Pandora], this product will

start establishing a Bluetooth connection.

After the connection is successfully estab-

lished, the touch panel key on the “Pandora”

screen is activated.

5 Use the touch panel keys on the screen

to control the Pandora application.

=For details, refer to Using the touch panel

keys on page 142.

For smartphone users

pTurn off the AVICSYNC App function for

using Pandora with a smartphone if the

smartphone is connected with the “HDMI”

or “Bluetooth”selected for “Connection”

in “Smartphone Setup”.

1 Unlock your smartphone.

2 Connect your smartphone.

8100NEX 7100NEX 6100NEX

pConnect via Bluetooth, or HDMI and

Bluetooth.

=For details of the Bluetooth connection,

refer to Registering your Bluetooth de-

vices on page 74.

pThe cable connection method varies de-

pending on your device.

=For details of the connections, refer to

the Installation Manual.

5100NEX

pConnect via Bluetooth.

=For details of the Bluetooth connection,

refer to Registering your Bluetooth de-

vices on page 74.

pThe cable connection method varies de-

pending on your device.

=For details of the connections, refer to

the Installation Manual.

3 Display the AV source selection screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Dis-

playing the AV operation screen on page 24.

144

Chapter

23 Streaming Pandora®

4 Touch [Pandora] on the AV source selec-

tion screen.

When you touch [Pandora], this product will

start establishing a Bluetooth connection.

After the connection is successfully estab-

lished, the touch panel key on the “Pandora”

screen is activated.

pIf the AVICSYNC App function is not turned

off, a message confirming whether to turn

off the AVICSYNC App function appears

for smartphones connected with “HDMI”or

“Bluetooth”selected for “Connection”in

“Smartphone Setup”.

5 Use the touch panel keys on the screen

to control the Pandora application.

=For details, refer to Using the touch panel

keys on page 142.

Selecting a Pandora station

from the list

%Touch the following key.

Displays the list of Pandora sta-

tions.

The following screen appears.

pTouch to switch to the station list.

pTouch to switch to the genre list.

pTouching plays only one track based on

particular musical characteristics, one at a

time, from several shuffled stations.

pStations indicated by are shared sta-

tions.

pWhen you touch [A-Z]or[Date], the list

items can be sorted.

A-Z: Sorts the items in the list alphabeti-

cally.

Date: Sorts the items in the list in the order

of the dates the items were created.

pIf you touch , the station will be deleted.

A message prompting you to delete the sta-

tion appears.

Touch [Yes]. The station will be deleted.

To cancel, touch [No].

Creating a station

You can create up to 100 stations by a song or

an artist.

pYou can also create a station by selecting a

station in the genre list.

pStations cannot be created in the following

cases:

—There is no response for 15 seconds.

—The number of created stations reaches

100.

1 Touch the following key.

Displays the pop-up menu.

2 Touch the desired item.

!Track:

Create a station by the song currently being

played.

!Artist:

Create a station by the artist of the song

currently being played.

#To cancel creating a new station, touch

[Cancel].

Operating with the

hardware buttons

Press the pTRK button.

You can skip songs forward.

En 145

Chapter

Streaming Pandora®

WARNING

Certain uses of an iPhone or a smartphone

may not be legal while driving in your juris-

diction, so you must be aware of and obey

any such restrictions.

If in doubt as to a particular function, only

perform it while the car is parked.

No feature should be used unless it is safe to

do so under the driving conditions you are

experiencing.

When you connect an iPhone or a smartphone

with the Aha Radio installed, you can control,

view, and/or listen to Aha Radio content from

this product.

pIn this chapter, iPhone and iPod touch will

be referred to as “iPhone”.

pFor details concerning operations, refer to

the Help and Tips section within the Aha

Radio application.

pAha Radio stations may require initial

setup or sign in before the station can be

accessed.

pBe sure to read Using app-based connected

content before you perform this operation.

=For details, refer to Using app-based con-

nected content on page 251.

Notes:

!Certain functionality of the Aha Radio service

may not be available when accessing the ser-

vice through this product, including, but not

limited to, creating new Aha stations, deleting

Aha stations, recording ‘shouts’by voice, ad-

justing Aha Radio App settings, logging into

Facebook, creating a Facebook account, log-

ging into Twitter, or creating a Twitter account.

!Aha Radio is a service not affiliated with

Pioneer. More information is available at

http://www.aharadio.com/.

!A specific version of the Aha Radio applica-

tion must be installed on your iPhone or

smartphone to enjoy Aha Radio content on

this product.

Because the application for the iPhone or

smartphone is not provided by Pioneer, the re-

quired version of the application may not yet

be available at the time of purchase of this

product.

Availability, version and update information

can be found at

http://www.pioneerelectronics.com/aharadio

Using the touch panel keys

132

1Displays the source list.

=For details, refer to Selecting a front

source on the source list on page 25.

2Displays the Time and date setting

screen.

=For details, refer to Setting the time and

date on page 221.

3Displays the Setting menu screen.

4Recalls equalizer curves.

=For details, refer to Using the equalizer

on page 202.

5Selects an Aha Radio station from the list.

Touching this key displays the list of the avail-

able Aha Radio stations. Touch the desired

Aha Radio station to change Aha Radio

sources.

6Displays the Phone menu screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the phone

menu on page 80.

7Performs additional functions of each sta-

tion or content currently playing.

pThe icons displayed vary depending on

each station or content.

146

Chapter

24 Using Aha Radio

Indicator Meaning

Touching the key discloses the

current car location through

Aha Radio.

Touching the key retweets the

selected tweets with your Twitter

account.

Touching the key performs fast

reverse of the current content

for 30 seconds.

Touching the key “dislikes”the

current content.

pDepending on the content,

touching or cancels

“dislikes”.

Touching the key “likes”the cur-

rent content.

pDepending on the content,

touching or cancels

“likes”.

Touching the key lets you make

a call to a phone number regis-

tered in the current content

using the hands-free function.

8Switches between playback and pause.

Reading the screen

1Station mark

2Station name

Shows the name of the Aha Radio station to

which this product is currently tuned.

3Content image

Displays an image of the current content if

available.

4Rating information

Shows the rated value of the current content

displayed if available.

5Current station information

Shows information on the content currently

being played.

pThe item is blank if there is no corre-

sponding information.

Starting procedure

When connecting an iPhone or smartphone to

this product, you must select the method for

connecting your device. Settings are required

according to the connected device.

=For details, refer to Chapter 13.

For iPhone with a 30-pin

connector users

1 Unlock your iPhone.

2 Connect your iPhone.

pConnect via USB or Bluetooth.

=For details of the Bluetooth connection,

refer to Registering your Bluetooth de-

vices on page 74.

3 Display the AV source selection screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Dis-

playing the AV operation screen on page 24.

4 Touch [aha] on the AV source selection

screen.

5 Use the touch panel keys on the screen

to control Aha Radio.

=For details, refer to Using the touch panel

keys on page 146.

For iPhone with a Lightning

connector users

1 Unlock your iPhone.

2 Connect your iPhone.

8100NEX 7100NEX 6100NEX

pConnect via USB, Bluetooth, or HDMI and

Bluetooth.

En 147

Chapter

Using Aha Radio

=For details of the Bluetooth connection,

refer to Registering your Bluetooth de-

vices on page 74.

pThe cable connection method varies de-

pending on your device.

=For details of the connections, refer to

the Installation Manual.

5100NEX

pConnect via USB or Bluetooth.

=For details of the Bluetooth connection,

refer to Registering your Bluetooth de-

vices on page 74.

pThe cable connection method varies de-

pending on your device.

=For details of the connections, refer to

the Installation Manual.

3 Display the AV source selection screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Dis-

playing the AV operation screen on page 24.

4 Touch [aha] on the AV source selection

screen.

When you touch [aha], this product will start

establishing a Bluetooth connection.

After the connection is successfully estab-

lished, the touch panel key on the “aha”

screen is activated.

5 Use the touch panel keys on the screen

to control Aha Radio.

=For details, refer to Using the touch panel

keys on page 146.

For smartphone users

pTurn off the AVICSYNC App function for

using Aha Radio with a smartphone if the

smartphone is connected with the “HDMI”

or “Bluetooth”selected for “Connection”

in “Smartphone Setup”.

1 Unlock your smartphone.

2 Connect your smartphone.

8100NEX 7100NEX 6100NEX

pConnect via Bluetooth, or HDMI and

Bluetooth.

=For details of the Bluetooth connection,

refer to Registering your Bluetooth de-

vices on page 74.

pThe cable connection method varies de-

pending on your device.

=For details of the connections, refer to

the Installation Manual.

5100NEX

pConnect via Bluetooth.

=For details of the Bluetooth connection,

refer to Registering your Bluetooth de-

vices on page 74.

pThe cable connection method varies de-

pending on your device.

=For details of the connections, refer to

the Installation Manual.

3 Display the AV source selection screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Dis-

playing the AV operation screen on page 24.

4 Touch [aha] on the AV source selection

screen.

When you touch [aha], this product will start

establishing a Bluetooth connection.

After the connection is successfully estab-

lished, the touch panel key on the “aha”

screen is activated.

pIf the AVICSYNC App function is not turned

off, a message confirming whether to turn

off the AVICSYNC App function appears

for smartphones connected with “HDMI”or

“Bluetooth”selected for “Connection”in

“Smartphone Setup”.

5 Use the touch panel keys on the screen

to control Aha Radio.

=For details, refer to Using the touch panel

keys on page 146.

Operating with the

hardware buttons

Press the TRK button.

You can skip contents forward or backward.

148

Chapter

24 Using Aha Radio

By connecting the optional iDatalink adapter,

you can access the satellite radio source pro-

vided for the vehicle and the vehicle informa-

tion can be displayed on this product.

Important

!For information on installing the iDatalink

adapter, refer to the operating manual of the

iDatalink adapter.

!After installing the iDatalink adapter, be sure

to check the operations.

!For details about vehicle models that are com-

patible with the iDatalink adapter, refer to the

information on our website.

!Functions and displays vary depending on the

vehicle model. For details of the functions

available for each model, refer to the informa-

tion on our website.

!The iDatalink list screen can be scrolled up or

down by page.

!Please note that the device number of this

product and a computer with internet access

are required to program your Maestro RR

module. For troubleshooting information

about “iDatalink”functions, visit

www.idatalinkmaestro.com/support or call

iDatalink Maestro Technical Support toll-free

at 877.212.6169 ext 7900.

Activating iDatalink Maestro

Before using and/or connecting the

iDatalink Maestro adapter, you will need to

first flash the Maestro module with the appro-

priate vehicle and head unit firmware.

Updating the iDatalink Maestro

module

1 Find the last six numbers (device num-

ber) on the label on the packaging of this

product or on this product itself.

pDevice number input is required for updat-

ing the iDatalink MAESTRO module. Take a

note of the device number as necessary.

pYou can also check the device number on

the “Firmware Information”screen of this

product.

=For details, refer to Displaying the firm-

ware version on page 190.

2 Access the Automotive Data Solutions

Inc. website (www.idatalinkmaestro.com/)

and follow the on-screen directions to con-

figure the desired firmware.

pWhen the serial number input is required,

please input the device number of this pro-

duct.

3 Install the vehicle/head unit specific

firmware on your iDatalink Maestro mod-

ule.

=For details, please refer to Automotive Data

Solutions Inc. website.

4 Connect this product to

iDatalink Maestro, and then install this pro-

duct to the vehicle.

The iDatalink function will be active.

Starting procedure

1 Display the AV source selection screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Dis-

playing the AV operation screen on page 24.

2 Touch [My Vehicle] on the AV source se-

lection screen.

The following screen appears.

3 Touch [USB/iPod], [SiriusXM] or

[Bluetooth Audio] when you want to oper-

ate iDatalink.

En 149

Chapter

Using iDatalink

4 Use the touch panel keys on the screen

to control the OEM feature.

USB/iPod (Media player)

132

1Displays the source list.

=For details, refer to Selecting a front

source on the source list on page 25.

2Displays the Time and date setting

screen.

=For details, refer to Setting the time and

date on page 221.

3Displays the Setting menu screen.

4Recalls equalizer curves.

=For details, refer to Using the equalizer

on page 202.

5Selects a track from the list.

6Switches the text display between tag

information and file/folder information.

7Displays the Phone menu screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the phone

menu on page 80.

8Switches to the next or previous page

of touch panel keys.

9Functions and displays vary depending

on the connected type of iDatalink

adapter and the vehicle model.

aSwitches between playback and pause.

Satellite Radio

c a

1Displays the source list.

=For details, refer to Selecting a front

source on the source list on page 25.

2Selects a band.

3Displays the Time and date setting

screen.

=For details, refer to Setting the time and

date on page 221.

4Displays the Setting menu screen.

5Recalls equalizer curves.

=For details, refer to Using the equalizer

on page 202.

6Selects a channel from the list.

7Switches the text display between the

current channel information and the

current content information.

8Displays the Phone menu screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the phone

menu on page 80.

9Switches to the next or previous page

of touch panel keys.

aFunctions and displays vary depending

on the connected type of iDatalink

adapter and the vehicle model.

bDisplays the preset channels.

cSelects a preset channel.

Selecting a preset channel from the preset chan-

nel list

1 2

1Preset tuning keys

2Preset channel list display key

150

Chapter

25 Using iDatalink

Selecting a SiriusXM channel directly

123

1Clear key

2Numeric keys

3Enter key

Bluetooth Audio

123

1Displays the source list.

=For details, refer to Selecting a front

source on the source list on page 25.

2Displays the Time and date setting

screen.

=For details, refer to Setting the time and

date on page 221.

3Displays the Setting menu screen.

4Recalls equalizer curves.

=For details, refer to Using the equalizer

on page 202.

5Selects a file from the list.

6Switches the text display between tag

information and file/folder information.

7Displays the Phone menu screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the phone

menu on page 80.

8Switches to the next or previous page

of touch panel keys.

9Skips files forward or backward.

aSwitches between playback and

pause.

Hands-free phone

By connecting this product to the vehicle bus

system using an iDatalink adapter (sold sepa-

rately), this product can access the hands-free

phone for the vehicle.

pThis function is not available during a call

via this product or while using the voice re-

cognition function.

Setting Bluetooth

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “System”screen appears.

3 Touch [OEM Settings].

pFunctions and displays vary depending on

the connected type of iDatalink adapter and

the vehicle model.

En 151

Chapter

Using iDatalink

Phone Book screen

1Switches to the voice recognition func-

tion.

2Switches to the phone book list.

3Switches to the missed, received and dia-

led call lists.

4Switches the mode to enter the phone

number directly.

5Functions and displays vary depending

on the connected type of iDatalink adap-

ter and the vehicle model.

6Displays the Setting menu screen.

pThe [Connection] and [Bluetooth Set-

tings] menus are displayed. The avail-

able functions and displays for the

menus vary depending on the con-

nected type of iDatalink adapter and the

vehicle model.

7Closes the screen.

8Displays entries in the list by the initial

character.

History list screen

1Switches to call history.

Dial screen

1 2 3

4 5

1Dial pad

2Deletes one digit. Touch and hold to de-

lete all digits.

3Turns private mode on or off.

4Makes a phone call, when a phone num-

ber is selected.

Switches between callers on hold.

5Ends a call.

Rejects an incoming call.

Cancels call waiting.

Dial confirmation screen

12 3

1Switches the mode to enter the phone

number directly.

2Turns private mode on or off.

3Minimizes the dial confirmation screen.

4Accepts an incoming call.

5Ends a call.

152

Chapter

25 Using iDatalink

You can control a Bluetooth audio player.

pBefore using the Bluetooth audio player,

you must register and connect the device

to this product.

=For details, refer to Registering your

Bluetooth devices on page 74.

pOperations may vary depending on the

Bluetooth audio player.

pDepending on the Bluetooth audio player

connected to this product, the available op-

erations with this product may be limited to

the following two levels:

—A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution

Profile): Only playing back songs on

your audio player is possible.

—A2DP and AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote

Control Profile): Playing back, pausing,

selecting songs, etc., are possible.

pSince a number of Bluetooth audio players

are available on the market, operations

with your Bluetooth audio player using this

product vary considerably in range. Please

refer to the instruction manual that came

with your Bluetooth audio player as well as

this manual while operating your player on

this product.

pWhile you are listening to songs on your

Bluetooth audio player, please refrain from

operating your cellular phone as much as

possible. If you try operating your cellular

phone, the signal may cause noise for song

playback.

pEven if you switch to another source while

listening to a song on your Bluetooth audio

player, song playback may continues.

pDepending on the Bluetooth audio player

you connected to this product, operations

on this product to control the player may

differ from those explained in this manual.

pWhen you are talking on a cellular phone

connected to this product via Bluetooth

wireless technology, song playback from

your Bluetooth audio player connected to

this product may be paused.

pYou cannot use Bluetooth audio player

when the connecting cable for using

AppRadio Mode is connected.

Using the touch panel keys

Playback screen (page 1)

Playback screen (page 2)

79abc

1Displays the source list.

=For details, refer to Selecting a front

source on the source list on page 25.

2Displays the Time and date setting

screen.

=For details, refer to Setting the time and

date on page 221.

3Displays the Setting menu screen.

4Recalls equalizer curves.

=For details, refer to Using the equalizer

on page 202.

5Selects a file from the list.

=For details, refer to Selecting files from

the file name list on page 155.

6Displays the Phone menu screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the phone

menu on page 80.

7Switches to the next or previous page of

touch panel keys.

8Skips files forward or backward.

9Uses “Sound Retriever”function.

=For details, refer to Setting the “Sound

Retriever”function on page 222.

En 153

Chapter

Using a Bluetooth audio player

aPlays files in random order.

=For details, refer to Playing files in ran-

dom order on page 155.

bSets a repeat play range.

=For details, refer to Setting a repeat play

range on page 155.

cSwitches between playback and pause.

Reading the screen

1Current time and date

2File number indicator

Shows the file number currently playing

(when available).

3Play time indicator

Shows the elapsed playing time within the

current file (when available).

4Current file information

If the connected Bluetooth audio player fea-

tures AVRCP 1.3, the following file information

will be displayed.

!Track title

Shows the title of the track currently

playing (when available).

!:Artist name

Shows the name of the artist for the

track currently playing (when available).

!:Album title

Shows the title of the album of the cur-

rent file (when available).

!:Genre

Shows the genre of the current file

(when available).

pIn the following cases, file information

will only be displayed after a file starts

or resumes playing:

—Bluetooth audio player compatible

with AVRCP1.3 is connected, and the

playback is started by the operation

on the device.

—Another file is selected while play-

back is paused.

Starting procedure

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “System”screen appears.

3 Touch [AV Source Settings].

The following screen appears.

4 Confirm that “Bluetooth Audio”is

turned on.

pThe default setting is “On”.

5 Display the AV source selection screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Dis-

playing the AV operation screen on page 24.

6 Touch [Bluetooth Audio] on the AV

source selection screen.

The “Bluetooth”screen appears.

154

Chapter

26 Using a Bluetooth audio player

7 Use the touch panel keys on the screen

to control the Bluetooth audio player.

=For details, refer to Using the touch panel

keys on page 153.

Selecting files from the file

name list

The file name list lets you see the list of track

titles for the Bluetooth audio player and lets

you select one of them to play back.

pThis function is only available when the

connected Bluetooth audio player supports

AVRCP 1.4.

1 Touch the following key.

Displays the file name list.

The following screen appears.

2 Touch a file on the list to play back.

pTouching a folder on the list shows its con-

tents. You can play a file on the list by

touching it.

Playing files in random order

All of the files within the repeat play range can

be played at random by only touching a single

key.

pThis function is only available when the

connected Bluetooth audio player supports

AVRCP 1.3.

%Touch the following key repeatedly

until the desired setting appears.

Turns random play on or off.

Setting a repeat play range

The repeat play range can be changed by only

touching a single key.

pThis function is only available when the

connected Bluetooth audio player supports

AVRCP 1.3.

%Touch the following key repeatedly

until the desired setting appears.

Changes the repeat play range be-

tween the current file and all audio

files in the Bluetooth audio player.

Operating with the

hardware buttons

Press the TRK button.

You can skip files forward or backward.

Press and hold the TRK button.

You can perform fast reverse or fast for-

ward.

En 155

Chapter

Using a Bluetooth audio player

SiriusXM satellite radio

operations

You can use this product to control a SiriusXM

Connect Vehicle Tuner (sold separately).

For information on how to install the SiriusXM

Connect Vehicle Tuner, consult the installation

guide included with the tuner.

Only SiriusXM®brings you more of what you

love to listen to, all in one place. Get over 140

channels, including commercial-free music

plus the best sports, news, talk, comedy and

entertainment. Welcome to the world of satel-

lite radio. A SiriusXM Vehicle Tuner and Sub-

scription are required. For more information,

visit www.siriusxm.com.

Subscribing to the SiriusXM

Satellite Radio service

1 Select SiriusXM as the source.

You should be able to tune in to Channel 1. If

you cannot get Channel 1, ensure that your

SiriusXM Connect Vehicle Tuner is installed

correctly as described in the tuner installation

guide.

2 Switch to Channel 0 and check the

Radio ID.

The SiriusXM Radio ID can be found by tuning

in to Channel 0. The Radio ID can also be

found at the bottom of the SiriusXM Connect

Vehicle Tuner screen.

Note that the SiriusXM Radio ID does not in-

clude the letters I, O, S or F.

You will need this number to activate your sub-

scription.

3 Activate the service either online or by

phone.

In the USA, you can activate online or by call-

ing SiriusXM Listener care:

!Visit www.siriusxm.com/activatenow

!Call SiriusXM Listener Care at 1-866-635-

2349

For Canadian Subscriptions, please contact:

!Visit www.siriusxm.ca/activatexm

!Call XM customer Care at 1-877-438-9677

#The SiriusXM satellites will send an activation

message to your tuner. When the tuner has re-

ceived the message, “Subscription Updated”is

displayed.

Once you have subscribed, SiriusXM satellites

will send an activation message to your tuner.

The activation process usually takes 10 to 15 min-

utes but may take up to an hour in some cases.

Do not turn off this product while the activation

message is displayed.

Using the touch panel keys

Live display

12 43

bc9aedf

Replay display

hij

1Displays the source list.

=For details, refer to Selecting a front

source on the source list on page 25.

2Selects a band.

3Displays the Time and date setting

screen.

=For details, refer to Setting the time and

date on page 221.

4Displays the Setting menu screen.

156

Chapter

27 Using the SiriusXM®satellite radio

5Recalls equalizer curves.

=For details, refer to Using the equalizer

on page 202.

6Selects a channel from the list.

=For details, refer to Selecting a channel

from a list of all channels on page 160.

=For details, refer to Selecting a channel

from the category list on page 160.

7Switches between the Live screen and the

Replay screen.

=For details, refer to Using the Replay

™

function on page 161.

8Displays the Phone menu screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the phone

menu on page 80.

9Switches to the channel broadcasting the

traffic and weather information for the se-

lected city.

=For details, refer to Checking the update

Traffic and Weather information on page

163.

aMemorizes the current channel.

=For details, refer to Memorizing the cur-

rent contents on page 165.

Stores song information to an iPod.

=For details, refer to Storing song informa-

tion to an iPod (iTunes Tagging) on page

221.

bSelects a channel directly.

=For details, refer to Selecting a SiriusXM

channel directly on page 159.

cPerforms manual tuning.

=For details, refer to Manual tuning on

page 159.

dPlays back the songs from the music

channels stored as presets in the current

band.

=For details, refer to Using TuneMix

™

page 162.

eDisplays the preset channels.

=For details, refer to Selecting a preset

channel from the preset channel list on

page 159.

fScans all the songs for the music chan-

nels found in the current preset band.

=For details, refer to Using TuneScan

™

page 162.

gRecalls the preset channel stored to a key

from memory with a single touch of the

key.

Stores the current broadcast frequency to

a key for later recall by continuing to

touch the key.

=For details, refer to Storing broadcast

channels on page 159.

hChanges the playback point by dragging

the key.

=For details, refer to Operating the time

bar on page 27.

iSkips files forward or backward with a

single touch of the key.

Fast forwards or fast reverses by touching

and holding the key.

jSwitches between playback and pause.

Reading the screen

Live display

12 3

8 67

Replay display

c b

1Band indicator

En 157

Chapter

Using the SiriusXM®satellite radio

Shows the tuned band: SXM1, SXM2, SXM3 or

Featured.

p“Featured”is available only when “Fea-

tured Favorites”is set to “On”.

2Channel name logo

Shows the name logo of the channel currently

being tuned into.

3Current time and date

4Album artwork

Shows the artwork for the current song (when

available).

pIf the album artwork is not available, the

SiriusXM Logo image will be displayed.

5iTunes®tagging song status indicator

Shows the status of the song information

stored in this product.

pThe icon is displayed on all operation

screens of AV sources.

Indicator Meaning

Appears when the song information

tag is stored in this product.

Appears when the song information

tag is being transferred to an iPod.

6iTunes®tagging indicator

Indicates songs that are capable of iTunes tag-

ging.

pThe icon is displayed on all operation

screens of AV sources.

Indicator Meaning

Appears when this product receives

an iTunes song tag that can be

stored and then downloaded to an

iPod for later purchase.

Flashes when this product is storing

song tag information.

7Channel number indicator

Shows the channel number to which the

tuner is currently tuned.

8Signal level indicator

9Current channel information

Shows the detailed information of the broad-

cast channel currently being received.

!Channel name/Channel number

Shows the channel name or channel

number of the channel currently being

tuned into.

p“RADIO ID”is displayed when Chan-

nel 0 is selected.

!:Artist (performer) name

Shows the artist (performer) name for

the current song (when available).

!:Song title (program name)

Shows the title of the current song (pro-

gram).

aPreset number indicator

Highlights the selected preset item.

bPlay time indicator

Shows the elapsed playing time within the

stored broadcast.

cCurrent content information

Shows the detailed information on the content

currently being played.

!Channel name/Channel number

Shows the channel name or channel

number of the channel currently being

tuned into.

p“RADIO ID”is displayed when Chan-

nel 0 is selected.

!:Artist (performer) name

Shows the artist (performer) name for

the current song (when available).

!:Song title (program name)

Shows the title of the current song

(program).

Starting procedure

1 Display the AV source selection screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Dis-

playing the AV operation screen on page 24.

2 Touch [SiriusXM] on the AV source se-

lection screen.

The “SiriusXM”screen appears.

158

Chapter

27 Using the SiriusXM®satellite radio

3 Use the touch panel keys on the screen

to control the radio.

=For details, refer to Using the touch panel

keys on page 156.

Manual tuning

%Touch the following keys to tune manu-

ally.

Moves down one channel at a time.

Moves up one channel at a time.

pIf you keep holding or , you can skip

broadcasting channels.

Selecting a preset channel

from the preset channel list

Once you have stored broadcast channels,

you can easily recall preset channels from

memory with a single touch of a key.

=For details, refer to Storing broadcast fre-

quencies on page 100.

1 Touch the preset channel list display

key.

1Preset channel list display key

2 Touch the item on the list (“1”to “6”)to

switch to a channel registered as a preset

channel.

pIf you touch the preset channel list display

key while the preset channel list is dis-

played, the list disappears and the preset

tuning keys are displayed.

Storing broadcast channels

With a touch of any of the preset tuning keys

(“1”to “6”), you can easily store up to six

broadcast channels for later recall (also with

the touch of a key).

pThe broadcast channel may not be stored

depending on the broadcast channel.

pThis function is not available in Featured

band.

1 Select the channel that you want to

store in memory.

2 Touch and hold a preset tuning key [1]

to [6].

The selected channel is memorized.

The next time you touch the same preset tun-

ing key “1”to “6”, the channel is recalled from

memory.

pUp to 18 channels, six for each of the three

SiriusXM bands, can be memorized.

Selecting a SiriusXM

channel directly

You can select a broadcast channel directly by

entering the desired channel number.

1 Touch the channel number on the

“SiriusXM”screen.

The following screen appears.

En 159

Chapter

Using the SiriusXM®satellite radio

2 Touch [0] to [9] to input the desired

channel number.

pTo delete the entered numbers one by one,

touch [C].

3 Touch the following key.

Selects the SiriusXM channel of

the entered number.

4 Touch the following key.

Returns to the previous screen.

Selecting a channel from a

list of all channels

You can select a channel from any of the avail-

able channels.

pIt may take time to display the channel list

depending on the SiriusXM reception con-

dition.

1 Touch the following key.

Displays the list screen.

2 Select the list of all channels.

3 Touch the desired channel.

4 Touch the following key.

Closes the screen.

Selecting a channel from

the category list

You can select a channel from the available

categories.

The types of categories available depend on

the types of channels available.

pIt may take time to display the channel list

depending on the SiriusXM reception con-

dition.

1 Touch the following key.

Displays the list screen.

2 Touch the category name you want.

The category in the hierarchy under the se-

lected channel list is displayed.

3 Touch the desired channel.

4 Touch the following key.

Closes the screen.

Switching the displayed list

You can switch between list types when a list

is displayed.

1 Touch the following key.

Displays the list screen.

160

Chapter

27 Using the SiriusXM®satellite radio

2 Touch the following key.

Switches between list types.

The displayed list switches in the following

order.

Channel Name—Artist Name—Song Title—

Content Info

Using the Replay™function

You can pause, skip contents, fast reverse, fast

forward or replay the channel you are currently

listening to.

1 Touch the following key.

Switches to the time bar display.

2 Touch the following keys or buttons to

control the radio.

Switches between playback and pause.

m(TRK)

Returns to the beginning of the current

program. Press again to skip back to

the previous program. Press and hold

to fast reverse scan through the con-

tent.

n(TRK)

Jumps to the next program. Press and

hold to fast forward scan through the

content.

Exits Replay mode and tunes into the

current live broadcast.

Time bar Changes the playback point by drag-

ging the key.

Setting SiriusXM TuneStart

™

Automatically start songs from the beginning when

you tune to one of your preset channels in the cur-

rent preset band when TuneStart is turned on.

pThis function is available only when

“SiriusXM”is selected as the source.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “System”screen appears.

3 Touch [AV Source Settings].

The following screen appears.

4 Touch [SiriusXM Settings].

The following screen appears.

5 Touch [Tune Start] repeatedly until the

desired setting appears.

!On (default):

Activates the TuneStart function.

!Off:

Deactivates the TuneStart function.

En 161

Chapter

Using the SiriusXM®satellite radio

Using TuneScan™

When you activate the TuneScan™feature, you

will hear a few seconds of the songs, which

have not been listened to, from each of the

music channels stored as presets on the cur-

rent band.

pThis function is available only when the

channel that is tuned in to supports the Tu-

neScan function.

pIf fewer than two music channels are

stored as presets in the current band, the

message, “No Content”is displayed, and

you cannot perform scan tuning. Add more

music channels as presets.

pTuneScan may take a few minutes to be-

come available after the unit is turned on

or the preset band is changed.

1 Touch the preset channel list display

key.

The preset channel list appears.

2 Touch the following key.

Scans music channels in the cur-

rent band for songs, plays a found

song for a few seconds, and then

continues to scan another song.

Each song on the current channel

plays for a few seconds at a time.

1 32

1Continues playing the current scanning

song or channel.

pYou can stop the TuneScan feature to

listen to the current song and remain lis-

tening to the channel it is on.

2Skips forward or backward.

Touching [o] skips to the previous song

during TuneScan or to the previous channel

during category scan.

Touching [p] skips to the next song dur-

ing TuneScan or to the next channel during

category scan.

3Cancels scan play and returns to the ori-

ginal channel.

Using category scan

You can scan each channel in the selected ca-

tegory.

1 Touch the following key.

Displays the list screen.

2 Touch the desired category.

3 Touch the following key.

Performs scan tuning in the se-

lected category. The live broadcast

for each channel in the current ca-

tegory plays for six seconds at a

time.

Using TuneMix™

TuneMix™plays a unique blend of songs from

music channels stored in the current

SiriusXM Preset Band.

pSXV300 or later SiriusXM Connect vehicle

tuner (sold separately) is required to use

this function.

pIf fewer than two music channels are

stored as presets in the current band, the

message, “No qualified TuneMix music

channels in this band.”is displayed, and

you cannot use TuneMix™. Add more

music channels to presets.

pTuneMix may take a few minutes to be-

come available after the unit is turned on

or the preset band is changed.

162

Chapter

27 Using the SiriusXM®satellite radio

pIf the same channels are stored in the pre-

set channel list, the channels are counted

as one.

pThe channels that parental lock is applied

to cannot be played back by the TuneMix

function.

%Touch the following key.

Plays back the songs from the

music channels stored as presets

in the current band.

!To cancel TuneMix, touch the key again.

Checking the update Traffic

and Weather information

Traffic & Weather Now™allows you to ac-

cess the latest report ready for you whenever

you want to hear it. Set up your favorite traffic

& weather city from the set up menu and then

when you press the Traffic & Weather Now

button you will be able to hear the latest report

and it will start from the beginning.

pSXV300 or later SiriusXM Connect vehicle

tuner (sold separately) is required to use

this function.

pTo use this function, register the desired

city in advance.

=For details, refer to Registering the city

on page 163.

%Touch the following key.

Switches to the channel broad-

casting the traffic and weather in-

formation for the selected city.

pThe icon display indicates as follows.

—Grayed out: Traffic & Weather broadcast

for your market is not yet available.

—With green dot: latest report available

but not listened to yet.

—White: latest report available to hear

again.

pIf the key is touched when a target city is

not registered, the “City”screen is dis-

played.

!You can return to the original channel by

pressing while listening to the traffic

and weather channel.

!The channel automatically returns to the

original channel after the broadcast

reaches the end of the traffic and weather

information.

Registering the city

pSXV300 or later SiriusXM Connect vehicle

tuner (sold separately) is required to use

this function.

pThis function is available only when

“SiriusXM”is selected as the source.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “System”screen appears.

3 Touch [AV Source Settings].

The following screen appears.

4 Touch [SiriusXM Settings].

The following screen appears.

En 163

Chapter

Using the SiriusXM®satellite radio

5 Touch [City Setting].

The “City”screen appears.

6 Touch the desired city.

pA check mark appears for the selected

item.

!If you touch [No City Selected], the check

mark will be removed from the selected city.

!If you remove the check mark from the se-

lected city, a check mark automatically ap-

pears for “No City Selected”.

Setting parental lock

The SiriusXM Parental Control feature allows

you to control access to channels that you

consider inappropriate for younger listeners.

When enabled, the Parental Control feature re-

quires you to enter a passcode to tune into the

locked channels.

Setting the passcode

pThis function is available only when

“SiriusXM”is selected as the source.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “System”screen appears.

3 Touch [AV Source Settings].

The following screen appears.

4 Touch [SiriusXM Settings].

The following screen appears.

5 Touch [Parental Control].

The “Parental Control”screen appears.

6 Enter the passcode.

pThe default passcode is “0000”.

7 Touch the following key.

Displays the “Locked Channel”

screen.

8 Touch [Edit Code].

The “Edit Code”screen appears.

9 Enter the passcode you want to set.

pTo delete the entered numbers one by one,

touch [C].

10 Touch the following key.

Displays the “Locked Channel”

screen.

Locking the channel

pThis function is available only when

“SiriusXM”is selected as the source.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

164

Chapter

27 Using the SiriusXM®satellite radio

The “System”screen appears.

3 Touch [AV Source Settings].

The following screen appears.

4 Touch [SiriusXM Settings].

The following screen appears.

5 Touch [Parental Control].

The “Parental Control”screen appears.

6 Enter the current passcode.

7 Touch the following key.

Displays the “Locked Channel”

screen.

8 Touch the channel you want to lock.

appears and the channel is locked.

pIf you touch a locked channel, the icon

switches to and the channel is unlocked.

pIf you touch [Clear All], all locked channels

are unlocked.

Using the content alerts

function (such as Song Alerts,

Artist Alerts and Game Alerts)

While listening to SiriusXM Satellite Radio,

you can be alerted when your favorite songs,

artists or games involving your favorite sports

teams are playing on other channels. The

radio will display an alert message when a

matching artist, song or team is found on an-

other channel. Then you can choose if you

want to tune into that favorite or you can

ignore it and stay on your current channel. In-

formation on setting up the Artist, Song and

Game Alerts is described below.

Memorizing the current contents

The song titles, artist names, and your favorite

sport teams to which you are listening can be

memorized to an alert list.

1 On the current channel content infor-

mation area, touch the item for which you

want an alert.

=For details, refer to Using the touch panel

keys on page 156.

A confirmation message appears.

2 Touch [Set Alert] for artist or song, or

touch [Team1] or [Team2] for game.

The song, artist, or game is memorized to an

alert list.

When a program that matches a keyword

memorized to the alert list is broadcast, a

beep sounds and a message is displayed.

3 Touch [Jump] to switch to the channel.

You can listen to the track.

pYou can enable or disable alerts by setting

the alert function.

pNotification may not be provided depending

on the status of this product.

#If you touch [Stay], the channel will not

switch.

Setting the program you

want to be alerted for

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

En 165

Chapter

Using the SiriusXM®satellite radio

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “System”screen appears.

3 Touch [AV Source Settings].

The following screen appears.

4 Touch [SiriusXM Settings].

The following screen appears.

5 Touch [Alert List].

The “Alert List”screen appears.

6 Touch the artist name, song title or

team you want to be alerted for when

available.

The alert indicator is highlighted, and the alert

setting is enabled.

pIf you touch the indicator highlighted, the

alert setting is canceled.

pIf you touch and hold the list item, you can

delete the item from the list.

pYou can register up to 50 keywords in the

alert list.

1Delete All

Deletes all items memorized to the alert list.

2Alert On/Alert Off

Changes the settings in the following order

each time you touch the key.

!Alert On (default):

Activates the alert function.

!Alert Off:

Deactivates the alert function.

Selecting teams for Game

Alert

This product can notify you when games invol-

ving your favorite sports teams are about to

start. To use this function, you need to store

the teams you want to follow in advance.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “System”screen appears.

3 Touch [AV Source Settings].

The following screen appears.

166

Chapter

27 Using the SiriusXM®satellite radio

4 Touch [SiriusXM Settings].

The following screen appears.

5 Touch [Team Settings].

The “League”screen appears.

6 Touch the desired league.

7 Touch the desired team.

The team settings are enabled.

Setting the Featured

Favorites function

Featured Favorites are groups of channels that

are created by the SiriusXM Programming de-

partment allowing you to discover new chan-

nels. Featured Favorite channels are dynamic

and can change often, allowing you to dis-

cover new channels.

pThis function is available only when

“SiriusXM”is selected as the source.

pIf this function is turned on, “Featured”will

be available as a band selection.

pThe featured seasonal theme will be auto-

matically updated. You can set whether to

be notified of the update.

=For details, refer to Setting the update

notification for Featured Favorites on

page 168.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “System”screen appears.

3 Touch [AV Source Settings].

The following screen appears.

4 Touch [SiriusXM Settings].

The following screen appears.

5 Touch [Featured Favorites] repeatedly

until the desired setting appears.

!On (default):

Activates the Featured Favorite function.

!Off

Deactivates the Featured Favorite function.

pIf the setting is changed to “Off”while lis-

tening to the channel in Featured band, the

channel does not change and the band dis-

play on the screen changes to “SXM1”.

En 167

Chapter

Using the SiriusXM®satellite radio

Setting the update

notification for Featured

Favorites

You can set whether to be notified when the

featured seasonal theme is updated.

pThis function is available only when

“SiriusXM”is selected as the source and

“Featured Favorites”is set to “On”.

=For details, refer to Setting the Featured

Favorites function on page 167.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “System”screen appears.

3 Touch [AV Source Settings].

The following screen appears.

4 Touch [SiriusXM Settings].

The following screen appears.

5 Touch [Featured Band Update Mes-

sages] repeatedly until the desired setting

appears.

!On (default):

Activates the update notification function.

!Off

Deactivates the update notification

function.

Using the SportsFlash™

function

The SportsFlash function notifies you with a

pop-up message if a notable event occurs in

the game of your favorite sports teams even if

you are listening to another channel. By touch-

ing [Play] on the pop-up message displayed

on the screen, the radio switches to the chan-

nel broadcasting the game and starts play-

back about 30 seconds before the notable

event occurred allowing you to hear it unfold

as if you listened to it live. If you return to the

original channel after listening to the highlight

of the game, the radio plays back from the

time that the channel was switched. You will

not miss either the highlight of the game or

the contents of the channel you were originally

listening to.

pSXV300 or later SiriusXM Connect vehicle

tuner (sold separately) is required to use

this function.

pThis function is available only when

“SiriusXM”is selected as the source.

pTo use this function, before the game starts

select the teams you want to follow.

=For details, refer to Selecting teams for

SportsFlash on page 169.

pTouch [Play] to listen to the notified chan-

nel. To return to the original channel, touch

within five minutes after the channel is

switched.

pTouch [Ignore] to stay tuned to the current

channel.

pTouch [Cancel] to cancel notifications re-

garding the game.

168

Chapter

27 Using the SiriusXM®satellite radio

pNotification messages will not be displayed

while you are listening to the channel that

is the target of SportsFlash or while the

Radio ID is displayed.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “System”screen appears.

3 Touch [AV Source Settings].

The following screen appears.

4 Touch [SiriusXM Settings].

The following screen appears.

5 Touch [SportsFlash] repeatedly until the

desired setting appears.

!On (default):

Activates the SportsFlash function.

!Off

Deactivates the SportsFlash function.

Selecting teams for

SportsFlash

pThis function is available only when

“SiriusXM”is selected as the source and

“SportsFlash”is set to “On”.

=For details, refer to Using the Sports-

Flash

™

function on page 168.

pUp to 50 teams can be registered as the tar-

get of SportsFlash.

pIf five prioritized teams are registered, noti-

fication messages for the teams other than

the prioritized teams may not be displayed.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “System”screen appears.

3 Touch [AV Source Settings].

The following screen appears.

4 Touch [SiriusXM Settings].

The following screen appears.

En 169

Chapter

Using the SiriusXM®satellite radio

5 Touch [SportsFlash List].

The “SportsFlash List”screen appears.

6 Touch [Edit List].

Available leagues and teams are displayed.

pTouch a league to narrow down the options

as necessary.

7 Touch the teams to register to the

SportsFlash List.

pA check mark appears for the selected

item.

!Touch [Clear All] to cancel all the selec-

tions.

8 Touch [Prioritize] to register the se-

lected teams as the prioritized teams.

pYou can select up to five prioritized teams

for SportsFlash.

p[Prioritize] is not available if not more than

five teams are registered in the SportsFlash

list. The teams are automatically registered

as the prioritized teams.

pIf five teams are already registered as the

prioritized teams, remove a check mark

from one of the teams in the list on the

“Prioritize List”screen before adding an-

other team.

Restoring the SiriusXM

settings to the default

You can restore the SiriusXM settings to the

default.

pThis setting is available only when you stop

your vehicle in a safe place and apply the

parking brake.

CAUTION

Do not turn off the engine while restoring the set-

tings.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “System”screen appears.

3 Touch [AV Source Settings].

The following screen appears.

4 Touch [SiriusXM Settings].

The following screen appears.

5 Touch [SiriusXM Reset].

The “SiriusXM Reset”screen appears.

6 Touch [Restore].

The settings are restored to the default.

pThe source is turned off and the Bluetooth

connection is disconnected before the pro-

cess starts.

Storing song information

to an iPod (iTunes Tagging)

=For details, refer to Storing song information

to an iPod (iTunes Tagging) on page 221.

170

Chapter

27 Using the SiriusXM®satellite radio

Operating with the

hardware buttons

Press the TRK button.

You can move up or down the preset channels

when the current channel is displayed.

You can skip files forward or backward when

the play time indicator is displayed.

Press and hold the TRK button.

You can move up or down channels by holding

down the button when the current channel is

displayed.

You can perform fast reverse or fast forward by

holding down the button when the play time

indicator is displayed.

En 171

Chapter

Using the SiriusXM®satellite radio

8100NEX 7100NEX 6100NEX

You can display the video image output by the

device connected to this product. This section

describes operations for an HDMI source.

pA High Speed HDMI®Cable (sold sepa-

rately) is required for connection.

=For details of the connection method,

refer to the Installation Manual.

CAUTION

For safety reasons, video images cannot be

viewed while your vehicle is in motion. To view

video images, you must stop in a safe place and

apply the parking brake.

Using the touch panel keys

132

1Displays the source list.

=For details, refer to Selecting a front

source on the source list on page 25.

2Displays the Time and date setting

screen.

=For details, refer to Setting the time and

date on page 221.

3Displays the Setting menu screen.

4Recalls equalizer curves.

=For details, refer to Using the equalizer

on page 202.

5Hides the touch panel keys.

Touching this area hides the touch panel keys.

pTouch anywhere on the LCD screen to

display the touch panel keys again.

6Displays the Phone menu screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the phone

menu on page 80.

7Changes the wide screen mode.

=For details, refer to Changing the wide

screen mode on page 223.

Reading the screen

1Current time and date

Starting procedure

1 Display the AV source selection screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Dis-

playing the AV operation screen on page 24.

2 Touch [HDMI] on the AV source selec-

tion screen.

The image is displayed on the screen.

3 Use the touch panel keys on the screen

to control the external unit.

=For details, refer to Using the touch panel

keys on page 172.

172

Chapter

28 Using an HDMI source

You can display the video image output by the

device connected to this product. This section

describes operations for an AUX source.

pA Mini-jack AV cable (CD-RM10) (sold sepa-

rately) is required for connection.

=For details of the connection method,

refer to the Installation Manual.

CAUTION

For safety reasons, video images cannot be

viewed while your vehicle is in motion. To view

video images, you must stop in a safe place and

apply the parking brake.

Using the touch panel keys

132

1Displays the source list.

=For details, refer to Selecting a front

source on the source list on page 25.

2Displays the Time and date setting

screen.

=For details, refer to Setting the time and

date on page 221.

3Displays the Setting menu screen.

4Recalls equalizer curves.

=For details, refer to Using the equalizer

on page 202.

5Hides the touch panel keys.

Touching this area hides the touch panel keys.

pTouch anywhere on the LCD screen to

display the touch panel keys again.

6Displays the Phone menu screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the phone

menu on page 80.

7Switches the operation screen.

=For details, refer to Switching the opera-

tion screen on page 174.

8Changes the wide screen mode.

=For details, refer to Changing the wide

screen mode on page 223.

Reading the screen

1Current time and date

Starting procedure

You can display the video image output by the

device connected to video input.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “System”screen appears.

3 Touch [Input/Output Settings].

The following screen appears.

En 173

Chapter

Using an AUX source

4 Confirm that “AUX Input”is turned on.

pThe default setting is “On”.

5 Display the AV source selection screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Dis-

playing the AV operation screen on page 24.

6 Touch [AUX] on the AV source selection

screen.

The image is displayed on the screen.

7 Use the touch panel keys on the screen

to control the external unit.

=For details, refer to Using the touch panel

keys on page 173.

Setting the video signal

When you connect this product to an AUX

equipment, select the suitable video signal

setting.

pYou can operate this function only for the

video signal input into the AUX input.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “Video Setup”screen appears.

3 Touch [Video Signal Setting].

The following screen appears.

4 Touch [AUX].

The pop-up menu appears.

5 Touch the item you want to set.

!Auto (default):

Adjusts the video signal setting automati-

cally.

!PAL:

Sets the video signal to PAL.

!NTSC:

Sets the video signal to NTSC.

!PAL-M:

Sets the video signal to PAL-M.

!PAL-N:

Sets the video signal to PAL-N.

!SECAM:

Sets the video signal to SECAM.

Switching the operation

screen

You can switch between the screen to operate

music files and that to operate video files.

%Touch the following key.

Switches between the screen to

operate video files and that to oper-

ate music files.

174

Chapter

29 Using an AUX source

You can display the video image output by the

device connected to this product.

=For details of the connection method, refer

to the Installation Manual.

CAUTION

For safety reasons, video images cannot be

viewed while your vehicle is in motion. To view

video images, you must stop in a safe place and

apply the parking brake.

Using the touch panel keys

132

1Displays the source list.

=For details, refer to Selecting a front

source on the source list on page 25.

2Displays the Time and date setting

screen.

=For details, refer to Setting the time and

date on page 221.

3Displays the Setting menu screen.

4Recalls equalizer curves.

=For details, refer to Using the equalizer

on page 202.

5Hides the touch panel keys.

Touching this area hides the touch panel keys.

pTouch anywhere on the LCD screen to

display the touch panel keys again.

6Displays the Phone menu screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the phone

menu on page 80.

7Changes the wide screen mode.

=For details, refer to Changing the wide

screen mode on page 223.

Reading the screen

1Current time and date

Starting procedure

You can display the video image output by the

device connected to video input.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “System”screen appears.

3 Touch [Input/Output Settings].

The following screen appears.

4 Touch [AV Input].

The pop-up menu appears.

5 Touch [Source].

The video image output by the connected ex-

ternal device can be displayed.

pIf “Source”is selected, “2nd Camera

Input”is automatically set to “Off”.

En 175

Chapter

Using AV input

6 Display the AV source selection screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Dis-

playing the AV operation screen on page 24.

7 Touch [AV] on the AV source selection

screen.

The image is displayed on the screen.

8 Use the touch panel keys on the screen

to control the external unit.

=For details, refer to Using the touch panel

keys on page 175.

Setting the video signal

When you connect this product to an AV

equipment, select the suitable video signal

setting.

pYou can operate this function only for the

video signal input into the AV input.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “Video Setup”screen appears.

3 Touch [Video Signal Setting].

The following screen appears.

4 Touch [AV].

The pop-up menu appears.

5 Touch the item you want to set.

!Auto (default):

Adjusts the video signal setting automati-

cally.

!PAL:

Sets the video signal to PAL.

!NTSC:

Sets the video signal to NTSC.

!PAL-M:

Sets the video signal to PAL-M.

!PAL-N:

Sets the video signal to PAL-N.

!SECAM:

Sets the video signal to SECAM.

176

Chapter

30 Using AV input

MIXTRAX is original technology for creating

non-stop mixes of selections from your audio

library, complete with DJ effects that make

them sound as if a DJ is right there with you

playing the music.

pYou can turn MIXTRAX on by touching

[MIXTRAX] on the playback screen of com-

pressed audio files.

=For details, refer to Using the touch

panel keys on page 111.

Touch panel keys

a8 8

1Exits the MIXTRAX screen.

2Displays the LinkGate screen.

Touch the desired item. Songs related to the

selected item are played.

3Specifies the BPM.

The original BPM is not displayed during play-

back.

4Displays the item selection screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Se-

lecting an item to play songs on page

177.

5Displays the playback list screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Se-

lecting songs not to be played on page

177.

6Sets to the original BPM (Beats Per Minute).

7Specifies the playback portion.

=For details of the operations, refer to

Specifying the playback portion on page

178.

8Touch to select a track.

Touch and hold to fast forward or rewind.

9Turns on or off the MIXTRAX original visual

display.

aPauses and starts playback.

bDisplays the item selected on the LinkGate

screen or item selection screen.

Selecting an item to play

songs

You can specify an item to play songs related

to it.

1 Touch the following key.

Displays the item selection screen.

2 Touch the following keys to select the

item.

Displays the MIX pattern list.

Displays the tag list.

Displays the file list.

3 Select an item in the list.

Songs related to the selected item are

played.

Selecting songs not to be

played

You can select items or songs not to be

played.

1 Touch the following key.

Displays the playback list screen.

En 177

Chapter

Using MIXTRAX

2 Touch the following key.

Displays the “Playback not al-

lowed”screen.

3 Touch [Songs], [Artists] or [Albums].

4 Touch the box on the left of the item or

song that you do not want to play.

An icon is displayed. Items displayed with the

icon will not be played.

#If you touch [Unselect All], all the selections

are canceled.

#If you touch [Select All], all the items are

selected.

Specifying the playback

portion

You can specify the playback portion.

%Touch the following key repeatedly

until the desired setting appears.

Changes the playback portion.

!(default):

Plays back a middle portion.

Plays back a long portion.

Plays back a short portion.

pThe most suitable sound effect is automati-

cally applied when switching to the next

song.

Setting the flash pattern

The flashing color changes with the changes

in the sound and bass levels.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “System”screen appears.

3 Touch [AV Source Settings].

The following screen appears.

4 Touch [MIXTRAX Settings].

5 Touch [Flash Pattern].

The pop-up menu appears.

6 Touch the item you want to set.

!Sound1 (default) to Sound6:

The flash pattern changes according to the

sound level. Select a desired mode.

!L-Pass1 to L-Pass6:

The flash pattern changes according to the

bass level. Select a desired mode.

!Random1:

The flash pattern changes randomly ac-

cording to the sound level mode and low

pass mode.

!Random2:

The flash pattern changes randomly ac-

cording to the sound level mode.

!Random3:

The flash pattern changes randomly ac-

cording to the low pass mode.

!Off:

The flash pattern does not flash.

178

Chapter

31 Using MIXTRAX

Navigation info window

You can set whether to display the guidance

information of the navigation on the AV opera-

tion screen.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “System”screen appears.

3 Touch [Navigation Related Settings].

The following screen appears.

4 Touch [Navigation info window] re-

peatedly until the desired setting appears.

!On (default):

Displays the navigation information bar.

!Off:

Does not display the navigation information

bar.

Setting automatic switching

to the navigation screen

You can set whether to automatically switch to

the navigation screen from the AV screen or

the Application screen when your vehicle ap-

proaches a guidance point such as an inter-

section.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “System”screen appears.

3 Touch [Navigation Related Settings].

The following screen appears.

4 Touch [AV/App Guide Mode] repeat-

edly until the desired setting appears.

!On (default):

Switches from the AV operation screen or

the Application screen to the map screen.

!Off:

Does not switch the screen.

Activating the Bluetooth

audio source

You need to activate the Bluetooth audio

source in order to use a Bluetooth audio

player.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “System”screen appears.

3 Touch [AV Source Settings].

The following screen appears.

En 179

Chapter

System settings

4 Touch [Bluetooth Audio] repeatedly

until the desired setting appears.

!On (default):

Activates the Bluetooth audio source.

!Off:

Deactivates the Bluetooth audio source.

Setting the ever scroll

When “Ever Scroll”is set to “On”, recorded

text information scrolls continuously in the

display. Set to “Off”if you prefer the informa-

tion to scroll just once.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “System”screen appears.

3 Touch [Ever Scroll] repeatedly until the

desired setting appears.

!Off (default):

Turns the ever scroll setting off.

!On:

Turns the ever scroll setting on.

Setting AV input

You can use external video equipment such as

portable players connected to this product

with this setting.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “System”screen appears.

3 Touch [Input/Output Settings].

The following screen appears.

4 Touch [AV Input].

The pop-up menu appears.

5 Touch the item you want to set.

!Off (default):

Deactivates the AV source.

!Source:

Displays the video image output by the con-

nected external device.

!Camera:

Displays the image output by the connected

external camera.

pIf “Camera”is selected, “2nd Camera

Input”is automatically set to “On”.

pIf “Off”or “Source”is selected, “2nd Cam-

era Input”is automatically set to “Off”.

Setting the rear view camera

The following two functions are available. A se-

parately sold rear view camera (e.g. ND-BC6)

is required for utilizing the rear view camera

function. (For details, consult your dealer.)

Rear view camera

This product features a function that automati-

cally switches to the full-screen image of the

rear view camera installed on your vehicle.

When the shift lever is in the REVERSE (R) po-

sition, the screen automatically switches to

full-screen rear view camera image.

180

Chapter

32 System settings

pIf the shift lever is aligned to the REVERSE

(R) position immediately after the system of

this product is started up, only the camera

image will be displayed and the parking as-

sist guidelines will not be displayed. The

parking assist guidelines will be displayed

on the camera image after a little while. Be

sure to check the conditions around the ve-

hicle even before the guidelines and the

message are displayed.

Camera for Camera View mode

Camera View can be displayed at all times

(e.g. when monitoring an attached trailer,

etc.). Please note that with this setting, the

camera image is not resized to fit, and that a

portion of what is seen by the camera is not

viewable.

CAUTION

Check to make sure settings for rear view camera

displays a mirror reversed image.

pImmediately verify whether the display

changes to a rear view camera image when

the shift lever is aligned to REVERSE (R)

from another position.

pWhen the screen changes to full-screen

rear view camera image during normal

driving, switch to the opposite setting in

“Reverse Gear Setting”.

Setting rear view camera

activation

To view images of the rear view camera on the

screen of this product, “Back Camera Input”

needs to be set to “On”.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “System”screen appears.

3 Touch [Camera settings].

The following screen appears.

4 Touch [Back Camera Input] repeatedly

until the desired setting appears.

!Off (default):

Turns the back camera input setting off.

!On:

Turns the back camera input setting on.

Setting the polarity of the rear

view camera

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “System”screen appears.

3 Touch [Camera settings].

The following screen appears.

4 Touch [Reverse Gear Setting] repeat-

edly until the desired setting appears.

!Battery (default):

When the polarity of the connected lead is

positive while the shift lever is in the RE-

VERSE (R) position.

En 181

Chapter

System settings

!Ground:

When the polarity of the connected lead is

negative while the shift lever is in the RE-

VERSE (R) position.

When the shift lever is aligned to the RE-

VERSE (R) position after setting the rear view

camera, the rear view image appears.

Setting the reversed image

display for the rear view image

Rear view camera images are displayed re-

versed (as mirror images) on the front screen

except when a rear view camera that can out-

put images in the correct direction is used.

You can set whether to reverse the rear view

camera images to be displayed on the front

screen.

pThis setting is available only when you stop

your vehicle in a safe place and apply the

parking brake.

pThis function is available only when “Back

Camera Input”is “On”.

=For details, refer to Setting rear view

camera activation on page 181.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “System”screen appears.

3 Touch [Camera settings].

The following screen appears.

4 Touch [Back Camera: Reverse Video] re-

peatedly until the desired setting appears.

!Off (default):

Does not reverse the rear view camera

images.

!On:

Reverses the rear view camera images.

Setting the camera for

Camera View mode

To display Camera View at all times, “Camera

View”needs to be set to “On”.

pTo set the rear view camera for Camera

View mode, “Back Camera Input”needs

to be set to “On”.

=For details, refer to Setting rear view

camera activation on page 181.

pTo set the second camera for Camera

View mode, set “AV Input”to “Camera”or

set “2nd Camera Input”to “On”.

=For details, refer to Setting AV input on

page 180.

=For details, refer to Setting the second

camera input on page 184.

pYou can also turn this function on by

touching [Camera View] on the AV

source selection screen or in the source

list.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “System”screen appears.

3 Touch [Camera settings].

The following screen appears.

182

Chapter

32 System settings

4 Touch [Camera View] repeatedly until

the desired setting appears.

!Off (default):

Turns the camera view setting off.

!On:

Turns the camera view setting on.

If no operations are performed for seven sec-

onds after the AV operation screen is dis-

played, the camera view will appear

automatically.

pIf you touch the screen while the camera

view is displayed, the displayed image will

turn off temporarily.

When the camera view of both rear view cam-

era and second camera are available, the key

to switch the display appears.

1Switches the display between rear view

image and second camera image.

Displaying the parking

assist guidelines

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “System”screen appears.

3 Touch [Camera settings].

The following screen appears.

4 Touch [Parking Assist Guide] repeatedly

until the desired setting appears.

!Off (default):

Hides the guidelines.

!On:

Displays the guidelines.

When the shift lever is aligned to the RE-

VERSE (R) position after setting the rear view

camera, the rear view image appears.

pIf you press and hold the MAP button, the

rear view image disappears.

Setting guidelines on the

rear view image

CAUTION

!When adjusting the guidelines, be sure to

park the vehicle in a safe place and apply the

parking brake.

!Before getting out of the car to place the

markings, be sure to turn the ignition switch

off (ACC OFF).

!The range projected by the rear view camera

is limited. Also, the vehicle width and distance

guidelines displayed on the rear view camera

image may differ from the actual vehicle

width and distance. (The guidelines are

straight lines.)

En 183

Chapter

System settings

!The image quality may deteriorate depending

on the usage environment, such as at night or

in dark surroundings.

1 Park your vehicle in a safe place and

apply the parking brake.

2 Using packing tape or similar, place

markings approximately 25 cm (9-7/8 in.)

from each side of the vehicle, and approxi-

mately 50 cm (1 ft. 8 in.) and 2 m (6 ft. 7 in.)

from the rear bumper.

Rear bumper

25 cm

(9-7/8 in.)

25 cm

(9-7/8 in.)

50 cm (1 ft. 8 in.)

2 m (6 ft. 7 in.)

Markings

3 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

4 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “System”screen appears.

5 Touch [Camera settings].

The following screen appears.

6 Touch [Parking Assist Guide Adjust].

The following screen appears.

7 Set the guidelines by dragging the four

points.

8 Touch the following keys to adjust the

position of the point if necessary.

Moves the point to the left.

Moves the point to the right.

Moves the point upward.

Moves the point downward.

Extends the line to the left and right

from the current center point of the dis-

tance guideline. The adjustment points

on the lateral coordinates at both ends

will also move.

Shortens the line from the left and right

to the current center point of the dis-

tance guideline. The adjustment points

on the lateral coordinates at both ends

will also move.

Default

Resets the settings of the distance and

vehicle width guidelines and adjust-

ment points to the default.

pWhen a point is moved, the distance from

the initial value is displayed at the bottom

of the screen.

Setting the second camera

input

You can view images of the second camera (a

front camera etc.) on the screen of this pro-

duct.

184

Chapter

32 System settings

Setting the second camera

activation

pTo view images of the second camera on

the screen of this product, “2nd Camera

Input”needs to be set to “On”.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “System”screen appears.

3 Touch [Camera settings].

The following screen appears.

4 Touch [2nd Camera Input] repeatedly

until the desired setting appears.

!Off (default):

Turns the second camera input setting off.

!On:

Turns the second camera input setting on.

pThe confirmation message appears if set-

ting “2nd Camera Input”to “On”while the

AV source is on. The AV source will turn off

if “Yes”is selected, and “2nd Camera

Input”will be set to “On”. Select “No”to

cancel setting “2nd Camera Input”to

“On”.

pIf “On”is selected, “AV Input”is automati-

cally set to “Camera”.

pIf “Off”is selected, “AV Input”is automati-

cally set to “Off”.

Setting the reversed image setting

for the second camera input image

Second camera images are displayed reversed

(as mirror images) on the front screen except

when a second view camera that can output

images in the correct direction is used. You

can set whether to reverse the second camera

images to be displayed on the front screen.

pThis setting is available only when you stop

your vehicle in a safe place and apply the

parking brake.

pThis function is available when “2nd Cam-

era Input”is “On”or “AV Input”is set to

“Camera”.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “System”screen appears.

3 Touch [Camera settings].

The following screen appears.

4 Touch [2nd Camera: Reverse video] re-

peatedly until the desired setting appears.

!Off (default):

Does not reverse the second camera

images.

!On:

Reverses the second camera images.

Turning off the demo screen

If the demo screen appears, perform the fol-

lowing procedure to turn off the demo screen.

En 185

Chapter

System settings

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “System”screen appears.

3 Touch [Demo Mode] repeatedly until

the desired setting appears.

!On (default):

Displays the demo screen.

!Off:

Hides the demo screen.

Selecting the system language

The system language can be selected.

pThe languages used in the program and

voice guidance can be set on the “Regio-

nal”screen.

=For details, refer to Customizing the na-

vigation settings on page 62.

!The language can be changed for the fol-

lowing:

—The “Audio”screen

—The “System”screen

—The “Video Setup”screen

—The “Bluetooth”screen

—Language for messages

Some operations on this product are

prohibited from use while driving or re-

quire careful attention when operated.

In such cases, a caution message will

appear on the display. You can change

the language for caution messages with

this setting.

!If the embedded language and the selected

language setting are not the same, text in-

formation may not display properly.

!Some characters may not be displayed

properly.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “System”screen appears.

3 Touch [System Language].

The pop-up menu appears.

4 Touch the desired language.

After the language is selected, the previous

screen returns.

Setting the keyboard

language with the

application for iPhone

You can use the keyboard in AppRadio Mode

by setting the language of the keyboard for

iPhone.

pThis function is only available in AppRadio

Mode on the iPhone.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “System”screen appears.

3 Touch [Keyboard].

The pop-up menu appears.

4 Touch the desired language.

After the language is selected, the previous

screen returns.

Setting the beep sound

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

186

Chapter

32 System settings

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “System”screen appears.

3 Touch [Beep Tone] repeatedly until the

desired setting appears.

!On (default):

Sounds a beep.

!Off:

Does not sound a beep.

Adjusting the response

positions of the touch panel

(touch panel calibration)

7100NEX 6100NEX 5100NEX

If you feel that the touch panel keys on the

screen deviate from the actual positions that

respond to your touch, adjust the response po-

sitions of the touch panel screen.

pThis setting is available only when you stop

your vehicle in a safe place and apply the

parking brake.

pDo not use sharp pointed tools such as a

ballpoint or mechanical pen, which could

damage the screen.

pDo not turn off the engine while saving the

adjusted position data.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “System”screen appears.

3 Touch [Touch Panel Calibration].

The touch panel adjustment screen appears.

4 Touch two corners of the screen along

the arrows, and then touch the centers of

two + marks at the same time twice.

5 Press the HOME button.

The adjustment results are saved.

6 Press the HOME button once again.

Proceed to 16-point adjustment.

#If you press and hold the HOME button, the

adjustment is canceled.

7 Gently touch the center of the + mark

displayed on the screen.

The target indicates the order.

After you touch all marks, the adjusted posi-

tion data is saved.

#If you press the HOME button, the previous

adjustment position returns.

#If you press and hold the HOME button, the

adjustment is canceled.

8 Press and hold the HOME button.

The adjustment results are saved.

Setting the dimmer function

You can specify the timing that the dimmer

function is to be turned on.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “System”screen appears.

3 Touch [Dimmer Settings].

The following screen appears.

En 187

Chapter

System settings

4 Touch [Dimmer Trigger].

The pop-up menu appears.

5 Touch the item you want to set.

!Auto (default):

Activates the dimmer function when the ve-

hicle’s headlights are on (nighttime).

!Manual:

Enables to set whether to activate the dim-

mer function.

!Time:

Enables to set the duration of time for the

dimmer function to be active.

pIf “Manual”is selected, set whether to acti-

vate the dimmer function.

=For details, refer to Setting whether to ac-

tivate the dimmer function on page 188.

pIf “Time”is selected, specify the duration

for the dimmer function to be active.

=For details, refer to Setting the duration

of time for the dimmer function to be ac-

tive on page 188.

Setting whether to activate

the dimmer function

You can set whether to activate the dimmer

function at nighttime.

pThis function is available only when “Dim-

mer Trigger”is set to “Manual”.

=For details, refer to Setting the dimmer

function on page 187.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “System”screen appears.

3 Touch [Dimmer Settings].

The following screen appears.

4 Touch [Day/Night].

The pop-up menu appears.

5 Touch the item you want to set.

!Day (default):

Deactivates the dimmer function.

!Night:

Activates the dimmer function.

Setting the duration of

time for the dimmer

function to be active

You can set the duration of time for the dim-

mer function to be active.

pThis function is available only when “Dim-

mer Trigger”is set to “Time”.

=For details, refer to Setting the dimmer

function on page 187.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “System”screen appears.

3 Touch [Dimmer Settings].

The following screen appears.

188

Chapter

32 System settings

4 Touch [Dimmer Duration].

The duration setting bar appears.

5 Touch the desired points on the dura-

tion setting bar, or slide the cursors to spe-

cify the start time and the end time,

respectively.

pThe time display format depends on the

“Time Format”setting.

pThe value displayed at the center of the

duration setting bar (“12”for 12-hour format

and “00”for 24-hour format) indicates mid-

night. The values to the left of the value at

the center are for the afternoon, and the va-

lues to the right of value at the center are

for the morning.

pThe default values are “18:00”(start time)

and “6:00”(end time).

pThe value can be changed in 15-minute

steps.

Adjusting the picture

You can adjust the picture for each source, the

Application screen, and rear view camera.

CAUTION

For safety reasons, you cannot use some of these

functions while your vehicle is in motion. To en-

able these functions, you must stop in a safe

place and apply the parking brake. Refer to Im-

portant Information for the User (a separate man-

ual).

1 Display the screen you wish to adjust.

2 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

3 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “System”screen appears.

4 Touch [Picture Adjustment].

The following screen appears.

5 Touch any of the following keys to se-

lect the function to be adjusted.

Picture adjustment items are displayed.

!Brightness:

Adjusts the black intensity.

!Contrast:

Adjusts the contrast.

!Color:

Adjusts the color saturation.

!Hue:

Adjusts the tone of color (which color is em-

phasized, red or green).

!Dimmer Level:

Adjusts the brightness of the display.

!Temperature:

Adjusts the color temperature, resulting in

a better white balance.

pYou can adjust Hue only when the color

system is set to NTSC.

#If you touch [Rear View]or[2nd Camera],

the mode changes to the selected camera mode.

By touching [Source], [Navi]or[Apps], you can

return to the selected mode.

En 189

Chapter

System settings

6 Touch the following keys to adjust the

selected item.

Decreases the level of the selected

item.

Increases the level of the selected item.

Selects the adjustable previous item.

Selects the adjustable next item.

Each time you touch the key, the level of the

selected item increases or decreases.

p“Brightness”,“Contrast”,“Color”and

“Hue”can be adjusted from “–24”to “+24”.

p“Dimmer Level”can be adjusted from “+1”

to “+48”.

p“Temperature”can be adjusted from “–3”

to “+3”.

pThe adjustments of “Brightness”,“Con-

trast”, and “Dimmer Level”are stored se-

parately for the On/Off status of the dimmer

function. These are switched automatically

depending on whether the dimmer function

is on or off.

=For details on setting the dimmer func-

tion, refer to Setting the dimmer function

on page 187.

pThe picture adjustment may not be avail-

able with some rear view cameras.

pThe setting contents can be memorized se-

parately for the following screens and video

images.

—DVD,Video-CD and Disc

—AV and external camera

—USB (Video) and USB (JPEG)

—SD (Video) and SD (JPEG)

—iPod (iPod with a 30-pin connector)

—iPod (Video) and AppRadio Mode (iPod

with a 30-pin connector)

—HDMI and AppRadio Mode (HDMI) (for

AVIC-8100NEX, AVIC-7100NEX and

AVIC-6100NEX)

—Android Auto (for AVIC-8100NEX and

AVIC-7100NEX)

—MirrorLink

—AUX

—Internal navigation system, MIXTRAX,

images output from the external device

—Rear view camera

Displaying the firmware

version

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “System”screen appears.

3 Touch [System Information].

The following screen appears.

4 Touch [Firmware Information].

The “Firmware Information”screen appears.

pYou can check the open source licenses of

the functions that this product is equipped

with under “License”on the “Firmware In-

formation”screen.

Updating firmware

CAUTION

!Never turn this product off, eject the SD mem-

ory card or disconnect the USB storage device

while the firmware is being updated.

!You can only update the firmware when the ve-

hicle is stopped and the parking brake is en-

gaged.

190

Chapter

32 System settings

pUse the USB port1 to update the firmware

using a USB storage device.

pSD memory card is available for AVIC-

8100NEX and AVIC-7100NEX.

1 Download the firmware update files.

2 Connect a blank (formatted) SD mem-

ory card or USB storage device to your

computer, and then locate the correct up-

date file and copy it onto the SD memory

card or USB storage device.

3 Turn the source off.

=For details, refer to Turning off the AV source

on page 25.

4 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

5 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “System”screen appears.

6 Touch [System Information].

The following screen appears.

7 Touch [Firmware Update].

The “Firmware Update”screen appears.

8 Touch [Continue] to display the data

transfer mode.

pFollow the on-screen instructions to finish

updating the firmware.

pThis product will reset automatically after

the firmware update is completed if the up-

date is successful.

pWhen the firmware update starts, the

source is turned off and the Bluetooth con-

nection is disconnected.

pIf an error message appears on the screen,

touch [Continue] to proceed and start the

recovery sequence.

Checking sensor learning

status and driving status

pThis product can automatically use its sen-

sor memory based on the outer dimensions

of the tires.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “System”screen appears.

3 Touch [System Information].

The following screen appears.

4 Touch [3D Calibration Status].

The “3D Calibration Status”screen appears.

1Learning

Indicates the current driving mode.

2Distance

Indicates driving distance.

En 191

Chapter

System settings

3Acceleration or deceleration/Rotational

speed

Indicates the acceleration or deceleration

velocity of your vehicle. The rotational

speed when your vehicle turns to the left or

right is also shown.

4Inclination

Indicates the incline of the street that you

are currently on.

5Speed Pulse

Indicates the total number of speed pulses.

6Degree of learning

Sensor learning situations for distance

(Distance), right turns (Right Turn), left

turns (Left Turn) and 3D detection (3D) are

indicated by the length of the bars.

pWhen the tires have been changed or

chains have been fitted, turning on the

Speed Pulse allows the system to detect

the fact that the tire diameter has chan-

ged, and automatically replaces the

value for calculating distance.

pIf a separately sold speed pulse genera-

tor (ND-PG1) is connected, the distance

calculation value cannot be replaced

automatically.

Clearing the status

You can delete the learned results stored in

“Distance”,“Speed Pulse”or “Learning”.

1 Touch [Distance] or [Speed Pulse].

A message confirming whether to erase the

data appears.

2 Touch [Yes].

The results stored in “Distance”or “Speed

Pulse”are cleared.

3 Touch [Learning].

The pop-up menu appears.

4 Touch [Reset All].

All learned results are cleared.

pTouch [Reset All] for the following cases:

!After changing the installation position

of the navigation system

!After changing the installation angle of

the navigation system

!After moving the navigation system to

another vehicle

#If you touch [Reset Distance], all learned re-

sults stored in “Distance”are cleared.

Checking the connections

of leads

Check that the leads are properly connected

between this product and vehicle. Also check

whether they are connected in the correct po-

sitions.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “System”screen appears.

3 Touch [System Information].

The following screen appears.

4 Touch [Connection Status].

The “Connection Status”screen appears.

192

Chapter

32 System settings

1GPS Antenna

Indicates the connection status of the GPS

antenna, the reception sensitivity, and from

how many satellites the signal is received.

Color Signal com-

munication

Used in posi-

tioning

Orange Yes Yes

Yellow Yes No

pWhen the GPS antenna is connected to

this product, “OK”is displayed. When

the GPS antenna is not connected to

this product, “NOK”is displayed.

pIf reception is poor, please change the

installation position of the GPS antenna.

2Positioning Status

Displays the positioning status (3D posi-

tioning, 2D positioning, or no positioning),

the number of satellites used for position-

ing (orange), and the number of satellites

whose signal has been received (yellow). If

signals from more than three satellites are

received, the current location can be mea-

sured.

=For details, refer to Positioning technol-

ogy on page 236.

3Installation

Indicates whether the installation position

of this product is correct or not. If installed

correctly, “OK”appears. When this product

is installed at an extreme angle exceeding

the limitation of the installing angle, “NOK

(Inst. Angle)”will be displayed. When the

angle of this product has been changed,

“NOK(Vibration)”will be displayed.

4Speed Pulse

The Speed Pulse value detected by this pro-

duct is shown. “0”is shown while the vehi-

cle is stationary.

5Illumination

When the headlights or small lamps of the

vehicle are on, “ON”is displayed. When the

small lamps of the vehicle are off, “OFF”is

displayed. (If the orange/white lead is not

connected, “OFF”appears.)

6Back Signal

When the shift lever is shifted to “R”, the

signal switches to “High”or “Low”. (One of

these is displayed depending on the vehi-

cle.)

7iDataLink

When the optional iDatalink adapter is con-

nected and the protocol version matches,

“OK”is displayed. If the version does not

match, “Unsupported Version”is dis-

played. If the optional iDatalink adapter is

not connected, “NOK”is displayed.

En 193

Chapter

System settings

Using fader/balance

adjustment

You can select a fader/balance setting that

provides an ideal listening environment in all

occupied seats.

pThis function is available only when main

audio is available.

pThis function is available only when “Rear

Speaker”is set to “On”.

=For details, refer to Adjusting the front

and rear speaker output on page 198.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “Audio”screen appears.

3 Touch [Fader/Balance].

The “Fader/Balance”screen appears.

4 Touch the following keys to adjust the

front/rear speaker balance.

Moves towards the front.

Moves towards the rear.

Each time you touch the keys, the front/rear

speaker balance moves towards the front or

rear.

p“Front25”to “Rear25”is displayed as the

front/rear speaker balance moves from the

front to rear.

pThe default setting is “F/R 0 L/R 0”.

pSet “Front”and “Rear”to “0”when using a

dual speaker system.

5 Touch the following keys to adjust the

left/right speaker balance.

Moves towards the left.

Moves towards the right.

Each time you touch the keys, the left/right

speaker balance moves towards the left or

right.

p“Left25”to “Right25”is displayed as the

left/right speaker balance moves from the

left to right.

pThe default setting is “L/R 0”.

pYou can also set the fader/balance by drag-

ging the point on the displayed table.

Using balance adjustment

You can adjust the balance between right/left

sound output.

pThis function is available only when main

audio is available.

pThis function is available only when “Rear

Speaker”is set to “Off”.

=For details, refer to Adjusting the front

and rear speaker output on page 198.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “Audio”screen appears.

3 Touch [Balance].

The “Fader/Balance”screen appears.

194

Chapter

33 Audio adjustments

4 Touch the following keys to adjust the

left/right speaker balance.

Moves towards the left.

Moves towards the right.

Each time you touch the keys, the left/right

speaker balance moves towards the left or

right.

p“Left25”to “Right25”is displayed as the

left/right speaker balance moves from the

left to right.

pThe default setting is “L/R 0”.

pYou can also set the fader/balance by drag-

ging the point on the displayed table.

Switching sound muting/

attenuation

You can automatically mute or attenuate the

AV source volume and the application volume

when the navigation outputs the guidance

voice.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “Audio”screen appears.

3 Touch [Mute Level].

The pop-up menu appears.

4 Touch the item you want to set.

!ATT (default):

The volume becomes 1/10.

!Mute:

The volume becomes 0.

!Off:

The volume does not change.

Adjusting source levels

The SLA (source level adjustment) function ad-

justs the volume level of each source to pre-

vent radical changes in volume when

switching between sources.

pThis function is available only when main

audio is available.

pSettings are based on the FM tuner volume

level, which remains unchanged.

pThis function is not available when the FM

tuner is selected as the AV source.

1 Compare the FM tuner volume level

with the level of the source you want to

adjust.

2 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

3 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “Audio”screen appears.

4 Touch [Source Level Adjuster].

The “Source Level Adjuster”screen appears.

5 Touch the following keys to adjust the

source volume.

Increases the source volume.

Decreases the source volume.

pIf you directly touch the area where the cur-

sor can be moved, the SLA setting will be

changed to the value of the touched point.

p“+4”to “–4”is displayed as the source vo-

lume is increased or decreased.

pThe default setting is “0”.

En 195

Chapter

Audio adjustments

The following AV sources are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically.

8100NEX 7100NEX 6100NEX

Required cable

(sold separately)

Smartphone Setup

AV sources

Device Connection

iPod / iPhone with a

30-pin connector

CD-IU201V iPhone/iPod USB

USB1

iPod1

aha

Pandora

CD-IU201S iPhone/iPod USB

USB1

aha

Pandora

iPod1

AppRadio Mode

iPod / iPhone with a

Lightning connector

!CD-IH202

!CD-IU52

!Lightning Digital

AV Adapter

iPhone/iPod Digital AV adapter

aha

Pandora

AppRadio Mode

HDMI

CD-IU52 iPhone/iPod USB

iPod1

aha

Pandora

Android device

CD-MU200 Others USB Android Auto (*1)

MirrorLink

CD-AH200 Others HDMI

aha

Pandora

AppRadio Mode

HDMI

(*1) For AVIC-8100NEX and AVIC-7100NEX

196

Chapter

33 Audio adjustments

5100NEX

Required cable

(sold separately)

Smartphone Setup

AV sources

Device Connection

iPod / iPhone with a

30-pin connector

CD-IU201V iPhone/iPod USB

USB1

iPod1

aha

Pandora

CD-IU201S iPhone/iPod USB

USB1

aha

Pandora

iPod1

AppRadio Mode

iPod / iPhone with a

Lightning connector

!CD-IV202AV

!CD-IU52

!Lightning to VGA

Adapter

iPhone/iPod VGA adapter

aha

Pandora

AppRadio Mode

Bluetooth Audio

CD-IU52 iPhone/iPod USB

iPod1

aha

Pandora

pWhen a USB storage device is connected to

USB port 1 or USB port 2, the source level

adjustment volume is automatically set to

the same level as the USB port to which the

device is connected. The source level ad-

justment volume that is automatically set

varies depending on whether the device is

connected to USB port 1 or USB port 2.

pWhen an iPod / iPhone with a Lightning

connector is connected to USB port 1 or

USB port 2 using a USB interface cable for

iPod / iPhone (CD-IU52) (sold separately),

the source level adjustment volume is auto-

matically set to the same level as the USB

port to which the iPod / iPhone with a Light-

ning connector is connected. The source

level adjustment volume that is automati-

cally set varies depending on whether the

iPod / iPhone with a Lightning connector is

connected to USB port 1 or USB port 2.

pWhen an Android Auto-compatible device

(for AVIC-8100NEX and AVIC-7100NEX) or a

MirrorLink device is connected to USB port

2, the source level adjustment volume is

automatically set to the same level as USB

port 2.

En 197

Chapter

Audio adjustments

Adjusting the filter

The following adjustments can be made dur-

ing filter adjustments. Make the appropriate

adjustments for the reproduced frequency

band and characteristics of the connected

speaker unit.

20 1 k

10 k

Frequency (Hz)

Level (dB)

100

1Reproduced frequency band

2Slope adjustment

3Cut-off frequency of the LPF

4Cut-off frequency of the HPF

Adjusting the front and rear

speaker output

You can set the frequency range for the sound

output from the front and rear speakers.

pThis function is available only when main

audio is available.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “Audio”screen appears.

3 Confirm that “Rear Speaker”is set to

“On”.

pThe default setting is “On”.

4 Touch [Crossover].

The “Cutoff”screen appears.

5 Touch the following keys to select

“Front”or “Rear”.

Selects the adjustable previous speak-

er.

Selects the adjustable next speaker.

6 Touch [HPF] to turn on.

7 Drag the line graph horizontally to ad-

just the range of cut-off frequency from

“50”Hz to “200”Hz.

pThe default setting is “100”Hz.

8 Drag the tip of the slope to adjust the

range of level between “–6”dB/oct and

“–18”dB/oct.

pThe default setting is “–12”dB/oct.

Using the subwoofer output

This product is equipped with a subwoofer out-

put mechanism, which can be turned on or

off.

pThis function is available only when main

audio is available.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “Audio”screen appears.

3 Touch [Subwoofer] to set the subwoo-

fer output “On”.

pThe default setting is “Off”.

4 Touch [Subwoofer Settings].

The “Cutoff”screen appears.

198

Chapter

33 Audio adjustments

5 Touch the following keys to select

“Subwoofer”.

Selects the adjustable previous speak-

er.

Selects the adjustable next speaker.

6 Touch [LPF] to turn on.

7 Touch the following keys to select the

phase of subwoofer output.

Sets the phase of subwoofer output to

normal.

Sets the phase of subwoofer output to

reverse.

8 Drag the line graph horizontally to ad-

just the range of cut-off frequency from

“50”Hz to “200”Hz.

pThe default setting is “100”Hz.

9 Drag the tip of the slope to adjust the

range of level between “–6”dB/oct and

“–18”dB/oct.

pThe default setting is “–18”dB/oct.

Selecting the listening

position

You can select a listening position that you

want to make as the center of sound effects.

pThis function is available only when main

audio is available.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “Audio”screen appears.

3 Touch [Listening Position].

The “Listening Position”screen appears.

4 Touch the desired position.

!Off (default):

Changes the listening position setting to

off.

!Front:

Changes the listening position setting to

front.

!Front-L:

Changes the listening position setting to

front left.

!Front-R:

Changes the listening position setting to

front right.

!All:

Changes the listening position setting to

all.

Adjusting the speaker

output levels finely

Fine adjustments of the speaker output level

can be made by listening to audio output.

pThis function is available only when main

audio is available.

pThis function is available only when “Rear

Speaker”is set to “On”.

=For details, refer to Adjusting the front

and rear speaker output on page 198.

pThis function is available only when “Sub-

woofer”is set to “On”.

=For details, refer to Using the subwoofer

output on page 198.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “Audio”screen appears.

En 199

Chapter

Audio adjustments

3 Touch [Speaker Level].

The “Speaker Level”screen appears.

4 Touch the following keys to select the

listening position if necessary.

Selects the listening position.

!Off:

Changes the listening position setting to

off.

!Front Left:

Changes the listening position setting to

front left.

!Front Right:

Changes the listening position setting to

front right.

!Front:

Changes the listening position setting to

front.

!All:

Changes the listening position setting to

all.

pIf you change the listening position setting,

the output levels of all the speakers will

change in conjunction with the setting.

5 Touch the following keys to adjust the

speaker output level.

Decreases the speaker level.

Increases the speaker level.

p“–24”dB to “10”dB is displayed as the dis-

tance to be corrected is increased or de-

creased.

!Front Left:

Changes the speaker level of the front left

speaker.

!Front Right:

Changes the speaker level of the front right

speaker.

!Rear Left:

Changes the speaker level of the rear left

speaker.

!Rear Right:

Changes the speaker level of the rear right

speaker.

!Subwoofer:

Changes the speaker level of the subwoofer

speaker.

#If you touch [Apply Auto EQ], the result of

“A-EQ&TA Measurement”will be applied to the

speaker level setting.

pTo use this function, the vehicle’s acoustics

must be measured in advance.

Adjusting the time alignment

By adjusting the distance from each speaker

to the listening position, time alignment is

able to correct the time required for sound to

reach the listening position.

pThis function is available only when main

audio is available.

pThis function is available only when “Rear

Speaker”is set to “On”.

=For details, refer to Adjusting the front

and rear speaker output on page 198.

pThis function is available only when “Sub-

woofer”is set to “On”.

=For details, refer to Using the subwoofer

output on page 198.

pThis function is available only when the lis-

tening position setting is set to “Front Left”

or “Front Right”.

=For details, refer to Selecting the listen-

ing position on page 199.

1 Measure the distance between the

head of the listener and each speaker unit.

2 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

200

Chapter

33 Audio adjustments

3 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “Audio”screen appears.

4 Touch [Time Alignment].

The “Time Alignment”screen appears.

5 Touch the following keys to select the

listening position if necessary.

Selects the listening position.

!Off:

Changes the listening position setting to

off.

!Front Left:

Changes the listening position setting to

front left.

!Front Right:

Changes the listening position setting to

front right.

!Front:

Changes the listening position setting to

front.

!All:

Changes the listening position setting to

all.

pIf you change the listening position setting,

the output levels of all the speakers will

change in conjunction with the setting.

6 Touch the following keys to input the

distance between the selected speaker and

the listening position.

Decreases the distance between the se-

lected speaker and the selected listen-

ing position.

Increases the distance between the se-

lected speaker and the selected listen-

ing position.

p“0.0”inch to “200.0”inch is displayed as

the distance to be corrected is increased or

decreased.

!Front Left:

Changes the distance between the front left

speaker and the selected listening position.

!Front Right:

Changes the distance between the front

right speaker and the selected listening po-

sition.

!Rear Left:

Changes the distance between the rear left

speaker and the selected listening position.

!Rear Right:

Changes the distance between the rear

right speaker and the selected listening po-

sition.

!Subwoofer:

Changes the distance between the subwoo-

fer speaker and the selected listening posi-

tion.

#If you touch [TA On], the time alignment is

turned off.

#If you touch [Apply Auto EQ], the result of

“A-EQ&TA Measurement”will be applied to the

time alignment setting.

pTo use this function, the vehicle’s acoustics

must be measured in advance.

En 201

Chapter

Audio adjustments

Using the automatic sound

levelizer

During driving, noise in the car changes ac-

cording to the driving speed and road condi-

tions. ASL (automatic sound levelizer)

monitors such varying noise and automati-

cally increases the volume level, if this noise

becomes greater. The sensitivity (variation of

volume level to noise level) of ASL can be set

to one of five levels.

pThis function is available only when main

audio is available.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “Audio”screen appears.

3 Touch [ASL].

The “ASL”screen appears.

4 Touch the item you want to set.

!Off (default):

Turns the ASL setting off.

!LOW:

Changes the ASL level to low.

!MID-LOW:

Changes the ASL level to mid-low.

!MID:

Changes the ASL level to mid.

!MID-HIGH:

Changes the ASL level to mid-high.

!HIGH:

Changes the ASL level to high.

Using the equalizer

The equalizer lets you adjust equalization to

match the vehicle interior acoustic character-

istics as desired.

Recalling equalizer curves

There are seven stored equalizer curves that

you can easily recall at any time. Here is a list

of the equalizer curves:

Equalizer curve

S.Bass is a curve in which only low-pitched sound is

boosted.

Powerful is a curve in which low- and high-pitched

sounds are boosted.

Natural is a curve in which low- and high-pitched

sounds are slightly boosted.

Vocal is a curve in which the midrange, which is the

human vocal range, is boosted.

Flat is a flat curve in which nothing is boosted.

Custom1 is an adjusted equalizer curve that you cre-

ate. If you select this curve, the effect is applied to all

AV sources.

Custom2 is an adjusted equalizer curve that you cre-

ate. If you select this curve, the effect is applied to all

AV sources.

pThis function is available only when main

audio is available.

pThe default setting is “Powerful”.

pWhen “Flat”is selected, no supplement or

correction is made to the sound. This is

useful to check the effect of the equalizer

curves by switching alternatively between

“Flat”and a set equalizer curve.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “Audio”screen appears.

3 Touch [Graphic EQ].

The “Graphic EQ”screen appears.

4 Touch the equalizer you want.

202

Chapter

33 Audio adjustments

Customizing the equalizer curves

You can adjust the currently selected equalizer

curve setting as desired. Adjustments can be

made with a 13-band graphic equalizer.

pThis function is available only when main

audio is available.

pIf you make adjustments when a curve “S.

Bass”,“Powerful”,“Natural”,“Vocal”,or

“Flat”is selected, the equalizer curve set-

tings will be changed to “Custom1”auto-

matically.

pIf you make adjustments when the “Cus-

tom2”curve is selected for example, the

“Custom2”curve will be updated.

p“Custom1”and “Custom2”curves can be

created common to all sources.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “Audio”screen appears.

3 Touch [Graphic EQ].

The “Graphic EQ”screen appears.

4 Touch one of the keys to select a curve

that you want to use as the basis of custo-

mizing.

5 Touch the frequency for which you

want to adjust the level.

pIf you trail a finger across the bars of multi-

ple equalizer bands, the equalizer curve set-

tings will be set to the value of the touched

point on each bar.

Using the auto-adjusted equalizer

You can set the auto-adjusted equalizer to suit

the vehicle’s acoustics. To use this function,

the vehicle’s acoustics must be measured in

advance.

=For details of the operations, refer to Adjust-

ing the equalizer curve automatically (Auto

EQ) on page 203.

pTo manually adjust the equalizer curve, set

“Auto EQ&TA”to “Off”.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “Audio”screen appears.

3 Touch [Auto EQ&TA] repeatedly until

the desired setting appears.

!Off (default):

Turns the Auto EQ&TA setting off.

!On:

Turns the Auto EQ&TA setting on.

Adjusting the equalizer curve

automatically (Auto EQ)

By measuring the vehicle’s acoustics, the

equalizer curve can be adjusted automatically

to suit the vehicle interior.

WARNING

A loud tone (noise) may be emitted from the

speakers when measuring the vehicle’s acous-

tics. Never perform Auto EQ measurement while

driving.

CAUTION

!Thoroughly check the conditions before per-

forming Auto EQ, as the speakers may be da-

maged if this is performed under the following

conditions:

—When the speakers are incorrectly con-

nected. (For example, when a rear speaker

is connected as a subwoofer output.)

En 203

Chapter

Audio adjustments

—When a speaker is connected to a power

amp delivering output higher than the

speaker’s maximum input power capabil-

ity.

!If a microphone for acoustical measurement

(sold separately) is not placed in an appropri-

ate location, the measurement tone may be-

come loud and measurement may take a long

time, resulting in battery drainage. Be sure to

place the microphone in the specified loca-

tion.

Before operating the Auto EQ

function

!Perform Auto EQ in as quiet a place as pos-

sible, with the vehicle engine and air condi-

tioning switched off. Also, cut power to car

phones or cellular phones in the vehicle, or

remove them from the vehicle before per-

forming Auto EQ. Sounds other than the

measurement tone (surrounding sounds,

engine sound, telephones ringing, etc.)

may prevent correct measurement of the

vehicle’s acoustics.

!Be sure to perform Auto EQ using the mi-

crophone for acoustical measurement

(sold separately). Using another micro-

phone may prevent measurement, or result

in incorrect measurement of the vehicle’s

acoustics.

!To perform Auto EQ, the front speakers

must be connected.

!When this product is connected to a power

amp with input level control, Auto EQ may

be impossible if the power amp’s input

level is set below the standard level.

!When this product is connected to a power

amp with an LPF (low pass filter), turn the

LPF off before performing Auto EQ. Also,

set the cut-off frequency for the built-in LPF

of an active subwoofer to the highest fre-

quency.

!The distance has been calculated by a

computer to provide optimum delay to en-

sure accurate results. Do not change this

value.

—The reflected sound within the vehicle is

strong and delays occur.

—The LPF on active subwoofers or exter-

nal amps delay the lower sounds.

!If an error occurs during measurement, a

message appears and measurement is

canceled. Check the following before mea-

suring the vehicle’s acoustics.

—Front speakers (left/right)

—Rear speakers (left/right)

—Noise

—Microphone for acoustical measure-

ment (sold separately)

—Low battery

Performing Auto EQ

pAuto EQ changes the audio settings as fol-

lows:

—“Auto EQ&TA”is set to “On”.

=For details, refer to Using the auto-ad-

justed equalizer on page 203.

—The fader/balance settings return to the

center position.

=For details, refer to Using balance ad-

justment on page 194.

—The equalizer curve switches to “Flat”.

=For details, refer to Using the equali-

zer on page 202.

—The front and rear speakers will automa-

tically be adjusted to a high pass filter

setting.

pPrevious settings for Auto EQ will be over-

written.

pFor AVIC-8100NEX and AVIC-7100NEX

users

Do not press the hbutton to open or close

the panel when you are using the micro-

phone.

CAUTION

Do not turn off the engine while the measure-

ment is in progress.

204

Chapter

33 Audio adjustments

1 Stop the vehicle in a quiet place, close

all the doors, windows and sun roof, and

then turn the engine off.

If the engine is left running, engine noise may

prevent correct Auto EQ.

pIf driving restrictions are detected during

measurement, measurement is canceled.

2 Fix the microphone for acoustical mea-

surement (sold separately) in the center of

the headrest of the driver’s seat, facing for-

ward.

The Auto EQ may differ depending on where

you place the microphone. If desired, place

the microphone on the front passenger seat

and perform Auto EQ.

3 Disconnect the iPhone or smartphone

device.

4 Turn on the ignition switch (ACC ON).

If the vehicle’s air conditioner or heater is

turned on, turn it off. Noise from the fan in the

air conditioner or heater may prevent correct

Auto EQ.

5 Switch the AV source to “OFF”.

=For details of the operations, refer to Dis-

playing the AV operation screen on page 24.

6 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

7 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “Audio”screen appears.

8 Touch [A-EQ&TA Measurement].

The “A-EQ&TA Measurement”screen ap-

pears.

9 Connect the microphone for acoustical

measurement (sold separately) with this

product.

8100NEX 7100NEX

Plug the microphone into the microphone

input jack on this product.

6100NEX 5100NEX

Connect the microphone with the mini-jack ex-

tension cable, and then plug it into the auxili-

ary input jack on this product.

=For details of the operations, refer to the In-

stallation Manual.

1Mini-jack extension cable

2Microphone for acoustical measurement

(sold separately)

En 205

Chapter

Audio adjustments

10 Touch [Front Left] or [Front Right] to se-

lect the current listening position.

11 Touch [Start].

A 10-second countdown starts.

pThe Bluetooth connection is disconnected

before the process starts.

12 Exit the vehicle and keep the doors

closed until the countdown finishes.

When the countdown finishes, a measure-

ment tone (noise) is emitted from the speakers

and the Auto EQ measurement begins.

13 Wait until the measurement is com-

pleted.

When Auto EQ is completed, a message is dis-

played indicating that the measurement is

completed.

pIf the vehicle’s acoustics cannot be mea-

sured correctly, an error message will be

displayed.

pThe measurement time varies depending

on the type of vehicle.

pTo stop the measurement, touch [Stop].

14 Store the microphone carefully in the

glove compartment or another safe place.

If the microphone is subjected to direct sun-

light for an extended period, high tempera-

tures may cause distortion, color change or

malfunction.

206

Chapter

33 Audio adjustments

Selecting the background

display

The background display can be selected from

8 different preset displays for the AV operation

screen and 5 different preset displays for the

Top menu screen. Furthermore, you can

change the background display to other

images imported from an external storage de-

vice (USB, SD).

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “Theme”screen appears.

3 Touch [Background].

The following screen appears.

pYou can also change the screen for settings

by touching [Illumination], [Theme]or

[Clock] on this screen.

4 Touch [Home] or [AV] to switch the

screen displays.

pThe setting contents can be memorized se-

parately for the AV operation screen and the

Top menu screen.

5 Touch the item you want to set.

!Preset displays:

Selects the desired preset background dis-

play.

!(custom):

Displays the background display image im-

ported from the external storage device

(USB, SD).

=For details, refer to Changing to the back-

ground display image stored on the exter-

nal storage device (USB, SD) on page

207.

!(off):

Hides the background display.

Changing to the background

display image stored on the

external storage device (USB, SD)

You can change the background display

image to an image imported from the external

storage device (USB, SD).

pBackground display image must be used

within the following formats.

—JPEG image files (.jpg or .jpeg)

—Allowable data size is 10 MB or smaller

—Allowable image size is 4 000 pixels ×

4 000 pixels or smaller

CAUTION

Do not turn off the engine while importing an

image from the external storage device (USB,

SD).

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “Theme”screen appears.

3 Touch [Background].

The following screen appears.

En 207

Chapter

Theme menu

pYou can also change the screen for settings

by touching [Illumination], [Theme]or

[Clock] on this screen.

4 Touch the following key.

Displays the list of the background dis-

play images stored on the external sto-

rage device (USB, SD).

5 Touch the desired external storage de-

vice (USB, SD).

The following screen appears.

6 Touch the image to use as the back-

ground display from the list.

The image is set as the background display.

pYou can delete the imported image and re-

store the setting for the background display

to the default by touching and holding the

custom key.

Setting the illumination color

The illumination color can be selected from 5

different colors. Furthermore, the illumination

can be switched between these 5 colors in

order.

Selecting the color from the

preset colors

You can select an illumination color from the

color list.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “Theme”screen appears.

3 Touch [Illumination].

The following screen appears.

pYou can also change the screen for settings

by touching [Theme], [Background]or

[Clock] on this screen.

4 Touch the color you want.

!Colored keys:

Selects the desired preset color.

!(custom):

Displays the screen to customize the illumi-

nation color.

=For details, refer to Creating a user-de-

fined color on page 209.

!(rainbow):

Shifts through the rainbow of colors grada-

tionally.

pYou can preview the Top menu screen or

the AV operation screen by touching

[Home]or[AV] respectively.

208

Chapter

34 Theme menu

Creating a user-defined color

You can create a user-defined color. The cre-

ated color is stored, and you can select the

color when setting the illumination color the

next time.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “Theme”screen appears.

3 Touch [Illumination].

The following screen appears.

pYou can also change the screen for settings

by touching [Theme], [Background]or

[Clock] on this screen.

4 Touch the following key.

Displays the screen to create a user-de-

fined color and store it to memory.

5 Touch the following keys.

Adjusts the brightness and the level of

red, green and blue to create a favorite

color.

pYou can also adjust the color tone by drag-

ging the color bar.

6 Touch and hold [Memo] to store the

customized color in the memory.

The customized color is stored in the memory.

The set color will be recalled from the memory

the next time you touch the same key.

Selecting the theme color

A theme color can be selected from 5 different

colors.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “Theme”screen appears.

3 Touch [Theme].

The following screen appears.

pYou can also change the screen for settings

by touching [Illumination], [Background]

or [Clock] on this screen.

4 Touch the color you want.

pYou can preview the Top menu screen or

the AV operation screen by touching

[Home]or[AV] respectively.

Selecting the clock image

The clock on the AV operation screen and the

Top menu screen can be selected from 3 differ-

ent images.

En 209

Chapter

Theme menu

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “Theme”screen appears.

3 Touch [Clock].

The following screen appears.

pYou can also change the screen for settings

by touching [Illumination], [Theme]or

[Background] on this screen.

4 Touch the item you want to set.

!Preset images:

Selects the desired preset clock image.

!(off):

Hides the clock display.

pYou can preview the Top menu screen or

the AV operation screen by touching

[Home]or[AV] respectively.

Changing the preinstalled

splash screen

You can change the splash screen to other

images preinstalled in this product.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “Theme”screen appears.

3 Touch [Splash Screen].

The following screen appears.

4 Touch the item you want to set.

!Preset images:

Selects the desired preset splash screen

image.

!(custom):

Displays the splash screen image imported

from the external storage device (USB, SD).

=For details, refer to Changing to the splash

screen stored on the external storage device

(USB, SD) on page 210.

Changing to the splash screen

stored on the external storage

device (USB, SD)

You can change the splash screen to other

images imported from the external storage de-

vice (USB, SD).

CAUTION

Do not turn off the engine while importing an

image from the external storage device (USB,

SD).

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

210

Chapter

34 Theme menu

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “Theme”screen appears.

3 Touch [Splash Screen].

The following screen appears.

4 Touch the following key.

Displays the list of the splash screens

stored on the external storage device

(USB, SD).

5 Touch the desired external storage de-

vice (USB, SD).

The following screen appears.

6 Touch the image to use as the splash

screen from the list.

The image is set as the splash screen.

pYou can delete the imported image and re-

store the setting on the splash screen to the

default by touching and holding the custom

key.

Replicating the settings

Exporting “Theme”settings

You can export settings you have made on the

“Theme”screen to an external storage device

(USB, SD). These settings can be exported se-

parately.

pThis setting is available only when you stop

your vehicle in a safe place and apply the

parking brake.

pIf multiple external storage devices are con-

nected to this product, the order of priority

for the targets that the “Theme”settings

are exported to is as follows:

1SD memory card (for AVIC-8100NEX and

AVIC-7100NEX)

2USB storage device that is connected to

USB port 1

3USB storage device that is connected to

USB port 2

CAUTION

Do not turn off the engine while exporting the set-

tings.

1 Insert the SD memory card into the SD

card slot or plug the USB storage device

into the USB connector.

=For details, refer to Plugging in a USB sto-

rage device on page 19.

=For details, refer to Inserting and ejecting an

SD memory card on page 18.

2 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

3 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “Theme”screen appears.

4 Touch [Export].

The “Settings Export”screen appears.

En 211

Chapter

Theme menu

5 Touch the desired item.

!Illumination:

Selects the illumination color setting.

!Splash Screen:

Selects the splash screen setting.

!Select All:

Selects all settings.

6 Touch [Export].

Data export starts.

After the data is exported, a completion mes-

sage appears.

pThe source is turned off and the Bluetooth

connection is disconnected before the pro-

cess starts.

Importing “Theme”settings

The settings made on the “Theme”screen

that were exported to an external storage de-

vice (USB, SD) can be imported.

pThis setting is available only when you stop

your vehicle in a safe place and apply the

parking brake.

pIf multiple external storage devices that in-

clude available data are connected to this

product, the order of priority for the targets

that the “Theme”settings are imported

from is as follows:

1SD memory card (for AVIC-8100NEX and

AVIC-7100NEX)

2USB storage device that is connected to

USB port 1

3USB storage device that is connected to

USB port 2

CAUTION

!Do not turn off the engine while importing the

settings.

!To prevent data loss and damage to the SD

memory card, never edit the data exported to

the SD memory card.

1 Insert the SD memory card into the SD

card slot or plug the USB storage device

into the USB connector.

=For details, refer to Plugging in a USB sto-

rage device on page 19.

=For details, refer to Inserting and ejecting an

SD memory card on page 18.

A message confirming whether to import the

stored setting data appears.

2 Touch [Import].

Data import starts.

When the data is successfully imported, an

import complete message is displayed.

pThe source is turned off and the Bluetooth

connection is disconnected before the pro-

cess starts.

212

Chapter

34 Theme menu

Setting the top-priority

languages

You can assign the top-priority language to the

top-priority subtitle, audio and menu in initial

playback. If the selected language is recorded

on the disc, subtitles, audio and menu are dis-

played or output in that language.

pThis setting is available only when “Disc”is

selected as the source.

Setting the subtitle language

You can set a desired subtitle language. When

available, the subtitles will be displayed in the

selected language.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “Video Setup”screen appears.

3 Touch [DVD/DivX Setup].

The following screen appears.

4 Touch [Subtitle Language].

The pop-up menu appears.

5 Touch the desired language.

When you select “Others”, a language code

input screen is shown. Input the four-digit

code of the desired language then touch .

=For details, refer to Language code chart for

DVDs on page 219.

The subtitle language is set.

pIf the selected language is not available, the

language specified on the disc is displayed.

pYou can switch the subtitle language by

touching the subtitle language switching

key during playback.

pThe setting made here will not be affected

even if the subtitle language is switched

during playback using the subtitle language

switching key.

Setting the audio language

You can set the preferred audio language.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “Video Setup”screen appears.

3 Touch [DVD/DivX Setup].

The following screen appears.

4 Touch [Audio Language].

The pop-up menu appears.

5 Touch the desired language.

When you select “Others”, a language code

input screen is shown. Input the four-digit

code of the desired language then touch .

=For details, refer to Language code chart for

DVDs on page 219.

The audio language is set.

En 213

Chapter

Setting up the video player

pIf the selected language is not available, the

language specified on the disc is applied.

pYou can switch the audio language by

touching the audio language switching key

during playback.

pThe setting made here will not be affected

even if the audio language is switched dur-

ing playback using the audio language

switching key.

Setting the menu language

You can set the preferred language in which

the menus recorded on a disc are displayed.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “Video Setup”screen appears.

3 Touch [DVD/DivX Setup].

The following screen appears.

4 Touch [Menu Language].

The pop-up menu appears.

5 Touch the desired language.

When you select “Others”, a language code

input screen is shown. Input the four-digit

code of the desired language then touch .

=For details, refer to Language code chart for

DVDs on page 219.

The menu language is set.

pIf the selected language is not available, the

language specified on the disc is dis-

played.

Setting the angle icon display

You can set whether to display the angle icon

on the scenes where the angle can be

switched.

pThis setting is available only when “Disc”is

selected as the source.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “Video Setup”screen appears.

3 Touch [DVD/DivX Setup].

The following screen appears.

4 Touch [Multi Angle] repeatedly until

the desired setting appears.

!On (default):

Turns the multi-angle setting on.

!Off:

Turns the multi-angle setting off.

214

Chapter

35 Setting up the video player

Setting the aspect ratio

There are two kinds of displays. A wide screen

display has a width-to-height ratio (TV aspect)

of 16:9, while a regular display has a TV aspect

of 4:3. If you use a regular rear display with a

TV aspect of 4:3, you can set the aspect ratio

suitable for your rear display. (We recommend

use of this function only when you want to fit

the aspect ratio to the rear display.)

pWhen using a regular display, select either

“Letter Box”or “Pan Scan”. Selecting

“16:9”may result in an unnatural image.

pIf you select the TV aspect ratio, this pro-

duct’s display will change to the same set-

ting.

pThis setting is available only when “Disc”is

selected as the source.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “Video Setup”screen appears.

3 Touch [DVD/DivX Setup].

The following screen appears.

4 Touch [TV Aspect].

The pop-up menu appears.

5 Touch the item you want to set.

!16:9 (default):

Displays the wide screen image (16:9) as it

is (initial setting).

!Letter Box:

Makes the image in the shape of a letterbox

with black bands on the top and bottom of

the screen.

!Pan Scan:

Cuts the image short on the right and left

sides of the screen.

pWhen playing discs that do not have a pan-

scan system, the disc is played back with

“Letter Box”even if you select the “Pan

Scan”setting. Confirm whether the disc

package bears the mark.

pThe TV aspect ratio cannot be changed for

some discs. For details, refer to the disc’s

instructions.

Setting parental lock

Some DVD-Video discs let you use parental

lock to set restrictions so that children cannot

watch violent or adult-oriented scenes. You

can set the parental lock level in steps as de-

sired.

pThis setting is available only when “Disc”is

selected as the source.

pWhen you set a parental lock level and then

play a disc featuring parental lock, code

number input indications may be dis-

played. In this case, playback will start

when the correct code number is input.

Setting the code number and level

When you first use this function, register your

code number. If you do not register a code

number, the parental lock will not operate.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “Video Setup”screen appears.

En 215

Chapter

Setting up the video player

3 Touch [DVD/DivX Setup].

The following screen appears.

4 Touch [Parental].

The “Parental”screen appears.

5 Touch [0] to [9] to input a four-digit

code number.

6 While the input number is displayed,

touch the following key.

Registers the code number.

7 Touch any number between [1] to [8] to

select the desired level.

!8:

Enables playback of the entire disc (initial

setting).

!7to 2:

Enables playback of discs for children and

non-adult oriented discs.

!1:

Enables only playback of discs for children.

8 While the input number is displayed,

touch the following key.

Sets the parental lock level.

pWe recommend that you keep a record of

your code number in case you forget it.

pThe parental lock level is recorded on the

disc. You can confirm it by looking at the

disc package, the included literature or the

disc itself. You cannot use parental lock

with discs that do not feature a recorded

parental lock level.

pWith some discs, parental lock operates to

skip certain scenes only, after which normal

playback resumes. For details, refer to the

disc’s instructions.

Displaying your DivX VOD

registration code

If you want to play DivX VOD (video on de-

mand) content on this product, you must first

tent provider. You do this by generating a DivX

VOD registration code, which you submit to

your provider.

pKeep a record of the code as you will need

it when you register this product to the

DivX VOD provider.

pThis setting is available only when “Disc”is

selected as the source.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “Video Setup”screen appears.

3 Touch [DVD/DivX Setup].

The following screen appears.

4 Touch [DivX® VOD].

The “DivX® VOD”screen appears.

216

Chapter

35 Setting up the video player

pIf a registration code has already been acti-

vated, it cannot be displayed.

5 Touch [Registration Code].

Your 10-digit registration code is displayed.

pMake a note of the code as you will need it

when you register with a DivX VOD

provider.

Displaying your DivX VOD

deregistration code

A registration code registered with a deregis-

tration code can be deleted.

pThis setting is available only when “Disc”is

selected as the source.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “Video Setup”screen appears.

3 Touch [DVD/DivX Setup].

The following screen appears.

4 Touch [DivX® VOD].

The “DivX® VOD”screen appears.

5 Touch [Deregistration Code].

Your eight-digit deregistration code is dis-

played.

pMake a note of the code as you will need it

when you deregister from a DivX VOD

provider.

Automatic playback of DVDs

When a DVD disc with a DVD menu is in-

serted, this product will cancel the menu auto-

matically and start playback from the first

chapter of the first title.

pSome DVDs may not operate properly. If

this function is not fully operable, turn this

function off and start playback.

pThis setting is available only when “Disc”is

selected as the source.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “Video Setup”screen appears.

3 Touch [DVD/DivX Setup].

The following screen appears.

4 Touch [DVD Auto Play] repeatedly until

the desired setting appears.

!Off (default):

Turns the DVD Auto Play setting off.

!On:

Turns the DVD Auto Play setting on.

En 217

Chapter

Setting up the video player

Setting the video signal for

the rear view camera

When you connect a rear view camera to this

product, select the suitable video signal set-

ting.

pYou can operate this function only for the

video signal input into the AV input.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “Video Setup”screen appears.

3 Touch [Video Signal Setting].

The following screen appears.

4 Touch [Camera].

The pop-up menu appears.

5 Touch the item you want to set.

!Auto (default):

Adjusts the video signal setting automati-

cally.

!PAL:

Sets the video signal to PAL.

!NTSC:

Sets the video signal to NTSC.

!PAL-M:

Sets the video signal to PAL-M.

!PAL-N:

Sets the video signal to PAL-N.

!SECAM:

Sets the video signal to SECAM.

218

Chapter

35 Setting up the video player

Language code chart for DVDs

Two-letter

code,

input code

Language

Two-letter

code,

input code

Language

Two-letter

code,

input code

Language

aa, 0101 Afar ie, 0905 Interlingue rn, 1814 Rundi

ab, 0102 Abkhazian ik, 0911 Inupiaq ro, 1815 Romanian

af, 0106 Afrikaans in, 0914 Indonesian ru, 1821 Russian

am, 0113 Amharic is, 0919 Icelandic rw, 1823 Kinyarwanda

ar, 0118 Arabic it, 0920 Italian sa, 1901 Sanskrit

as, 0119 Assamese iw, 0923 Hebrew sd, 1904 Sindhi

ay, 0125 Aymara ja, 1001 Japanese sg, 1907 Sango

az, 0126 Azerbaijani ji, 1009 Yiddish sh, 1908 Serbo-Croat

ba, 0201 Bashkir jw, 1023 Javanese si, 1909 Sinhala

be, 0205 Belarusian ka, 1101 Georgian sk, 1911 Slovak

bg, 0207 Bulgarian kk, 1111 Kazakh sl, 1912 Slovenian

bh, 0208 Bihari kl, 1112 Greenlandic sm, 1913 Samoan

bi, 0209 Bislama km, 1113 Central Khmer sn, 1914 Shona

bn, 0214 Bengali kn, 1114 Kannada so, 1915 Somali

bo, 0215 Tibetan ko, 1115 Korean sq, 1917 Albanian

br, 0218 Breton ks, 1119 Kashmiri sr, 1918 Serbian

ca, 0301 Catalan ku, 1121 Kurdish ss, 1919 Swati

co, 0315 Corsican ky, 1125 Kirghiz st, 1920 Sotho

cs, 0319 Czech la, 1201 Latin su, 1921 Sundanese

cy, 0325 Welsh ln, 1214 Lingala sv, 1922 Swedish

da, 0401 Danish lo, 1215 Lao sw, 1923 Swahili

de, 0405 German lt, 1220 Lithuanian ta, 2001 Tamil

dz, 0426 Dzongkha lv, 1222 Latvian te, 2005 Telugu

el, 0512 Greek mg, 1307 Malagasy tg, 2007 Tajik

en, 0514 English mi, 1309 Maori th, 2008 Thai

eo, 0515 Esperanto mk, 1311 Macedonian ti, 2009 Tigrinya

es, 0519 Spanish ml, 1312 Malayalam tk, 2011 Turkmen

et, 0520 Estonian mn, 1314 Mongolian tl, 2012 Tagalog

eu, 0521 Basque mo, 1315 Moldavian tn, 2014 Tswana

fa, 0601 Persian mr, 1318 Marathi to, 2015 Tonga

fi, 0609 Finnish ms, 1319 Malay tr, 2018 Turkish

fj, 0610 Fijian mt, 1320 Maltese ts, 2019 Tsonga

fo, 0615 Faroese my, 1325 Burmese tt, 2020 Tatar

fr, 0618 French na, 1401 Nauru tw, 2023 Twi

fy, 0625 Western Frisian ne, 1405 Nepali uk, 2111 Ukrainian

ga, 0701 Irish nl, 1412 Dutch ur, 2118 Urdu

gd, 0704 Scot.Gaelic no, 1415 Norwegian uz, 2126 Uzbek

gl, 0712 Galician oc, 1503 Occitan vi, 2209 Vietnamese

gn, 0714 Guarani om, 1513 Oromo vo, 2215 Volapük

gu, 0721 Gujarati or, 1518 Oriya wo, 2315 Wolof

ha, 0801 Hausa pa, 1601 Panjabi xh, 2408 Xhosa

hi, 0809 Hindi pl, 1612 Polish yo, 2515 Yoruba

hr, 0818 Croatian ps, 1619 Pashto zh, 2608 Chinese

hu, 0821 Hungarian pt, 1620 Portuguese zu, 2621 Zulu

hy, 0825 Armenian qu, 1721 Quechua

ia, 0901 Interlingua rm, 1813 Romansh

En 219

Chapter

Setting up the video player

Registering your favorite menu items in short-

cuts allows you to quickly jump to the regis-

tered menu screen by a simple touch on the

“Favorites”screen.

pUp to 12 menu items can be registered in

the favorite menu.

Creating a shortcut

1 Touch the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following key.

Displays the Setting menu screen.

3 Touch the star icon of the menu item

that you want to add to the favorite menu.

The star icon for the selected menu is filled in.

#To cancel the registration, touch the star icon

in the menu column again.

Selecting a shortcut

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “Favorites”screen appears.

3 Touch the desired item.

Removing a shortcut

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “Favorites”screen appears.

3 Touch and hold the star icon of the fa-

vorite menu you want to remove.

The selected menu is removed from the “Fa-

vorites”screen.

220

Chapter

36 Favorite menu

Setting the time and date

You can change the date display format and

the time format.

1 Touch the current time on the screen to

display the Time and date setting screen.

The following screen appears.

2 Touch the item you want to set.

Month/Date

!m/d (default):

Changes the date display format to month/

date.

!d/m:

Changes the date display format to date/

month.

Time Format

!12hour (default):

Changes the display to 12-hour format with

am/pm.

!24hour:

Changes the display to 24-hour format.

Storing song information

to an iPod (iTunes Tagging)

You can store song information to the iPod

when this product receives song information.

The songs will appear in a playlist called

“Tagged playlist”in iTunes the next time you

synchronize your iPod. You can directly buy

the songs via this product.

Depending on when the song information is

stored, information for the previous song or

the song after the current song may also be

stored. Be sure to confirm the song before you

purchase it.

pThe iTunes Tagging function is available

when the song information is available.

pThis function is available for the following

iPod models:

!iPhone 4s

!iPhone 4

!iPhone 3GS

!iPhone 3G

!iPhone

!iPod touch 5th generation

!iPod touch 4th generation

!iPod touch 3rd generation

!iPod touch 2nd generation

!iPod touch 1st generation

!iPod classic

!iPod nano 6th generation

!iPod nano 5th generation

!iPod nano 4th generation

!iPod nano 3rd generation

pThe version of iTunes must be 7.4 or higher.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “System”screen appears.

3 Touch [AV Source Settings].

The following screen appears.

4 Touch [Tag Forwarding] repeatedly

until the desired setting appears.

!USB1 (default):

Transfers the song information to your iPod

which is connected to USB port 1.

En 221

Chapter

Common operations

!USB2:

Transfers the song information to your iPod

which is connected to USB port 2.

5 Tune into a broadcast station.

When the song information is received,

is displayed while the desired song is being

broadcast, and the touch panel key becomes

active.

Radio (for AVIC-5100NEX)

=For details, refer to iTunes®tagging indi-

cator on page 94.

=For details, refer to Using the touch panel

keys on page 93.

HD Radio (for AVIC-8100NEX, AVIC-7100NEX

and AVIC-6100NEX)

=For details, refer to iTunes®tagging indi-

cator on page 98.

=For details, refer to Using the touch panel

keys on page 97.

SiriusXM

=For details, refer to iTunes®tagging indi-

cator on page 158.

=For details, refer to Using the touch panel

keys on page 156.

6 Touch the following key.

Radio (for AVIC-5100NEX)

The touch panel key on which song informa-

tion is displayed

HD Radio (for AVIC-8100NEX, AVIC-7100NEX

and AVIC-6100NEX)

The touch panel key on which the song title or

artist name is displayed

SiriusXM

The touch panel key on which the artist name,

song title, category name or content text is dis-

played

The information on the song on air is stored in

this product.

While the information is being acquired,

is displayed.

When it is completed, turns off and is

displayed.

pThe song information for up to 50 songs

can be stored in this product.

Depending on when the song information

is stored, information for the previous song

or the song after the current song may also

be stored.

7 Connect your iPod.

The song information is transferred to your

iPod.

pIf the iPod is already connected, the song

information will be transferred to your iPod

every time you touch the touch panel key

on which song information is displayed.

When the song information transfer to your

iPod is completed, disappears.

pWhen the song information transfer is com-

pleted, the information stored in this pro-

duct will be automatically deleted.

pIf you turn off this product or disconnect

the iPod while transferring song informa-

tion, the transfer may not successfully com-

plete.

pWhile this product is storing song informa-

tion, transfer to an iPod is not possible.

Setting the “Sound

Retriever”function

The “Sound Retriever”function automatically

enhances compressed audio and restores rich

sound.

%Touch the following key repeatedly

until the desired setting appears on the AV

operation screen.

Sets the “Sound Retriever”function.

!(Mode1) (default):

Activates the “Sound Retriever”function.

!(Mode2):

Activates the “Sound Retriever”function.

!(Off):

Deactivates the “Sound Retriever”func-

tion.

pMode2 has a stronger effect than Mode1.

222

Chapter

37 Common operations

Changing the wide screen

mode

You can set the screen size for the video and

JPEG images.

pThis setting is available only when you stop

your vehicle in a safe place and apply the

parking brake.

pThe default setting is “Full”for video, and

“Normal”for JPEG images.

1 Touch the following key.

Displays the setting screen to select the

appropriate screen ratio for the play-

back video.

pThe appearance of this key changes accord-

ing to the current setting.

2 Touch the desired mode.

!Full

A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the horizontal

direction only, enabling you to enjoy a 4:3

TV picture (normal picture) without any

omissions.

pThis setting is for video only.

!Zoom

A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the same pro-

portion both vertically and horizontally;

ideal for a wide screen picture.

pThis setting is for video only.

!Normal

A 4:3 picture is displayed normally, giving

you no sense of disparity since its propor-

tions are the same as those of the normal

picture.

!Trimming

An image is displayed across the entire

screen with the horizontal-to-vertical ratio

left as is. If the horizontal-to-vertical ratio

differs between the display and the image,

the image may be displayed partly cut off

either at the top/bottom or sides.

pThis setting is for JPEG images only.

pDifferent settings can be stored for each

video source.

pWhen a video is viewed in a wide screen

mode that does not match its original as-

pect ratio, it may appear different.

pThe video image will appear coarser when

viewed in “Zoom”mode.

En 223

Chapter

Common operations

Selecting the video for the

rear display

You can choose either to show the same

image as the front screen or to show the se-

lected source on the rear display.

pThis function is not available during a call

via this product or while using the voice re-

cognition function.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following key.

Displays the AV source selection

screen.

3 Touch [Rear].

The “Rear”screen appears.

4 Touch the source you want to show on

the rear display.

The source you can select is as follows.

!Mirror

The video on the front screen of this pro-

duct is output to the rear display.

—Not all videos or sounds can be output

to the rear display.

!DVD/CD

The video and sound of DVDs are output to

the rear display.

—Compatible file types are DVD-V, Video-

CD, DivX, MPEG-1, MPEG-2, and

MPEG-4 only.

!USB/iPod

The video and sound of the USB storage de-

vice or iPod are output to the rear display.

—The port that supports the rear display

will only be USB port 1.

—Compatible file types are MPEG-4,

H.264, WMV, MKV, and FLV only.

!SD

The video and sound of the SD memory

cards are output to the rear display.

—Compatible file types are MPEG-4,

H.264, WMV, MKV, and FLV only.

!AV

The video and sound of the AV input are

output to the rear display.

—The video image and sound are output

only when “AV”has both video and

sound.

—The video image and sound are output

only when “AV Input”is set to “Source”.

=For details, refer to Setting AV input

on page 180.

!OFF

Nothing is output to the rear display.

#Touch the following key.

Closes the “Rear”screen.

#You can also select “Rear”on the source list.

=For details, refer to Selecting a front source

on the source list on page 25.

pFor AVIC-8100NEX and AVIC-7100NEX

users

Video files on the external storage device

(USB, SD) are not available as a source for

the rear display when Android Auto is on.

p“SD”is available for AVIC-8100NEX and

AVIC-7100NEX only.

Setting the anti-theft function

You can set a password for this product. If the

back-up lead is cut after the password is set,

this product prompts for the password at the

time of next boot up.

Setting the password

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

224

Chapter

38 Other functions

The “System”screen appears.

3 Touch Area1, followed by Area2, and

then touch and hold Area3.

Area1 Area2 Area3

The “Anti-theft Setting Menu”screen ap-

pears.

4 Touch [Set Password].

The “Password Entry”screen appears.

5 Enter the password you want to set.

p5 to 16 characters can be entered for a

password.

6 Touch [Go].

The “Hint Entry”screen appears.

7 Enter a password hint.

pUp to 40 characters can be entered for a

hint.

8 Touch [Go].

The “Password Confirmation”screen ap-

pears.

pIf you want to change the password cur-

rently set, enter the current password and

then enter the new one.

9 Check the password, and then touch

[OK].

The “Anti-theft Setting Menu”screen ap-

pears.

Entering the password

On the password input screen, you must enter

the current password.

1 Enter the password.

2 Touch [Go].

When the correct password is entered, this

product will be unlocked.

Deleting the password

The current password and password hint can

be deleted.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “System”screen appears.

3 Touch Area1, followed by Area2, and

then touch and hold Area3.

Area1 Area2 Area3

The “Anti-theft Setting Menu”screen ap-

pears.

4 Touch [Clear Password].

A message confirming whether to delete the

password appears.

5 Touch [Yes].

The password setting screen appears.

A message confirming a password hint ap-

pears.

6 Touch [OK].

The “Password Entry”screen appears.

7 Enter the current password.

En 225

Chapter

Other functions

8 Touch [Go].

A message indicating that the security setting

is canceled appears.

Forgotten password

Contact the nearest authorized Pioneer Ser-

vice Station.

Restoring this product to

the default settings

You can restore settings or recorded content

to the default settings. Various methods are

used to clear user data.

Method 1: Remove the vehicle battery

Resets various settings registered to this pro-

duct.

Method 2: Touch the item you want to

initialize on the “System”screen

=For details, refer to Restoring the default set-

tings on page 226.

Method 3: Press the RESET button

=For details of the operations, refer to Reset-

ting the microprocessor on page 12.

pSome of the settings and recorded con-

tents will not be reset.

Restoring the default settings

Resets various settings registered to this pro-

duct to the default settings.

pThis setting is available only when you stop

your vehicle in a safe place and apply the

parking brake.

CAUTION

Do not turn off the engine while restoring the set-

tings.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

Top menu screen.

2 Touch the following keys in the follow-

ing order.

The “System”screen appears.

3 Touch [Restore Settings].

The following screen appears.

4 Touch the item you want to initialize.

!All Settings

!Audio Settings

pThis setting is available when the source

is turned off.

!Theme Settings

!Bluetooth Settings

A message confirming whether to initialize the

settings appears.

pIf you want to return settings or recorded

content to the default, touch [All Settings].

pSome of the settings configured on the

“Theme”setting will not be reset.

pThe settings for My Vehicle are not reset.

5 Touch [Restore].

When the selected item is successfully initia-

lized, a completion message appears.

pThe source is turned off and the Bluetooth

connection is disconnected before the pro-

cess starts.

226

Chapter

38 Other functions

Troubleshooting

If you have problems operating your navigation system, refer to this section. The most common

problems are listed below, along with likely causes and solutions. If a solution to your problem

cannot be found here, contact your dealer or the nearest authorized Pioneer service facility.

Problems with the AV screen

Symptom Cause Action (Reference)

CD or DVD playback is not pos-

sible.

The disc is inserted upside down. Insert the disc with the label upward.

The disc is dirty. Clean the disc.

The disc is cracked or otherwise da-

maged.

Insert a normal, round disc.

The files on the disc are in an irregu-

lar file format.

Check the file format.

The disc format cannot be played

back.

Replace the disc.

The loaded disc is a type this pro-

duct cannot play.

Check what type of disc it is. (Page 242)

The screen is covered by a cau-

tion message and the video can-

not be shown.

The parking brake lead is not con-

nected or applied.

Connect the parking brake lead correctly, and

apply the parking brake.

The parking brake interlock is acti-

vated.

Park your vehicle in a safe place and apply

the parking brake.

No video output from the con-

nected equipment.

The “AV Input”setting is incorrect. Correct the settings. (Page 180)

The audio or video skips. This product is not firmly secured. Secure this product firmly.

No sounds are produced.

The volume level will not rise.

Cables are not connected correctly. Connect the cables correctly.

The system is performing still, slow

motion, or frame-by-frame playback

with DVD-Video.

There is no sound during still, slow motion, or

frame-by-frame playback with DVD-Video.

The system is paused or performing,

fast reverse or forward during the

disc playback.

For the media other than music CD (CD-DA),

there is no sound on fast reverse or forward.

The icon 9is displayed, and op-

eration is impossible.

The operation is not compatible

with the video configuration.

This operation is not possible. (For example,

the DVD playing does not feature that angle,

audio system, subtitle language, etc.)

The picture stops (pauses) and

this product cannot be oper-

ated.

The reading of data is impossible

during disc playback.

Stop playback once, then restart.

The picture is stretched, with an

incorrect aspect ratio.

The aspect setting is incorrect for

the display.

Select the appropriate setting for that image.

(Page 215)

A parental lock message is dis-

played and DVD playback is not

possible.

The parental lock is on. Turn the parental lock off or change the level.

(Page 215)

The parental lock for DVD play-

back cannot be canceled.

The code number is incorrect. Input the correct code number. (Page 215)

En 227

Appendix

Symptom Cause Action (Reference)

Playback is not with the audio

language and subtitle language

settings selected in “DVD/DivX

Setup”.

The DVD playing does not feature

dialog or subtitles in the language

selected in “DVD/DivX Setup”.

Switching to a selected language is not possi-

ble if the language selected in “DVD/DivX

Setup”is not recorded on the disc. (Page

213)

The picture is extremely unclear/

distorted and dark during play-

back.

The disc features a signal to prohibit

copying. (Some discs may have

this.)

Since this product is compatible with the

copy guard analog copy protect system, the

picture may suffer from horizontal stripes or

other imperfections when a disc with that

kind of protection signal is viewed on some

displays. This is not a malfunction.

iPod cannot be operated. The iPod is frozen. !Reconnect the iPod with the USB interface

cable for iPod / iPhone.

!Update the iPod software version.

An error has occurred. !Reconnect the iPod with the USB interface

cable for iPod / iPhone.

!Park your vehicle in a safe place, and then

turn off the ignition switch (ACC OFF). Subse-

quently, turn the ignition switch to on (ACC

ON) again.

!Update the iPod software version.

Cables are not connected correctly. Connect the cables correctly.

Sound from the iPod cannot be

heard.

The audio output direction may

switch automatically when the

Bluetooth and USB connections are

used at the same time.

Use the iPod to change the audio output di-

rection.

Problems with the phone screen

Symptom Cause Action

Dialing is impossible because

the touch panel keys for dialing

are inactive.

Your phone is out of range for ser-

vice.

Retry after re-entering the range for service.

The connection between the cellular

phone and this product cannot be

established now.

Perform the connection process.

Problems with the Application screen

Symptom Cause Action

A black screen is displayed. While operating an application, the

application was ended on the smart-

phone side.

Press the HOME button to display the Top

menu screen.

The smartphone OS may be await-

ing screen operation.

Stop the vehicle in a safe place and check the

screen on the smartphone.

The screen is displayed, but op-

eration does not work at all.

An error has occurred. !Park your vehicle in a safe place, and then

turn off the ignition switch (ACC OFF). Subse-

quently, turn the ignition switch to on (ACC

ON) again.

!When an Android device is connected, dis-

connect the Bluetooth connection from this

product and then reconnect it.

228

Appendix

Symptom Cause Action

The smartphone was not

charged.

Charging stopped because the tem-

perature of the smartphone rose

due to prolonged use of the smart-

phone during charging.

Disconnect the smartphone from the cable,

and wait until the smartphone cools down.

More battery power was consumed

than was gained from charging.

This problem may be resolved by stopping

any unnecessary services on the smartphone.

Error messages

When problems occur with this product, an error message appears on the display. Refer to the

table below to identify the problem, then take the suggested corrective action. If the error persists,

record the error message and contact your dealer or your nearest Pioneer service center.

Common

Message Cause Action

AMP Error This product fails to operate or the

speaker connection is incorrect; the

protective circuit is activated.

Check the speaker connection. If the mes-

sage fails to disappear even after the engine

is switched off/on, contact your dealer or an

authorized Pioneer Service Station for assis-

tance.

TEMP The temperature of this product is

outside the normal operating range.

Wait until this product returns to a tempera-

ture within the normal operating limits.

Product overheat. System will

be shut down automatically

in 1 minute. Restart the pro-

duct by ACC-Off/On may fix

this problem. If this message

keeps showing up, it is possi-

ble that some problem oc-

cured in the product.

The temperature is too high for this

product to operate.

Follow the instructions displayed on the

screen. If this does not solve the problem,

contact your dealer or an authorized Pioneer

Station for assistance.

Positioning is not possible

due to the hardware. Please

contact your dealer or Pioneer

service center.

The location display is not possible

due to hardware failure.

Contact your dealer or an authorized Pioneer

Station for assistance.

No GPS antenna. Check con-

nection.

GPS reception is lost. Check the antenna connection. If the mes-

sage fails to disappear even after the engine

is switched off/on, contact your dealer or an

authorized Pioneer Station for assistance.

GPS antenna problem de-

tected. Contact dealer or ser-

vice center.

GPS antenna lead is short-circuited. Contact your dealer or an authorized Pioneer

Station for assistance.

Calibration will start, but may

be inaccurate without speed

pulse.

The speed pulse sensor is not con-

nected correctly.

Contact your dealer or an authorized Pioneer

Station for assistance.

Sensor error. Please contact

your dealer or Pioneer Service

Center.

An error has occurred with the sen-

sor.

Contact your dealer or an authorized Pioneer

Station for assistance.

En 229

Appendix

Message Cause Action

Detected unusual speed

pulses.

The speed pulse cannot be detected

correctly.

Contact your dealer or an authorized Pioneer

Station for assistance.

Detected changes in the in-

stallation angle or position.

The in-dash receiver is updat-

ing the sensor learning data.

Changes in the installation angle or

position are detected.

Wait until the sensor learning finishes.

Speed pulse wire is not con-

nected. The system will oper-

ate in simple hybrid mode.

Speed pulse wire is not connected. The speed pulse cannot be detected if the

speed pulse wire is not connected correctly.

Pandora

Message Cause Action

Communication error oc-

curred.

iPod failure. Disconnect the cable from the iPod. Once the

iPod’s main menu is displayed, reconnect the

iPod and reset it.

Error-19 Communication failed. Disconnect the cable from the iPod. Once the

iPod’s main menu is displayed, reconnect the

iPod and reset it.

Skip limit reached. Skip limit reached. !Do not exceed the skip limit.

!Due to music licensing restrictions,

Pandora limits the total number of skips per

hour.

Check Device Device error message displayed in

Pandora application.

Please check your connected device.

Incompatible USB The connected USB storage device

is not supported by this product.

Disconnect your device and replace it with a

compatible USB storage device.

Check USB The USB connector or USB cable

has short-circuited.

Check that the USB connector or USB cable

is not caught in something or damaged.

The connected USB storage device

consumes more than maximum al-

lowable current.

Disconnect the USB storage device and do

not use it. Turn the ignition switch to OFF,

then to ACC or ON and then connect a com-

pliant USB storage device.

Aha Radio

Message Cause Action

Communication Error iPod failure. Disconnect the cable from the iPod. Once the

iPod’s main menu is displayed, reconnect the

iPod and reset it.

Error-02-6X iPod failure. Disconnect the cable from the iPod. Once the

iPod’s main menu is displayed, reconnect the

iPod and reset it.

230

Appendix

SiriusXM Satellite Radio

Message Cause Action (Reference)

Check Antenna The antenna connection is incor-

rect.

Check the antenna connection. If the mes-

sage fails to disappear even after the engine

is switched off/on, contact your dealer or the

nearest authorized Pioneer service center for

assistance.

Check Tuner The SiriusXM Connect Vehicle Tuner

connection is incorrect.

Check the tuner connection and battery vol-

tage. If the message fails to disappear even

after the engine is switched off/on, contact

your dealer or the nearest authorized Pioneer

service center for assistance.

No Signal The SiriusXM Connect Vehicle Tuner

is having difficulty receiving the

SiriusXM satellite signal.

!Verify that your vehicle is outdoors with a

clear view of the southern sky.

!Verify that the SiriusXM magnetic mount

antenna is mounted on a metal surface on

the outside the vehicle.

!Move the SiriusXM antenna away from any

obstructions.

No Content TuneScan is not available. Perform the operation with another preset

channel.

Channel Not Available The channel that you have re-

quested is not a valid SiriusXM

channel.

Check the SiriusXM channel lineup.

Subscription Updated Press

Enter to Continue

This product has detected a change

in your SiriusXM subscription sta-

tus.

Touch [Enter] to clear the message.

Channel Not Subscribed. Call

SiriusXM to Subscribe.

The channel that you have re-

quested is not included in your

SiriusXM subscription package.

Check the content of your SiriusXM subscrip-

tion package.

Channel Locked Please Enter

the Lock Code

Locked by the radio Parental Control

feature.

Release the channel lock.

Artist Unavailable The alert memo function is not avail-

able.

Perform the operation with another channel.

Song Unavailable The alert memo function is not avail-

able.

Perform the operation with another channel.

Team Unavailable The alert memo function is not avail-

able.

Perform the operation with another channel.

Alert Memory Full You can

manage alert memory in the

alert list

The memory is full. Clear the alert list. (Page 170)

Memory Full The memory has become full while

playback was paused.

Resume playback.

Memory Nearly Full The memory has become nearly full

while playback was paused.

Resume playback.

En 231

Appendix

Disc

Message Cause Action (Reference)

Error-02-XX/FF-FF The disc is dirty. Clean the disc.

The disc is scratched. Replace the disc.

The disc is loaded upside down. Check that the disc is loaded correctly.

There is an electrical or mechanical

error.

Press the RESET button. (Page 12)

Different Region Disc The disc does not have the same re-

gion number as this product.

Replace the DVD with one bearing the correct

region number.

Unplayable Disc This type of disc cannot be played

on this product.

Replace the disc with one that can be played

on this product.

Unplayable File This type of file cannot be played on

this product.

Select a file that can be played. (Page 245,

Page 259)

Skipped The inserted disc contains DRM

protected files.

The protected files are skipped.

Protect All the files on the inserted disc are

embedded with DRM.

Replace the disc.

This DivX rental has expired. The inserted disc contains expired

DivX VOD content.

Select a file that can be played.

Video resolution not sup-

ported

Files that cannot be played on this

product are included in the file.

Select a file that can be played. (Page 245,

Page 259)

Unable to write to flash mem-

ory.

The playback history for VOD con-

tents cannot be saved for some rea-

son.

!Retry.

!If the message appears frequently, consult

your dealer.

Your device is not authorized

to play this DivX protected

video.

This product’s DivX registration

code has not been authorized by the

DivX VOD contents provider.

tents provider.

Video frame rate not sup-

ported

DivX file’s frame rate is more than

30 fps.

Select a file that can be played.

Audio Format not supported This type of file is not supported on

this product.

Select a file that can be played. (Page 245,

Page 259)

External storage device (USB, SD)

Message Cause Action (Reference)

Error-02-9X/-DX Communication failed. !Turn the ignition switch OFF and back ON.

!Disconnect the USB storage device.

!Change to a different source. Then, return

to the USB storage device.

Unplayable File This type of file cannot be played on

this product.

Select a file that can be played. (Page 245,

Page 259)

Security for the connected external

storage device (USB, SD) is en-

abled.

Follow the external storage device (USB, SD)

instructions to disable security.

Skipped The connected external storage de-

vice (USB, SD) contains DRM pro-

tected files.

The protected files are skipped.

232

Appendix

Message Cause Action (Reference)

Protect All the files on the connected exter-

nal storage device (USB, SD) are

embedded with DRM.

Replace the external storage device (USB,

SD).

Incompatible USB The connected USB storage device

is not supported by this product.

Disconnect your device and replace it with a

compatible USB storage device.

Incompatible SD The SD memory card is not sup-

ported by this product.

!Remove your device and replace it with a

compatible SD memory card.

!Format the SD memory card. It is recom-

mended that you use SD Formatter for for-

matting SD memory cards. (Page 243)

Check USB The USB connector or USB cable is

short-circuited.

Check that the USB connector or USB cable

is not caught in something or damaged.

The connected USB storage device

consumes more than maximum al-

lowable current.

Disconnect the USB storage device and do

not use it. Turn the ignition switch to OFF,

then to ACC or ON and then connect a com-

pliant USB storage device.

Video resolution not sup-

ported

Files that cannot be played on this

product are included in the file.

Select a file that can be played. (Page 245,

Page 259)

USB1 was disconnected for

device protection. Do not re-

insert this USB memory into

the unit. Press reset to restart

USB memory.

USB2 was disconnected for

device protection. Do not re-

insert this USB memory into

the unit. Press reset to restart

USB memory.

The USB connector or USB cable is

short-circuited.

Check that the USB connector or USB cable

is not caught in something or damaged.

The connected USB storage device

consumes more than maximum al-

lowable current.

Disconnect the USB storage device and do

not use it. Turn the ignition switch to OFF,

then to ACC or ON and then connect a com-

pliant USB storage device.

The USB interface cable for iPod /

iPhone is short-circuited.

Confirm that the USB interface cable for iPod

/ iPhone or USB cable is not caught in some-

thing or damaged.

Audio Format not supported This type of file is not supported on

this product.

Select a file that can be played. (Page 245,

Page 259)

iPod

Message Cause Action

Error-02-6X/-9X/-DX iPod failure. Disconnect the cable from the iPod. Once the

iPod’s main menu is displayed, reconnect the

iPod and reset it.

Error-02-67 The iPod firmware version is old. Update the iPod version.

iTunes tagging

Message Cause Action

Error-8D Built-in FLASH ROM encountered

an error.

Turn the ignition switch to OFF and then to

ON.

Tag store failed. Tag information cannot be stored in

this product.

Try again.

Already stored. This tag information is already

stored in memory.

Tag information can only be saved once for

any given song. Tag information cannot be

saved for the same song more than once.

En 233

Appendix

Message Cause Action

Memory full. Connect iPod. The tag information is successfully

stored. The flash memory of this

product has become full.

The tag information on this product is trans-

ferred to the iPod automatically when an iPod

is connected.

Memory full. Tags not stored.

Connect iPod.

This product’s flash memory used

as the temporary storage area is

full.

The tag information on this product is trans-

ferred to the iPod automatically when an iPod

is connected.

iPod full. Tags not transferred. Memory used for tag information on

the iPod is full.

Synchronize the iPod with iTunes and clean

up the tagged playlist.

Tag transfer failed. Reconnect

your iPod.

This product’s tag information can-

not transfer to the iPod.

Check the iPod and try again.

Bluetooth

Message Cause Action

Error-10 The power failed for the Bluetooth

module of this product.

Turn the ignition switch to OFF and then to

ON.

If the error message is still displayed after per-

forming the above action, please contact your

dealer or an authorized Pioneer Service Sta-

tion.

Android Auto

Message Cause Action (Reference)

Android Auto has stopped. The connected device is not compa-

tible with Android Auto.

Check if the device is compatible with

Android Auto.

The startup of Android Auto failed

for some reasons.

!Disconnect the cable from the smartphone,

and then connect the smartphone again after

a few seconds.

!Restart the smartphone.

!Turn the ignition switch to OFF and then to

ON.

If the error message is still displayed after per-

forming the above action, please contact your

dealer or an authorized Pioneer Service Sta-

tion.

The time set in this product is not

correct.

Check if GPS signals are received and the

time is correctly set.

Bluetooth pairing failed.

Please pair your Android

phone manually.

The Bluetooth pairing failed for

some reasons.

Pair this product with the device manually.

(Page 74, Page 77)

234

Appendix

MirrorLink

Message Cause Action

The application list could not

be read out.

Failed to load the application list. !Disconnect the cable from the smartphone,

and then connect the smartphone again after

a few seconds.

!Turn the ignition switch to OFF and then to

ON.

If the error message is still displayed after per-

forming the above action, reset the smart-

phone.

If the error message is still displayed after per-

forming the above action, please contact your

dealer or an authorized Pioneer Service Sta-

tion.

There is no supported applica-

tion on your MirrorLink de-

vice.

No supported applications can be

found.

Install MirrorLink compliant applications to

your MirrorLink device.

Communication error oc-

curred.

There was a communication error. !Disconnect the cable from the smartphone,

and then connect the smartphone again after

a few seconds.

!Turn the ignition switch to OFF and then to

ON.

If the error message is still displayed after per-

forming the above action, reset the smart-

phone.

If the error message is still displayed after per-

forming the above action, please contact your

dealer or an authorized Pioneer Service Sta-

tion.

Launching the application

failed.

Failed to launch the application. Try again.

Failed to display the screen of

your device because of irregu-

lar resolution.

The image size is too large. The size of the images transferred from the

device exceeds 800 × 480.

If your MirrorLink device is

locked, please unlock it when

it is safe and lawful for you to

do so.

The MirrorLink device is locked. Unlock the MirrorLink device.

En 235

Appendix

Positioning technology

Positioning by GPS

The Global Positioning System (GPS) uses a

network of satellites orbiting the Earth. Each

of the satellites, which orbit at a height of

68 900 000 feet (21 000 km), continually broad-

casts radio signals giving time and position in-

formation. This ensures that signals from at

least three can be picked up from any open

area on the ground’s surface.

The accuracy of the GPS information depends

on how good the reception is. When the sig-

nals are strong and reception is good, GPS

can determine latitude, longitude and altitude

for accurate positioning in three dimensions.

But if signal quality is poor, only two dimen-

sions, latitude and longitude, can be obtained

and positioning errors are somewhat greater.

Positioning by dead reckoning

The built-in sensor in the navigation system

also calculates your position. The current loca-

tion is measured by detecting driving distance

with the speed pulse, the turning direction

with the gyro sensor and inclination of the

road with the G sensor.

The built-in sensor can even calculate

changes of altitude, and correct the discrepan-

cies in the distance traveled caused by driving

along winding roads or up slopes.

If you use this navigation system with connect-

ing the speed pulse, the system will become

more accurate than no connection of speed

pulse. So you connect the speed pulse without

fail to get the accuracy of positioning.

pThe position of the speed detection circuit

vary depending on the vehicle model. For

details, consult your authorized Pioneer

dealer or an installation professional.

pSome types of vehicles may not output a

speed signal while driving at just a few kilo-

meters per hour. In such a case, the current

location of your vehicle may not be dis-

played correctly while in traffic congestion

or in a parking lot.

How do GPS and dead

reckoning work together?

For maximum accuracy, your navigation sys-

tem continually compares GPS data with your

estimated position as calculated from the data

of built-in sensor. However, if only the data

from the built-in sensor is available for a long

period, positioning errors are gradually com-

pounded until the estimated position becomes

unreliable. For this reason, whenever GPS sig-

nals are available, they are matched with the

data of the built-in sensor and used to correct

it for improved accuracy.

pIf you use chains on your wheels for winter

driving or put on the spare wheel, errors

may suddenly increase because of differ-

ence in wheel diameter. Initialize the sensor

status and it may recover the accuracy to

normal condition.

=For details, refer to Clearing the status

on page 192.

236

Appendix

Map matching

As mentioned, the positioning systems used

by this navigation system are susceptible to

certain errors. Their calculations may, on occa-

sion, place you in a location on the map where

no road exists. In this situation, the processing

system understands that vehicles travel only

on roads, and can correct your position by ad-

justing it to a nearby road. This is called map

matching.

With map matching

Without map matching

Handling large errors

Positioning errors are kept to a minimum by

combining GPS, dead reckoning and map

matching. However, in some situations, these

functions may not work properly, and the error

may become bigger.

When positioning by GPS is

impossible

!GPS positioning is disabled if signals can-

not be received from more than two GPS

satellites.

!In some driving conditions, signals from

GPS satellites may not reach your vehicle.

In this case, it is impossible for the system

to use GPS positioning.

In tunnels or en-

closed parking

garages

Under elevated

roads or similar

structures

When driving

among high build-

ings

When driving through

a dense forest or tall

trees

!If a car phone or cellular phone is used

near the GPS antenna, GPS reception may

be lost temporarily.

!Do not cover the GPS antenna with spray

paint or car wax, because this may block

the reception of GPS signals. Snow buildup

can also degrade the signals, so keep the

antenna clear.

pIf a GPS signal has not been received for a

long time, your vehicle’s actual position

and the current position mark on the map

may diverge considerably or may not be up-

dated. In such case, once GPS reception is

restored, accuracy will be recovered.

En 237

Appendix

Conditions likely to cause

noticeable positioning errors

For various reasons, such as the state of the

road you are traveling on and the reception

status of the GPS signal, the actual position of

your vehicle may differ from the position dis-

played on the map screen.

!If you make a slight turn.

!If there is a parallel road.

!If there is another road very nearby, such

as in the case of an elevated freeway.

!If you take a recently opened road that is

not on the map.

!If you drive in zigzags.

!If the road has a series of hairpin bends.

!If there is a loop or similar road configura-

tion.

!If you take a ferry.

!If you are driving on a long, straight road or

a gently curving road.

238

Appendix

!If you are on a steep mountain road with

many height changes.

!If you enter or exit a multi-storey parking lot

or similar structure using a spiral ramp.

!If your vehicle is turned on a turntable or si-

milar structure.

!If your vehicle’s wheels spin, such as on a

gravel road or in snow.

!If you put on chains, or change your tires

for ones with a different size.

!If trees or other obstacles block the GPS

signals for a considerable period.

!If you drive very slowly, or in a start-and-

stop manner, as in a traffic congestion.

!If you join the road after driving around a

large parking lot.

!When you drive around a traffic circle.

!When starting driving immediately after

starting the engine.

En 239

Appendix

Route setting information

Route search specifications

Your navigation system sets a route to your

destination by applying certain built-in rules to

the map data. This section provides some use-

ful information about how a route is set.

CAUTION

When a route is calculated, the route and voice

guidance for the route are automatically set.

Also, for day or time traffic regulations, only infor-

mation about traffic regulations applicable at the

time when the route was calculated is consid-

ered. One-way streets and street closures may

not be taken into consideration. For example, if a

street is open during the morning only, but you

arrive later, it would be against the traffic regula-

tions so you cannot drive along the set route.

When driving, please follow the actual traffic

signs. Also, the system may not know some traf-

fic regulations.

!The calculated route is one example of the

route to your destination decided by the na-

vigation system while taking the type of

streets or traffic regulations into account. It

is not necessarily an optimum route. (In

some cases, you may not be able to set the

streets you want to take. If you need to take

a certain street, set a waypoint on that

street.)

!If the destination is too far, there may be in-

stances where the route cannot be set. (If

you want to set a long-distance route going

across several areas, set waypoints along

the way.)

!During voice guidance, turns and intersec-

tions from the freeway are announced.

However, if you pass intersections, turns,

and other guidance points in rapid succes-

sion, some may delay or not be announced.

!It is possible that guidance may direct you

off a freeway and then back on again.

!In some cases, the route may require you

to travel in the opposite direction to your

current heading. In such cases, you are in-

structed to turn around, so please turn

around safely by following the actual traffic

rules.

!In some cases, a route may begin on the

opposite side of a railway or river from your

actual current location. If this happens,

drive towards your destination for a while,

and try route calculation again.

!When there is a traffic congestion ahead, a

detour route may not be suggested if driv-

ing through the traffic congestion would

still be better than taking the detour.

!There may be instances when the starting

point, the waypoint and the destination

point are not on the highlighted route.

!The number of traffic circle exits displayed

on the screen may differ from the actual

number of roads.

Route highlighting

!Once set, the route is highlighted in bright

color on the map.

!The immediate vicinity of your starting

point and destination may not be high-

lighted, and neither will areas with particu-

larly complex road layouts. Consequently,

the route may appear to be cut off on the

display, but voice guidance will continue.

Auto reroute function

!If you deviate from the set route, the system

will re-calculate the route from that point

so that you remain on track to the destina-

tion.

!This function may not work under certain

conditions.

Handling and care of discs

Some basic precautions are necessary when

handling your discs.

240

Appendix

Built-in drive and care

!Use only conventional, fully circular discs.

Do not use shaped discs.

!Do not use cracked, chipped, warped, or

otherwise damaged discs as they may da-

mage the built-in drive.

!Use 12-cm discs. Do not use 8-cm discs or

an adapter for 8-cm discs.

!When using discs that can be printed on

label surfaces, check the instructions and

the warnings of the discs. Depending on

the discs, inserting and ejecting may not

be possible. Using such discs may result in

damage to this equipment.

!Do not touch the recorded surface of the

discs.

!Store discs in their cases when not in use.

!Avoid leaving discs in excessively hot envir-

onments including under direct sunlight.

!Do not attach labels, write on or apply che-

micals to the surface of the discs.

!Do not attach commercially available labels

or other materials to the discs.

—The discs may warp making the disc un-

playable.

—The labels may come off during play-

back and prevent ejection of the discs,

which may result in damage to the

equipment.

!To clean a disc, wipe it with a soft cloth,

moving outward from the center.

!Condensation may temporarily impair the

built-in drive’s performance. Leave it to ad-

just to the warmer temperature for about

one hour. Also, wipe any damp discs with a

soft cloth.

!Playback of discs may not be possible be-

cause of disc characteristics, disc format,

recorded application, playback environ-

ment, storage conditions and so on.

!Road shocks may interrupt disc playback.

!Read the precautions for discs before

using them.

Ambient conditions for playing

a disc

!At extremely high temperatures, a tempera-

ture cutout protects this product by switch-

ing it off automatically.

!Despite our careful design of the product,

small scratches that do not affect actual

operation may appear on the disc surface

as a result of mechanical wear, ambient

conditions for use or handling of the disc.

This is not a sign of the malfunction of this

product. Consider it to be normal wear and

tear.

Playable discs

DVD-Video and CD

DVD and CD discs that display the logos

shown below generally can be played on this

built-in DVD drive.

DVD-Video

En 241

Appendix

pis a trademark of DVD Format/Logo

Licensing Corporation.

pIt is not possible to play DVD-Audio discs.

This DVD drive may not be able to play all

discs bearing the marks shown above.

AVCHD recorded discs

This unit is not compatible with discs recorded

in AVCHD (Advanced Video Codec High Defi-

nition) format. Do not insert AVCHD discs. If

inserted, the disc may not be ejected.

Playing DualDisc

!DualDiscs are two-sided discs that have a

recordable CD for audio on one side and a

recordable DVD for video on the other.

!Playback of the DVD side is possible with

this product. However, since the CD side of

DualDiscs is not physically compatible with

the general CD standard, it may not be pos-

sible to play the CD side with this product.

!Frequent loading and ejecting of a

DualDisc may result in scratches to the

disc.

!Serious scratches can lead to playback pro-

blems on this product. In some cases, a

DualDisc may become stuck in the disc-

loading slot and will not eject. To prevent

this, we recommend you refrain from using

DualDisc with this product.

!Please refer to the manufacturer for more

detailed information about DualDiscs.

Dolby Digital

This product will down-mix Dolby Digital sig-

nals internally and the sound will be output in

stereo.

pManufactured under license from Dolby

Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D sym-

bol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Detailed information for

playable media

Compatibility

Common notes about disc compatibility

!Certain functions of this product may not

be available for some discs.

!Compatibility with all discs is not guaran-

teed.

!It is not possible to playback DVD-ROM/

DVD-RAM discs.

!Playback of discs may become impossible

with direct exposure to sunlight, high tem-

peratures, or depending on the storage

conditions in the vehicle.

DVD-Video discs

!DVD-Video discs that have incompatible re-

gion numbers cannot be played on this

DVD drive. The region number of the player

can be found on this product’s chassis.

DVD-R/DVD-RW/DVD-R SL (Single

Layer)/DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) discs

!Unfinalized discs which have been re-

corded with the Video format (video mode)

cannot be played back.

!Discs which have been recorded with the

Video Recording format (VR mode) cannot

be played back.

!DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) discs which have

been recorded with Layer Jump recording

cannot be played back.

!For detailed information about recording

mode, please contact the manufacturer of

media, recorders, or writing software.

242

Appendix

CD-R/CD-RW discs

!Unfinalized discs cannot be played back.

!It may not be possible to playback CD-R/

CD-RW discs recorded on a music CD re-

corder or a computer because of disc char-

acteristics, scratches or dirt on the disc, or

dirt, scratches or condensation on the lens

of the built-in drive.

!Playback of discs recorded on a computer

may not be possible, depending on the re-

cording device, writing software, their set-

tings, and other environmental factors.

!Please record with the correct format. (For

details, please contact manufacturer of

media, recorders, or writing software.)

!Titles and other text information recorded

on a CD-R/CD-RW disc may not be dis-

played by this product (in the case of audio

data (CD-DA)).

!Read the precautions with CD-R/CD-RW

discs before using them.

Common notes about the external

storage device (USB, SD)

!Do not leave the external storage device

(USB, SD) in any location with high tem-

peratures.

!Depending on the kind of the external sto-

rage device (USB, SD) you use, this pro-

duct may not recognize the storage device

or files may not be played back properly.

!The text information of some audio and

video files may not be correctly displayed.

!File extensions must be used properly.

!There may be a slight delay when starting

playback of files on an external storage de-

vice (USB, SD) with complex folder hierar-

chies.

!Operations may vary depending on the

kind of an external storage device (USB,

SD).

!It may not be possible to play some music

files from SD or USB because of file char-

acteristics, file format, recorded applica-

tion, playback environment, storage

conditions, and so on.

Notes on SD memory cards

!Some SD memory cards may not be recog-

nized by this unit even if the SD memory

cards can be recognized by a computer.

Formatting the SD memory cards using a

dedicated formatter may resolve the pro-

blem. SD memory cards formatted using

the standard formatting function on a com-

puter do not comply with the SD standard.

Problems such as that those cards cannot

be read or written could occur. It is recom-

mended that you use a dedicated formatter

to avoid such problems. All of the data

stored on an SD memory card will be de-

leted when the card is formatted. Back up

any needed data beforehand as necessary.

A dedicated formatter for SD memory

cards can be obtained from the following

site.

https://www.sdcard.org/

USB storage device compatibility

=For details about USB storage device com-

patibility with this product, refer to Specifi-

cations on page 259.

!Protocol: bulk

!You cannot connect a USB storage device

to this product via a USB hub.

!Partitioned USB storage device is not com-

patible with this product.

!Firmly secure the USB storage device when

driving. Do not let the USB storage device

fall onto the floor, where it may become

jammed under the brake or gas pedal.

!There may be a slight delay when starting

playback of audio files encoded with image

data.

!Some USB storage devices connected to

this product may generate noise on the

radio.

!Do not connect anything other than the

USB storage device.

The sequence of audio files on USB sto-

rage device

For USB storage device, the sequence is differ-

ent from that of USB storage device.

En 243

Appendix

SD memory card and SDHC memory card

=For details about SD memory card compat-

ibility with this product, refer to Specifica-

tions on page 259.

Handling guidelines and

supplemental information

!This product is not compatible with the

Multi Media Card (MMC).

!Copyright protected files cannot be played

back.

Notes specific to DivX files

!Only DivX files downloaded from DivX part-

ner sites are guaranteed for proper opera-

tion. Unauthorized DivX files may not

operate properly.

!DRM rental files cannot be operated until

playing back is started.

!This product corresponds to a DivX file dis-

play of up to 1 590 minutes 43 seconds.

Search operations beyond this time limit

are prohibited.

!DivX VOD file playback requires supplying

the ID code of this product to the DivX VOD

provider. Regarding the ID code, refer to

Displaying your DivX VOD registration code

on page 216.

!Plays all versions of DivX video, except for

DivX 7 with standard playback of DivX

media files.

!For more details about DivX, visit the follow-

ing site:

http://www.divx.com/

DivX subtitle files

!Srt format subtitle files with the extension

“.srt”can be used.

!Only one subtitle file can be used for each

DivX file. Multiple subtitle files cannot be

associated.

!Subtitle files that are named with the same

character string as the DivX file before the

extension are associated with the DivX file.

The character strings before the extension

must be exactly the same. However, if there

is only one DivX file and one subtitle file in

a single folder, the files are associated even

if the file names are not the same.

!The subtitle file must be stored in the same

folder as the DivX file.

!Up to 255 subtitle files may be used. Any

more subtitle files will not be recognized.

!Up to 64 characters can be used for the

name of the subtitle file, including the ex-

tension. If more than 64 characters are

used for the file name, the subtitle file may

not be recognized.

!The character code for the subtitle file

should comply with ISO-8859-1. Using char-

acters other than ISO-8859-1 may cause the

characters to be displayed incorrectly.

!The subtitles may not be displayed correctly

if the displayed characters in the subtitle

file include control code.

!For materials that use a high transfer rate,

the subtitles and video may not be comple-

tely synchronized.

!If multiple subtitles are programmed to dis-

play within a very short time frame, such as

0.1 seconds, the subtitles may not be dis-

played at the correct time.

244

Appendix

Media compatibility chart

General

Media CD-R/-RW DVD-R/-R SL/-R

DL/DVD-RW

USB storage de-

vice SD memory card

File system

!ISO9660 level 1

!ISO9660 level 2

!Romeo, Joliet

!UDF 1.02 / 1.50

/ 2.00 / 2.01 /

2.50

!ISO9660 level 1

!ISO9660 level 2

!Romeo, Joliet

!UDF 1.02 / 1.50

/ 2.00 / 2.01 /

2.50

FAT16/FAT32/NTFS

Maximum number of

folders 700 1 500

Maximum number of

files 999 3 500 15 000

Playable file types MP3, WMA, AAC, DivX, MPEG-1, MPEG-2,

MPEG-4

MP3, WMA, AAC, WAV, FLAC, H.264,

MPEG-2, MPEG-4, WMV, FLV, MKV, JPEG

Notes:

!Maximum playback time of audio file stored in the disc: 60 h

!Maximum playback time of audio file stored on an external storage device (USB, SD): 7.5 h (450 minutes)

MP3 compatibility

Media CD-R/-RW DVD-R/-R SL/-R

DL/DVD-RW

USB storage de-

vice SD memory card

File extension .mp3 .mp2, .mp3, .m2a, .mka

Bit rate 8 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), VBR

Sampling frequency 16 kHz to 48 kHz (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz

for emphasis) 8 kHz to 48 kHz

ID3 tag ID3 tag Ver. 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tag Ver. 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4

Notes:

!Ver. 2.x of ID3 tag is prioritized when both Ver. 1.x and Ver. 2.x exist.

!This product is not compatible with the following:

MP3i (MP3 interactive), mp3 PRO, m3u playlist

En 245

Appendix

WMA compatibility

Media CD-R/-RW DVD-R/-R SL/-R

DL/DVD-RW

USB storage de-

vice SD memory card

File extension .wma

Bit rate 5 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), VBR

Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 48 kHz

Note:

This product is not compatible with the following:

Windows Media™Audio 9 Professional, Lossless, Voice

WAV compatibility

Media CD-R/-RW DVD-R/-R SL/-R

DL/DVD-RW

USB storage de-

vice SD memory card

File extension

WAV files on the CD-R/-RW, DVD-R/-RW/-R

SL/-R DL cannot be played.

.wav

Format Linear PCM (LPCM)

Sampling frequency 16 kHz to 48 kHz

Quantization bits 8 bits and 16 bits

Note:

The sampling frequency shown in the display may be rounded.

AAC compatibility

Media CD-R/-RW DVD-R/-R SL/-R

DL/DVD-RW

USB storage de-

vice SD memory card

File extension .m4a .aac, .adts, .mka, .m4a

Bit rate 8 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR)

Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 44.1 kHz 8 kHz to 48 kHz

Note:

This product plays back AAC files encoded by iTunes.

246

Appendix

DivX compatibility

Media CD-R/-RW DVD-R/-R SL/-R

DL/DVD-RW

USB storage de-

vice SD memory card

File extension .avi/.divx

DivX files on the external storage device

(USB, SD) cannot be played.

Profile (DivX version) Home Theater Ver. 3.11/Ver. 4.x/Ver. 5.x/

Ver. 6.x

Compatible audio codec MP3, Dolby Digital

Bit rate (MP3) 8 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), VBR

Sampling frequency

(MP3)

16 kHz to 48 kHz (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz

for emphasis)

Maximum image size 720 pixels × 576 pixels

Maximum file size 4 GB

Notes:

!This product is not compatible with the following:

DivX Ultra format, DivX files without video data, DivX files encoded with LPCM (Linear PCM) audio codec

!Depending on the file information composition, such as the number of audio streams, there may be a slight

delay in the start of playback on discs.

!If a file contains more than 4 GB, playback stops before the end.

!Some special operations may be prohibited because of the composition of DivX files.

!Files with high transfer rates may not be played back correctly. The standard transfer rate is 4 Mbps for CDs and

10.08 Mbps for DVDs.

En 247

Appendix

Video files compatibility (USB, SD)

File extension .avi .mkv .mov .f4v .mp4

Compatible video

codec

MPEG-4, H.264,

H.263, Xvid

MPEG-4, H.264,

VC-1, Xvid

MPEG-4, H.264,

H.263 H.264, H.263 MPEG-4, H.264,

H.263

Compatible audio

codec

MP3, AAC,

LPCM

MP3, AAC, Vor-

bis MP3, AAC MP3, AAC MP3, AAC

Maximum frame

rate 30 fps

Maximum file size 4 GB

Maximum playback

time 150 minutes

File extension .3gp .wmv .asf .flv .vob

Compatible video

codec

MPEG-4, H.264,

H.263 WMV, VC-1 WMV, VC-1 H.264 H.264, MPEG-2

Compatible audio

codec AAC WMA WMA MP3, AAC MP3, AAC,

LPCM

Maximum frame

rate 30 fps

Maximum file size 4 GB

Maximum playback

time 150 minutes

Common notes

!Files may not be played back properly de-

pending on the environment in which the

file was created or on the contents of the

file.

!This product may not play back files, de-

pending on the application used to encode

the files.

!This product may not operate correctly, de-

pending on the application used to encode

WMA files.

!Depending on the version of Windows

Media™Player used to encode WMA files,

album names and other text information

may not be correctly displayed.

!There may be a slight delay when starting

playback of audio files encoded with image

data.

!This product is not compatible with packet

write data transfer.

!This product can recognize up to 32 char-

acters, beginning with the first character,

including extension for the file and folder

name. Depending on the display area, this

product may try to display them with a re-

duced font size. However, the maximum

number of the characters that you can dis-

play varies according to the width of each

character, and of the display area.

!Folder selection sequence or other opera-

tions may be altered, depending on the en-

coding or writing software.

!Regardless of the length of blank section

between the songs of original recording,

compressed audio discs play with a short

pause between songs.

248

Appendix

Example of a hierarchy

The following figure is an example of the tier

structure in the disc. The numbers in the fig-

ure indicate the order in which folder numbers

are assigned and the order to be played back.

: Folder

:File

l 1 L

l 2 L

l 3 L

l 4

Notes

!This product assigns folder numbers. The user

cannot assign folder numbers.

!If there is a folder that does not contain any

playable file, the folder itself will display in the

folder list but you cannot check any files in

the folder. (A blank list will appear.) Also,

these folders will be skipped without display-

ing the folder number.

Bluetooth

!The Bluetooth®word mark and logos are re-

gistered trademarks owned by Bluetooth

SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by

PIONEER CORPORATION is under license.

Other trademarks and trade names are

those of their respective owners.

SiriusXM®satellite radio

!Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos

are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio, Inc. All

rights reserved.

HD Radio™Technology

!HD Radio Technology manufactured under

license from iBiquity Digital Corporation.

U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™and

the HD, HD Radio, and “Arc”logos are pro-

prietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital

Corp.

SDHC

SDHC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.

WMA/WMV

Windows Media is either a registered trade-

mark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in

the United States and/or other countries.

pThis product includes technology owned by

Microsoft Corporation and cannot be used

or distributed without a license from

Microsoft Licensing, Inc.

DivX

En 249

Appendix

DivX Certified®devices have been tested for

high-quality DivX®(.divx, .avi) video playback.

When you see the DivX logo, you know you

have the freedom to play your favorite DivX

movies.

DivX®, DivX Certified®and associated logos

are trademarks of DivX, LLC and are used

under license.

This DivX Certified®device has passed rigor-

ous testing to ensure it plays DivX®videos.

To play purchased DivX movies, first register

your device at vod.divx.com. Find your registra-

tion code in the DivX VOD section of your de-

vice setup menu.

=For details, refer to Displaying your DivX

VOD registration code on page 216.

AAC

AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and

refers to an audio compression technology

standard used with MPEG-2 and MPEG-4. Sev-

eral applications can be used to encode AAC

files, but file formats and extensions differ de-

pending on the application which is used to

encode. This unit plays back AAC files en-

coded by iTunes.

Google, Google Play,

Android

™

, and Android Auto

Google, Google Play, Android, Android Auto

and other marks are trademarks of

Google Inc.

MirrorLink

MirrorLink Certified™, the Design Only™Certifi-

cation Logo, MirrorLink™and the MirrorLink™

Logo are certification marks and trademarks

of the Car Connectivity Consortium LLC. Un-

authorized use is strictly prohibited.

MIXTRAX

MIXTRAX is a trademark of the PIONEER

CORPORATION.

Detailed information

regarding connected iPod

devices

CAUTION

!Pioneer accepts no responsibility for data lost

from an iPod, even if that data is lost while

using this product. Please back up your iPod

data regularly.

!Do not leave the iPod in direct sunlight for ex-

tended amounts of time. Extended exposure

to direct sunlight can result in iPod malfunc-

tion due to the resulting high temperature.

!Do not leave the iPod in any location with

high temperatures.

!Firmly secure the iPod when driving. Do not

let the iPod fall onto the floor, where it may be-

come jammed under the brake or gas pedal.

For details, refer to the iPod manuals.

iPod and iPhone

250

Appendix

“Made for iPod”and “Made for iPhone”mean

that an electronic accessory has been de-

signed to connect specifically to iPod or

iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by

the developer to meet Apple performance

standards.

Apple is not responsible for the operation of

this device or its compliance with safety and

regulatory standards.

Please note that the use of this accessory with

iPod or iPhone may affect wireless perfor-

mance.

iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, and

iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., regis-

tered in the U.S. and other countries.

Lightning

Lightning is a trademark of Apple Inc.

App Store

App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.

iOS

iOS is a trademark on which Cisco holds the

trademark right in the US and certain other

countries.

iTunes

iTunes is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered

in the U.S. and other countries.

iTunes Radio

iTunes Radio is a service mark of Apple Inc.

Using app-based connected

content

IMPORTANT

Requirements to access app-based connected

content services using this product:

!Latest version of the Pioneer compatible con-

nected content application(s) for the smart-

phone, available from the service provider,

downloaded to your smartphone.

!A current account with the content service

provider.

!Smartphone Data Plan.

Note: if the Data Plan for your smartphone

does not provide for unlimited data usage, ad-

ditional charges from your carrier may apply

for accessing app-based connected content

via 3G, EDGE and/or LTE (4G) networks.

!Connection to the Internet via 3G, EDGE, LTE

(4G) or Wi-Fi network.

!Optional Pioneer adapter cable connecting

your iPhone to this product.

Limitations:

!Access to app-based connected content will

depend on the availability of cellular and/or

Wi-Fi network coverage for the purpose of al-

lowing your smartphone to connect to the In-

ternet.

!Service availability may be geographically lim-

ited to the region. Consult the connected con-

tent service provider for additional

information.

!Ability of this product to access connected

content is subject to change without notice

and could be affected by any of the following:

compatibility issues with future firmware ver-

sions of smartphone; compatibility issues with

future versions of the connected content ap-

plication(s) for the smartphone; changes to or

discontinuation of the connected Content ap-

plication(s) or service by its provider.

!Pioneer is not liable for any issues that may

arise from incorrect or flawed app-based con-

tent.

!The content and functionality of the supported

applications are the responsibility of the App

providers.

!In AppRadio Mode and Android Auto, func-

tionality through the product is limited while

driving, with available functions determined

by the App providers.

En 251

Appendix

!Availability of AppRadio Mode and Android

Auto functionalities is determined by the App

provider, and not determined by Pioneer.

!AppRadio Mode and Android Auto allow

access to applications other than those listed

(subject to limitations while driving), but the

extent to which content can be used is deter-

mined by the App providers.

Pandora®

Pandora, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora

trade dress are trademarks or registered trade-

marks of Pandora Media, Inc. Used with per-

mission.

Pandora is currently available in the United

States, Australia, and New Zealand.

Aha Radio

Aha, Aha Radio and the Aha and Aha Radio

logos are either the trademarks or the regis-

tered trademarks of Harman International In-

dustries, Incorporated.

HDMI

The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition

Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are

trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI

Licensing, LLC in the United States and other

countries.

MHL

MHL, the MHL Logo, and Mobile High-Defini-

tion Link are trademarks or registered trade-

marks of MHL, LLC in the United States and

other countries.

IVONA Text-to-Speech

Notice regarding video

viewing

Remember that use of this system for com-

mercial or public viewing purposes may con-

stitute an infringement on the author’s rights

as protected by the Copyright Law.

Notice regarding DVD-

Video viewing

This item incorporates copy protection tech-

nology that is protected by U.S. patents and

other intellectual property rights of Rovi

Corporation. Reverse engineering and disas-

sembly are prohibited.

252

Appendix

Notice regarding MP3 file

usage

Supply of this product only conveys a license

for private, non-commercial use and does not

convey a license nor imply any right to use

this product in any commercial (i.e. revenue-

generating) real time broadcasting (terrestrial,

satellite, cable and/or any other media), broad-

casting/streaming via internet, intranets and/

or other networks or in other electronic con-

tent distribution systems, such as pay-audio or

audio-on-demand applications. An indepen-

dent license for such use is required. For de-

tails, please visit

http://www.mp3licensing.com.

Notice regarding open

source licenses

For details about the open source licenses for

the functions that this product is equipped

with, please visit

http://www.oss-pioneer.com/car/multimedia/

Map coverage

For details about the map coverage of this pro-

duct, refer to the information on our

website.

Using the LCD screen correctly

Handling the LCD screen

!When the LCD screen is subjected to direct

sunlight for a long period of time, it will be-

come very hot, resulting in possible da-

mage to the LCD screen. When not using

this product, avoid exposing it to direct

sunlight as much as possible.

!The LCD screen should be used within the

temperature ranges shown in Specifica-

tions.

!Do not use the LCD screen at temperatures

higher or lower than the operating tem-

perature range, because the LCD screen

may not operate normally and could be da-

maged.

!The LCD screen is exposed in order to in-

crease its visibility within the vehicle.

Please do not press strongly on it as this

may damage it.

!Do not push the LCD screen with excessive

force as this may scratch it.

!Never touch the LCD screen with anything

besides your finger when operating the

touch panel functions. The LCD screen can

scratch easily.

Liquid crystal display (LCD) screen

!If the LCD screen is near the vent of an air

conditioner, make sure that air from the air

conditioner is not blowing on it. Heat from

the heater may break the LCD screen, and

cool air from the cooler may cause moist-

ure to form inside this product, resulting in

possible damage.

!Small black dots or white dots (bright dots)

may appear on the LCD screen. These are

due to the characteristics of the LCD

screen and do not indicate a malfunction.

!The LCD screen will be difficult to see if it is

exposed to direct sunlight.

!When using a cellular phone, keep the an-

tenna of the cellular phone away from the

LCD screen to prevent disruption of the

video in the form of disturbances such as

spots or colored stripes.

Maintaining the LCD screen

!When removing dust from or cleaning the

LCD screen, first turn this product off and

then wipe the screen with a soft dry cloth.

!When wiping the LCD screen, take care not

to scratch the surface. Do not use harsh or

abrasive chemical cleaners.

En 253

Appendix

LED (light-emitting diode)

backlight

A light emitting diode is used inside the dis-

play to illuminate the LCD screen.

!At low temperatures, using the LED back-

light may increase image lag and degrade

the image quality because of the character-

istics of the LCD screen. Image quality will

improve with an increase in temperature.

!The product lifetime of the LED backlight is

more than 10 000 hours. However, it may

decrease if used in high temperatures.

!If the LED backlight reaches the end of its

product lifetime, the screen will become

dimmer and the image will no longer be

visible. In that case, please consult your

dealer or the nearest authorized Pioneer

Service Station.

254

Appendix

Display information

Phone menu

Page

Preset Dial 83

Phone Book 81

History 82

Dial 81

Voice recognition function 86

System menu

Page

Navigation Related Settings

Navigation info window 179

AV/App Guide Mode 179

AV Source Settings

MIXTRAX Settings 178

Radio Settings

101

102

SiriusXM Settings

161

164

165

166

170

Tag Forwarding 221

Bluetooth Audio 179

Ever Scroll 180

Input/Output Settings

Smartphone Setup 88

AV Input 180

AUX Input 173

AppRadio Video Adjustment 136

Camera settings

En 255

Appendix

Page

Camera View 182

Back Camera Input 181

2nd Camera Input 184

Reverse Gear Setting 181

Parking Assist Guide 183

Back Camera: Reverse Video 182

2nd Camera: Reverse video 185

Parking Assist Guide Adjust 183

Demo Mode 185

System Language 186

Restore Settings 226

All Settings 226

Audio Settings 226

Theme Settings 226

Bluetooth Settings 226

Keyboard 186

Beep Tone 186

Touch Panel Calibration 187

Dimmer Settings 187

Dimmer Trigger 187

Day/Night 188

Dimmer Duration 188

Driving Position 139

Picture Adjustment 189

System Information

Firmware Information 190

Firmware Update 190

3D Calibration Status 191

Connection Status 192

OEM Settings 151

Theme menu

Page

Background 207

Illumination 208

Theme 209

Clock 209

Splash Screen 210

Export 211

256

Appendix

Audio menu

Page

Graphic EQ 202

Fader/Balance 194

Balance 194

Mute Level 195

Source Level Adjuster 195

Rear Speaker 198

Subwoofer 198

Speaker Level 199

Crossover 198

Subwoofer Settings 198

Listening Position 199

Time Alignment 200

Auto EQ&TA 203

A-EQ&TA Measurement 204

ASL 202

Video Setup menu

Page

DVD/DivX Setup

Subtitle Language 213

Audio Language 213

Menu Language 214

Multi Angle 214

TV Aspect 215

Parental 215

DivX® VOD 216

DVD Auto Play 217

Time Per Photo Slide 120

Video Signal Setting

AV 176

AUX 174

Camera 218

En 257

Appendix

Bluetooth menu

Page

Connection 74

Auto Connect 76

Visibility 77

PIN Code Input 77

Device Information 78

Auto Answer 85

Ring Tone 85

Invert Name 85

Bluetooth Memory Clear 78

BT Software Update 78

Bluetooth Version Information 79

258

Appendix

Specifications

General

Rated power source ............... 14.4 V DC

(allowable voltage range:

10.8 V to 15.1 V DC)

Grounding system ................... Negative type

Maximum current consumption

..................................................... 10.0 A

Dimensions (W × H × D):

AVIC-8100NEX

Chassis ..................... 178 mm × 100 mm ×

164 mm

(7 in. × 3-7/8 in. × 6-1/2 in.)

Nose ........................... 171 mm × 97 mm × 21 mm

(6-3/4 in. × 3-7/8 in. ×

7/8 in.)

AVIC-7100NEX

Chassis ..................... 178 mm × 100 mm ×

164 mm

(7 in. × 3-7/8 in. × 6-1/2 in.)

Nose ........................... 171 mm × 97 mm × 20 mm

(6-3/4 in. × 3-7/8 in. ×

3/4 in.)

AVIC-6100NEX, AVIC-5100NEX

Chassis ..................... 178 mm × 100 mm ×

164 mm

(7 in. × 3-7/8 in. × 6-1/2 in.)

Nose ........................... 170 mm × 97 mm × 8 mm

(6-3/4 in. × 3-7/8 in. ×

3/8 in.)

Weight:

AVIC-8100NEX ................. 2.1 kg (4.6 lbs)

AVIC-7100NEX ................. 2.1 kg (4.6 lbs)

AVIC-6100NEX ................. 1.8 kg (4.0 lbs)

AVIC-5100NEX ................. 1.8 kg (4.0 lbs)

NAND flash memory:

AVIC-8100NEX ................. 16 GB

AVIC-7100NEX ................. 8GB

AVIC-6100NEX ................. 8GB

AVIC-5100NEX ................. 8GB

Navigation

GPS receiver:

System ................................ L1, C/Acode GPS

SPS (Standard Positioning

Service)

Reception system .......... 50-channel multi-channel

reception system

Reception frequency .... 1 575.42 MHz

Sensitivity .......................... –140 dBm (typ)

Position update frequency

........................................... Approx. once per second

GPS antenna:

Antenna ............................. Micro strip flat antenna/

right-handed helical polari-

zation

Antenna cable ................. 3.55 m (11 ft. 7 in.)

Dimensions (W × H × D)

........................................... 33 mm × 14.7 mm × 36 mm

(1-1/4 in. × 1/2 in. ×

1-3/8 in.)

Weight ................................ 73.7 g (0.2 lbs)

Display

Screen size/aspect ratio:

AVIC-8100NEX ................. 6.95 inch wide/16:9

AVIC-7100NEX ................. 6.95 inch wide/16:9

AVIC-6100NEX ................. 6.2 inch wide/16:9

AVIC-5100NEX ................. 6.2 inch wide/16:9

Effective display area:

AVIC-8100NEX ................. 156.6 mm × 81.6 mm

(6-1/8 in. × 3-1/4 in.)

AVIC-7100NEX ................. 156.6 mm × 81.6 mm

(6-1/8 in. × 3-1/4 in.)

AVIC-6100NEX ................. 137.5 mm × 77.3 mm

(5-3/8 in. × 3 in.)

AVIC-5100NEX ................. 137.5 mm × 77.3 mm

(5-3/8 in. × 3 in.)

Pixels ............................................. 1 152 000 (2 400 × 480)

Display method ........................ TFT Active matrix driving

Color system .............................. PAL/NTSC/PAL-M/PAL-N/

SECAM compatible

Tolerable temperature range:

Power off ............................ –4 °F to +176 °F

Audio

Maximum power output ....... 50 W × 4

Continuous power output ... 22 W × 4 (50 Hz to 15 kHz,

5 %THD, 4 WLOAD, Both

Channels Driven)

Load impedance ...................... 4W(4 Wto 8 Wallowable)

Preout output level (max) .... 4.0 V

Equalizer (13-Band Graphic Equalizer):

Frequency .......................... 50 Hz/80 Hz/125 Hz/200 Hz/

315 Hz/500 Hz/800 Hz/

1.25 kHz/2 kHz/3.15 kHz/

5 kHz/8 kHz/12.5 kHz

Gain ...................................... ±12 dB

HPF:

Frequency .......................... 50 Hz/63 Hz/80 Hz/100 Hz/

125 Hz/160 Hz/200 Hz

Slope .................................... –6 dB/oct, –12 dB/oct,

–18 dB/oct

Subwoofer (mono):

Frequency .......................... 50 Hz/63 Hz/80 Hz/100 Hz/

125 Hz/160 Hz/200 Hz

En 259

Appendix

Slope .................................... –6 dB/oct, –12 dB/oct,

–18 dB/oct

Gain ...................................... –24 dB to +10 dB

Phase .................................. Normal/Reverse

Time alignment ........................ 0 to 200 step (1 inch/step)

DVD drive

System .......................................... DVD-Video, VCD, CD, MP3,

WMA, AAC, DivX, MPEG

player

Region number ........................ 1

Usable discs .............................. DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO-CD, CD,

CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R, DVD-

RW, DVD-RDL

Frequency response ............... 5 Hz to 44 000 Hz (with DVD,

at sampling frequency

96 kHz)

Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 96 dB (1 kHz) (IHF-A net-

work) (RCA level)

Output level:

Video .................................... 1.0 Vp-p/75 W(±0.2 V)

Number of channels .............. 2 (stereo)

MP3 decoding format ........... MPEG-1, 2 & 2.5 Audio

Layer 3

WMA decoding format ......... Ver.7, 8, 9 (2 ch audio)

(Windows Media Player)

AAC decoding format ............ MPEG-4 AAC (only encoded

by iTunes):

.m4a (Ver.11 and earlier)

DivX decoding format ............ Home Theater Ver.3.11,

Ver.4.X, Ver.5.X, Ver.6.X :

.avi, .divx

MPEG video decoding format

..................................................... MPEG-1: mpg, mpeg, dat

MPEG-2 PS: mpg, mpeg

MPEG-4 Part2 (Visual),

MS MPEG-4 Ver.3: avi

USB

USB standard spec. ............... USB1.1, USB2.0 High

Speed

Max current supply ................. 1.6 A

USB Class ................................... MSC (Mass Storage Class)

device, iPod (AudioClass,

HID Class) device

File system .................................. FAT16, FAT32, NTFS

MP3 decoding format ........... MPEG-1/Layer 1, MPEG-1/

Layer 2, MPEG-1/Layer 3

MPEG-2/Layer 1, MPEG-2/

Layer 2, MPEG-2/Layer 3

MPEG-2.5/Layer 3

WMA decoding format ......... WMA10 Std , WMA10 Pro,

WMA9 Lossless

AAC decoding format ............ MPEG-2 AAC-LC, MPEG-4

AAC-LC

WAVE signal format ............... Linear-PCM

H.264 video decoding format

..................................................... BaseLine Profile, Main Pro-

file, High Profile

WMV video decoding format

..................................................... VC-1 SP/MP/AP, WMV 7/8

MPEG4 video decoding format

..................................................... SimpleProfile, Advanced-

SimpleProfile (except GMC)

JPEG decoding format .......... JPEG

SD (AVIC-8100NEX and AVIC-7100NEX)

SD memory card, SDHC memory card

Compatible physical format

........................................... Version 2.0

File system ........................ FAT16, FAT32, NTFS

MP3 decoding format

........................................... MPEG-1/Layer 1, MPEG-1/

Layer 2, MPEG-1/Layer 3

MPEG-2/Layer 1, MPEG-2/

Layer 2, MPEG-2/Layer 3

MPEG-2.5/Layer 3

WMA decoding format

........................................... WMA10 Std , WMA10 Pro,

WMA9 Lossless

AAC decoding format

........................................... MPEG-2 AAC-LC, MPEG-4

AAC-LC

WAVE signal format ..... Linear-PCM

H.264 video decoding format

........................................... BaseLine Profile, Main Pro-

file, High Profile

WMV video decoding format

........................................... VC-1 SP/MP/AP, WMV 7/8

MPEG4 video decoding format

........................................... SimpleProfile, Advanced-

SimpleProfile (except GMC)

JPEG decoding format

........................................... JPEG

Bluetooth

Version .......................................... Bluetooth 3.0+EDR certi-

fied

Output power ............................ +4 dBm Max.

(Power class 2)

FM tuner

AVIC-8100NEX, AVIC-7100NEX and AVIC-6100NEX

Frequency range ............ 87.9 MHz to 107.9 MHz

Usable sensitivity ........... 11 dBf (0.8 µV/75 W, mono,

S/N: 30 dB)

260

Appendix

Signal-to-noise ratio ..... 80 dB (digital broadcasting)

(IHF-A network)

72 dB (analog broadcasting)

(IHF-A network)

AVIC-5100NEX

Frequency range ............ 87.9 MHz to 107.9 MHz

Usable sensitivity ........... 11 dBf (0.8 µV/75 W, mono,

S/N: 30 dB)

Signal-to-noise ratio ..... 72 dB (IHF-A network)

AM tuner

AVIC-8100NEX, AVIC-7100NEX and AVIC-6100NEX

Frequency range ............ 530 kHz to 1 710 kHz

Usable sensitivity ........... 25 µV (S/N: 20 dB)

Signal-to-noise ratio ..... 80 dB (digital broadcasting)

(IHF-A network)

62 dB (analog broadcasting)

(IHF-A network)

AVIC-5100NEX

Frequency range ............ 530 kHz to 1 710 kHz

Usable sensitivity ........... 25 µV (S/N: 20 dB)

Signal-to-noise ratio ..... 62 dB (IHF-A network)

CEA2006 Specifications

Power output ............................. 14 W RMS × 4 Channels

(4 Wand ≦1 % THD+N)

S/N ratio ....................................... 91 dBA (reference: 1 W into

4W)

Note

Specifications and design are subject to possible

modifications without notice due to im-

provements.

En 261

Appendix

262

En 263

PIONEER CORPORATION

1-1, Shin-ogura, Saiwai-ku, Kawasaki-shi,

Kanagawa 212-0031, JAPAN

PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.

P.O. Box 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A.

TEL: (800) 421-1404

PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.

340 Ferrier Street, Unit 2, Markham, Ontario L3R 2Z5, Canada

TEL: 1-877-283-5901

TEL: 905-479-4411

PIONEER EUROPE NV

Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium/Belgique

TEL: (0) 3/570.05.11

PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.

253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936

TEL: 65-6472-7555

PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.

5 Arco Lane, Heatherton, Victoria, 3202, Australia

TEL: (03) 9586-6300

PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO, S.A. de C.V.

Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso

Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico, D.F. 11000

TEL: 55-9178-4270

先鋒股份有限公司

台北市內湖區瑞光路407號8樓

電話: 886-(0)2-2657-3588

先鋒電子（香港）有限公司

香港九龍長沙灣道909號5樓

電話: 852-2848-6488

<CRB4514-A> UC

To keep up to date with the latest navigational data, you can periodically

update your navigation system. For further details, please visit:

http://pioneer.naviextras.com

Pioneer Avic 5100 Nex Operation Manual

AVIC 8100 NEX - Operation Manual AVIC-8100NEX_OM_EN Free User Guide for Pioneer GPS, Manual - page1

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation